Home

User`s Guide

1. Routes Marks Tracks Boundaries PlanBook Name Type Show Summary Boundary Created 9 18 2008 Line WO Boundary Created 12 27 2006 Polygon K Boundary Created 12 27 2006 Line K Boundary Created 12 27 2006 Polygon K Boundary Created 12 27 2006 Polygon K Export Go to Properties Print Show All HideAl Defaut Database x Figure 9 6 PlanBook Boundaries Tab To edit Boundary properties 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Boundaries Tab From the list double click on the boundary that you would like to edit The Boundary properties dialog box will appear Edit the properties using the available Tabs from within the properties dialog box 5 When finished click the small X in the upper right corner of the properties dialog box to close it To delete a boundary 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Boundaries Tab 2 Click on the boundary to delete from the list in the PlanBook 3 Click on the Delete button The boundary will immediately be deleted 4 Repeat as necessary for each boundary that you wish to delete i NOTE Only the boundary name summary and visibility can be edited in the PlanBook Changing Column Appearance Each of the Tabs in the PlanBook can be customized to your specifications Each column under a given Tab contains a column header which li
2. Q gt lt S a wa S 202 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Sounder Usage 161 Troubleshooting Sounder 171 Star Navigator 107 Status Messages 17 T Targets in Admiral 128 Alarm Settings 130 Naming Conventions 131 Tender Tracker 185 Configuring 186 Tender Tracker Alarms 187 Unlocking 185 Tides and Currents 75 78 Changing the Date 79 ETA Calculator 23 Graph 79 Printing 75 Using Tides and Currents 23 Tile Horizontally 107 Tile Vertically 107 Toolbars 99 Buttons 100 Tools Options 50 3D 54 Audio 54 Colors 54 Console 52 Misc 53 Ports Configure 50 Sounder 62 Units of Measure 53 Video 66 Topo Chart Display 105 Tracking Targets 127 Tracks 20 38 47 71 Track Line Coloring 38 Track Line Legend 38 Troubleshooting 126 U Upload 97 Uploading 112 Uploading toa GPS 97 Upload Download 97 V Video 66 View Manager 28 116 W warning indicators 116 Water Depth 48 187 Waypoint 37 Weather Data 87 Getting your Weather Data 92 GRIB 25 Nobeltec Weather Data 89 SkyMate 25 XM WxWorx 25 Weather Overlay 105 Wind 87 Window List 107 X XTE 48 Y Z Zooming Overzooming 35 Product Feature Hand Panning Tool GPS Satellite Strength Trip Odometer NavBar Free GRIB Overlay Includes Worldwide Tides amp Currents until 2100 ETA Calculator Integrating Tides Nobeltec Route Wizard PlanBook Nobeltec Radar Support Nobeltec Sounder Support Nobeltec Sailing Plus Pack Support
3. Slot Tender ID Description Channel Duration 1 1 Wave Runner 1 3 5 X V Managed Mode 2 25 Bob in Amsterdam 9 10 v 3 34 Short boat 4 u 7 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 z Cancel Figure 25 2 Tender Directory In Slot 1 input the ID and Description of the first Tender If you are in Managed Mode input the Channel from which that STU is broadcasting and the Duration for the SBU to listen to this channel In Autonomous Mode Channel and Duration fields are grayed out 6 Continue inputting information for all Tenders currently active and carrying an STU device 7 Click OK to close the Tender Directory To delete an STU from the Tender Directory 1 Open Tools Options Targets 2 Click Tender Directory 3 Click on the Tender ID you wish to delete and press the lt Delete gt key 4 Click Yes to verify deletion 5 Click OK to close the Tender Directory Changing Target Appearance To display Wakes and change Target Name appearance all Targets NOTE The Display Predictors option does not apply to Tenders 1 Open Tools Options Targets 2 Click Display Wakes to see how a target has moved over time 3 Click the small down arrow next to the Target Name Settings option to change the appearance of the target names Full Short or None NOTE Tender Short and Full names are identical either option displays the description of the Tender as input into the Tender Directory 4
4. Step 2 Installing Charts Passport World Charts International and Domestic Charts Passport World Charts are stand alone digital vector charts subdivided into regions and stored on a single World Folio DVD or CD ROM that comes with your software These charts are encrypted and you must purchase a Chart Permit number for each chart you wish to use in order to access it NOTE CD ROMs can be provided in place of DVDs during initial purchase if so requested You will be required to pay shipping and handling expenses to replace DVDs with CD ROMs Created from data provided by worldwide hydrographic offices Passport World Charts are also called World Folios and abbreviated to WF i NOTE World Folio discs are backwards compatible You may continue to install charts for all regions you have purchased from your WF disc until you purchase a new disc The lower a WF number is the older the chart is Jeppesen Marine offers a service to update charts on a one time basis or annual update subscriptions Only WF19 and higher are supported by Jeppesen Marine technical support Installing Passport World Charts Install Nobeltec Navigation Software 2 Purchase Chart Permit number s for all chart region s that you wish to use from Jeppesen Marine or any authorized Nobeltec product retailer 3 With all software programs closed insert the World Folio DVD into the DVD drive Make sure that the WF number matches the Chart Permit you
5. 4 Basic Screens This chapter provides an overview of the Nobeltec Navigation Software screens features and dialogs along with basic feature functionality Nobeltec provides you with two options for onscreen viewing PlanView Nobeltec s standard User interface Windows style multiple paned view of navigation charts ToolBars etc NavView Admiral Only NavView is an alternative User interface that is ideal for touchscreens and multiple monitor environments PlanView Primary Screen Elements Title Bar The Title Bar Figure 4 1 is the topmost part of the PlanView screen Following the Nobeltec name is text containing the active chart number and native scale The first bracket pair shows the zoom level and the apparent scale The second bracket pair contains depth units and the chart name rs Mobeltec 0411 1 2 160 000 2 lt lt 232 722 nm gt gt Feet GULF OF MEXICO Figure 4 1 Title Bar Main Menu Nobeltec in PlanView functions like most Windows applications using drop down menus that provide various options This row of drop down menus is referred to as the Main Menu Figure 4 2 Fil Edit View Tools Radar Sounder Window Help Figure 4 2 Main Menu ToolBars ToolBars are used to shortcut your connection to various functions within the program In order to select which ToolBars and ToolBar buttons to display select Tools ToolBars from the main menu HAV BRBOOQ A VX OMOCSR Figure 4 3
6. Chapter 6 Basic Skills 37 Instant Waypoint Instant Waypoint Creates a simple route consisting of two waypoints from the boat s current position to a location you choose 1 Click Instant Waypoint on the ToolBar or select Edit New Instant Waypoint from the main menu A mark called Origin will be placed at the current boat position 2 Left click on the selected destination to activate the second mark Range Bearing Lines 7 2 S Range and Bearing Boat to Point Allows you to obtain range and bearing from the boat to another point on the chart 1 Select Edit New Range Bearing Line Boat to Point from the main menu the lt F12 gt Hot Key or the Boat to Point button if added to the ToolBar 2 Click any point on the chart to view range and bearing to that point 28 Range and Bearing Point to Point Allows you to view the range and bearing between two points on the chart 1 Select Edit New Range Bearing Line Point to Point from the main menu the lt Shift F12 gt Hot Key or the Point to Point button if added to the ToolBar 2 Click on any chart point drag your cursor to the second point and click again to create a Point to Point range bearing line Route Routes Routes consist of a series of waypoints Use routes alone or in conjunction with an auto pilot to increase navigation ease and safety 1 From an open chart click the Route tool on the ToolBar click the lt F8 gt Hot
7. Depth Units Change depth units on the Passport charts to display fathoms feet or meters Chapter 5 Charts and Data 31 To Change Depth Units 1 Click Tools Options Units 2 Choose the depth units you wish to display The Power of Nobeltec Passport Passport Options ToolBar This ToolBar controls the data that you wish to display Passport Options ToolBar bai Ld Y Figure 5 2 Passport Options ToolBar ka Soundings Display Used to declutter soundings decluttering merges similar depth soundings from quilted charts which makes the charts more readable The lt S gt Hot Key toggles Soundings on and off To Declutter depth soundings 1 Click the down arrow to the right of the Soundings display button 2 Click De clutter WARNING Decluttering merges some soundings Use with Caution Lights and Buoys Display Levels Changes how lights are viewed Click the down arrow to reveal options e Nav Aids Off Removes all lights buoys and markers from the charts e Marker Only Turns on navigation lights and graphical buoy icons but not their names or their light and sound characteristics e Marker and Name Turns on navigation lights and graphical buoy icons as well as their name light and sound characteristics Ww I oO Qo S S A Y S S l LA 32 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Sector Lights show the area REFORD INLET LT in which the t light is
8. Line color most efficient tacking see Figure 24 6 Lines Seen Color n ple N Table 24 2 Sailing Display Onscreen Indicators De A 8957 3024 9072 Lay Lines Color Default Color Black j Lay line from the osd Lay Line Calculation 4 Woy mark representing the P 5278 spa3 optimal tack to the mark Lay Line calculation relies on variables such as boat performance hull design sail configuration weight and wind speeds As a result some boats are able il 9258 to sail more efficiently upwind than others Lay line from the boat i 3 thompson ot For example Figures 24 4 and 24 5 show the polars from two separate representing optimal 9312 boats The polar in Figure 24 4 shows a boat that points closer into the wind tack to the mark lay line j N 6299 FIW 4 05 9384 A when wind speeds increase Figure 24 5 shows a boat that must have an E eet ae if S optimal windward angle of about 50 at low wind speeds and 45 as the me r 9420 9 n wind speed increases Downwind performances of each boat are similar with n 3 best performance at 145 in low winds and 175 in higher wind speeds i 9570 Figure 24 6 Lay Lines to a Windward Mark 182 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide NOTE If a polar is not loaded or if your boat s polar values cannot be read a default tacking angle of 45 will display serving as a point of reference for basic upwind and downwind sa
9. When on the water at night any light coming from inside your pilot house or helm station can reduce visibility In order to increase visibility in moderate to dark lighting conditions and reduce eye fatigue Nobeltec Navigation Software includes two on screen views that decrease the contrast and amount of light coming from your monitor Night Vision turns the screen into shades of red Twilight Vision changes the screen to shades of gray Brightness and intensity are adjustable i NOTE The two screen intensity options may have an affect on all the software programs on your PC while they are activated To activate the Night or Twilight screen intensity modes 1 Select View Screen Intensity from the Main Menu and then either Twilight Colors or Night Colors 2 After the screen switches from Normal Intensity to Twilight or Night display mode use the slider bar to adjust intensity 3 When you are finished operating in one of the alternative screen intensity modes select View Screen Intensity Normal to return the screen to the Normal intensity mode i NOTE You can toggle through the different modes using the lt Ctrl I gt hot key or you can add the Normal Twilight and Night display mode ToolBar buttons to the program ToolBar To return to normal mode from Twilight or Night display mode click lt I gt Help Tips Another feature that can be of tremendous value is called Tips The Tips dialog box will appear each ti
10. External Radar Many external radars can acquire targets using either ARPA or MARPA Most of these radars can also broadcast this data to Nobeltec using the NMEA standard sentences When properly connected Admiral paints these targets from external radars Point and Click MARPA Nobeltec Admiral can be used to easily acquire and track radar targets Using the power of the PC and the mouse cursor identifying and tracking targets is easier than ever Chapter 21 Radar Usage 151 Point and Click Radar MARPA MARPA is an acronym for Mini Automated Radar Plotting Aid Its primary purpose is for collision avoidance and target tracking AY warnine No single navigational aid should be relied upon for the safety of vessel and crew The captain has the responsibility to use all navigation aids to verify position Electronic navigation aids are not a substitute for basic navigational principles and common sense Properly tuning and adjusting your radar in changing conditions is critical for target tracking MARPA target tracking requires accurate heading data A poorly performing heading sensor makes target tracking impossible For best performance use a high speed GPS gyro compass and GPS Hhebetter jispi Faces gay Puryteack ajz E BE Was Tah Bads Sorde Selig Wie Hi mi xi ih 4 43236 BNL G5 BA VORA A A vi ey W e K agin DE Ribaks EA 1 gt 45 37 40N hk ies Lon 122 40 783 W 2 Lips A A n EE LHE M A ie Lidar
11. Follow the instructions below to create or edit NavView screen layouts To Configure Views and Layouts in NavView 1 Click View from the main menu 2 Click View Manager 3 If there are multiple monitors select to enable disable monitors then click on a monitor to view the existing layout 4 Select and Configure Layouts Click Edit to edit the existing layout or create a new layout Chapter 4 Basic Screens 29 Figure 4 19 Edit the Layout 5 Select a Layout Select a layout consisting of one to four panes Edit the Layout Selected pane is designated by a yellow border As you click on a window type Vector Photo 3D Sounder Navinfo 1 4 Polar Raster Topographic Radar Video Nobeltec Connect the selected pane will automatically proceed to the next pane 7 Click Done when finished Select the layout you created in the View Manager to display it Right Click Mouse Menus Most screen objects have right click mouse pop up menus that provide tools specific to that object Right mouse menus are available for items such as marks routes waypoints the boat icon ToolBars console and charts Use the lt Application Key gt keyboard right side next to lt Ctrl gt if your keyboard is SO equipped to open the right click menu A I cy a A e z S wa 30 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide A SZ Sy S A W GA S lt a i gt 5 Charts and Data Types of Charts VECTOR CHARTS
12. Forbr ser ir 13216571J W n Figure 21 37 DHCP Clients Table The RadarSensor is clearly identified with its accompanying IP address Ping the radar as described previously Once the radar responds close the Run window If the ping request does not respond or gives the message Hardware error Request timed out or anything other than Reply from 192 168 0 1 there is something wrong with the connection Check the following 1 Verify that the IR2 works with the direct connect mode This significantly reduces the possibility of failure in the IR2 Control box and focuses our attention on the network 2 The PC and the radar are connected to a router hub using straight through cables hold connectors upside down side by side and verify that the color order is the same on both sides The Network Interface Card software is installed correctly 4 The power to the radar has been on for at least one full minute The LED lights on the RJ 45 connector for both the PC and the MDS box are illuminated and or blinking The left most LED should remain solid while the other LED may blink Verify the IP address and Subnet mask are obtained automatically 7 Ifyou are uncertain about network configuration please contact the network administrator or the NIC provider s technical support Frequently Asked Questions Q A hs was tracking a target on my radar screen and it suddenly disappeared What happened to it One of
13. Options for this setting are 6 Degrees 9 Degrees 12 Degrees 15 Degrees 22 Degrees or 45 Degrees Default for a 200 kHz Transducer is 22 Degrees default for a 50 kHz Transducer is 9 Degrees Changes made to this option impacts only newly recorded data not previously recorded data Bathy Recorder Depth when frequency changes 50 kHz or 200 kHz Options are every 10 units based on Tools Options Units settings from 30 500 When the established depth is crossed the cone angle in use is changed NOTE All units of measure are adjustable from Tools Options Units Figure 8 14 Transducer Cone Angle Differences Bathy Recorder Rendering Exaggeration Normally a sample has a range of influence dictated by the depth and the transducer cone angle You can use this option to exaggerate that rendering to increase the range of influence of a Bathy Recorder sample In essence this setting causes your depth recording to draw with a wider or narrower calculation Since this is a subjective setting you are encouraged to experiment with the value to see what style and setting you prefer Changes to this option impact both new and previously collected data Options for this setting are Standard default 2x 4x 8x and Maximum WARNING There may be a significant change in depth beyond the transducer cone angle that could prove materially hazardous Increasing rendering exaggeration fills in more areas and may look more a
14. You can also display or hide the Menu Buttons at any time by clicking the Menu Tool Button Tool Buttons The Tool Buttons are a group of six buttons in the lower right corner of NavView Use these buttons to manipulate what is displayed in NavView and control the ToolBar and InfoBar e Info Click to display or hide the InfoBar e Tool Click to display or hide the available ToolBars Passport Chart Layers Radar Controls and Radar Tools These ToolBars function precisely as they do in PlanView e Menu Click to display or hide the Menu Buttons Co l S lt D c gt l ee 114 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Fifa ces eae valle Teme mi ey TE 5 ore ee at ee ai Pa ae S F r H Pa i HAYODOE WN Ee Ties rE E Vessel Position Lat 45 37 428 N Lon 122 41 212 W Or O00 aM 206 lt lt 2 AMM eee 1 Ese f N i re owiny Bridge Aig Ne F JEn Center A on Boat Instant Waypoint PLAYBACK Objects VANCOUVER Speed Heading soa 19 0 kts cog 94 T Info Tool of cts N A WTR N A aren pe Hoa 114 T oT N A Ai gt f Click NOBELTEC Figure 18 2 NavView 3 Panel View Chapter 18 NavView 115 e Back Scrolls through available ToolBars or InfoBars signal Tracking and Autopilot e Next Reverse scrolls through available ToolBars or InfoBars e Tides amp Currents Sh
15. BIAN S Mobeltec Other aac M PO N tt Exit Click on the Tool O 6 6uhn button to replace the Cc MOB pke a gt Q oe FES ot z as p i AMS i NORTH PORTLANCHGI ES z Hneastatago AE nagn a a w InfoBar with a ToolBar foam Vessel Position Speed Heading info Tool Menu Lat 45 37 428 N sos 19 0 kts cts N A wir N A Prod werd g 06 Lon 122 41 212 W coG 94 T HOG 114 T opt N A 4 gt cik INIOBELTEC infoBar Click on the Info button The Back and Next to make the InfoBar buttons toggle through appear and disappear the InfoBar Panels Figure 4 16 NavView Screen Elements Click on these menu buttons to effect the command on the button Click the Menu button to hide or show the buttons on the right side of the screen Right Mouse Click Button for touchscreen users Navinfo Window The Navlnfo window is one of the tools Nobeltec Navigation Software provides for you to see specific sensor based data in an at a glance format Window layout and subpanel content are customizable allowing you to display the data and calculated values of your choice To open a NavInfo window in PlanView click Window Navinfo Window Figure 4 17 Navinfo Window with Polar Display The Navinfo window is sub divided into content specific subpanels Each subpanel contains one type of information such as Course Over Ground Rate of Turn etc and can be customized as to data c
16. Buel Bost to Endin Nreated 8 15 2006 2 Waypoints Detail Routes Marks Tracks Boundaries Route Details Tab Click on this Tab to view waypoint infor OW AT L EA Route List Tab This shows all routes saved in your program Figure 9 1 PlanBook Route Tab Chapter 9 PlanBook 67 Selecting a Route to Edit If you have an active route and enter the PlanBook the active route s information will be shown on this Tab in the Route Summary pane If a route is not active then the route list will be sorted alphabetically and the information from the first route in the list will be displayed To select a route 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab Click on the name of the route that you want to work with The information for this route should now be displayed in the Route Summary window above 4 To edit individual waypoints click on the Route Detail Tab Setting the Boat Speed for the Entire Route Setting the boat speed is important when calculating an ETA for a route To set the estimated speed for the entire route 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab Click on the name of the route that you want to work with Enter a boat speed in the Speed Over Ground SOG text box Click Apply to All Legs Setting the Boat Speed for an Individu
17. Draft The extent to which a boat protrudes into water The draft of a boat may vary due to changes in weight and changes in water salinity Drift The cumulative effect of wind and current on the ship DSC See Digital Selective Calling Ebb Current Ebb Movement of tidal current away from shore or down a tidal river or estuary Electronic Chart Display and Information System ECDIS A hardware software data marine navigation system that meets the specifications of the International Hydrographic Organization IHO An ECDIS is the only electronic system allowed to replace paper charts under the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea SOLAS Electronic Chart System ECS A system comprised of 1 navigation software 2 navigation data 3 system hardware An ECS is any combination of hardware and software that displays marine charts electronically The term ECS is used specifically when ECDIS specifications are not met by the software hardware system Electronic Navigation Chart ENC An electronic data file containing information that could be used to display a chart Estimated Time of Arrival ETA The calculated arrival time to an active mark or waypoint assuming no change in present course and speed or weather conditions This time is based on computer clock time For greatest accuracy make sure computer clock is synchronized with real time Fish Finder See Sounder Flood Current Flood T
18. If you have purchased and installed the Tender Tracker Plus Pack see ek hi fairs i a data ste ce canard Chapter 25 Tender Tracker to set up Tender Target Tracking sy apa Pe A E A ae ante NMEA data output devices connected to your computer AIS data is in Click OK to close the Tools Options window tha ford Of sik AIVDIM Or ANDO sentence Click the NavBar Targets Tab or InfoBar Targets in NavView When you have finished click Done 10 Click the down arrow on the target list to view all targets in the area If Click OK to close Tools Options no targets are listed verify that the radar and AIS receiver are properly set up and configured to send data to the computer xi 11 Targets will appear on the Chart window pane at their Lat Lon Select a COM TIAIVDM 1 1 B D030wn15EN gt 4 0 31 target from the displayed Target list in the NavBar or InfoBar and click 9 i i COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 B52G6 005kV756ngmU wwwmSCP06 0 05 Find to center it on the chart COM 7IAIVDM 1 18 4030 vjul1 PT a0 viT K gt kho0042 0 07 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030 vidul1PT a0 786KJU3700 lt 14 0 1E fare x COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030wnl w1PTaG 49 gt KAtGQ00 lt 1p 0 29 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 A 4030 vil u 1PT a0 gt 4T KS 3wGO0D 1L 0 68 Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy S aAA a E OAE TE Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 1 4QUd 60000WiqOBdvk1
19. Nobeltec Bathy Recorder Plus Pack Support Video Camera Support XM Plus Pack Support Tender Tracker Plus Pack Support OCENS WeatherNet Pre Installed Enhanced AIS Filtering Enhanced Nobeltec Radar Support Track Line Coloring GlassBridge Network Support Multi Monitor Support NavView Interface NavView Auto Hide Customizable Vessel Sizing ARPA Support for External Radars MARPA Target Tracking GRIB Weather Animation Customizable Navinfo Panels HandPanningTool S d r oa GPS Satellite Strength Trip Odometer Navbar v 7 freeGRBOveray o o oa Includes Worldwide Tides amp Currents until 2100 V 7 ETA Calculator IntegratingTides o ML NobeltecRouteWizard d ML PanBok o o oa NobeltecRadarSupport d ML NobeltecSounderSupport ML NobeltecSaiing Plus Pack Support NobeltecBathy Recorder Plus Pack Support v 7 VideoCamera Support ML XMPusPakSuppot EL Tender Tracker Plus Pack Support ooo LOCENSWeatherNet Pre Installed Enhanced lsFiteing ooo d oao Enhanced Nobeltec Radar Support fo o racklineColoring oo d oao GlasBridge NetworkSupport MultiMonitorSupport ooo d o o Nawiew interface o d oao NawiewAutoHide o d o o Customizable Vessel Sizing ARPA Support for External Radars foo MARPATargetTading P GRBWeatherAnimation So o J ao Customizable Navinfo Panes tPanel 4Panes VNS 1 Panel Admiral 4 Panels Product Features This product features table compares some of the key featu
20. This opens a Delete Bathy Recorder Data dialog box where you may select to delete previously recorded bathymetric chart data by day or date range This method removes an entire day or range of days of recorded data Earliest files that can be deleted are yesterday s or prior i NOTE You will be asked to confirm deletion after clicking the Delete button before the selected files are permanently removed e Demo Bathy Recorder Simulates the effects of using Bathy Recorder with existing bathymetric information such as ChartGridding etc When the simulation starts Shaded Relief is enabled and the boat is set to follow a route The simulation function takes bathymetric information from existing charts and applies current setup configurations such as cone angle and rate of refresh The 3D display shows this simulation until you select Demo Bathy Recorder again to turn off the demonstration Typically the simulation mode will create its own temporary route based on settings previously determined by Jeppesen Marine However if there is a route you wish to simulate you can open that route in Nobeltec Navigation Software rename the route BR DEMO ROUTE The next time you click Demo Bathy Recorder the route you saved will be demonstrated in the 3D display WARNING For safety reasons the demo feature does not work when receiving GPS information If you attempt to use the Demo Bathy Recorder feature when GPS data is being received a wa
21. Wessel SOG See it earns ell Time to Ending WP 1950 02 55 Route Details je oe i Heda Fuel Starting to Ending WF 0 00 USGal Apply Curent Apply c ety Drift Set Fuel Rates Fuel Boat to Ending WP 0 00 USGal Route List Routes A Mte Detail for Route Created 8 15 2006 2 Waypoints The number of Show Name Detail i The Route List Be te Created 8 15 2006 waypoints will be displays all oeeatemrtnene aes shown in the Detail current routes gt Route Created 6 75 2006 2 wavponts 11 452 nm column gt Route Created 8725 2006 2 walpoints 6 666 nm gt Route Created 8725 2006 3 waypoints 10 766 nm gt lt Route Created 8730 2006 2 waypoints 0 821 nm Route Created 12 27 2006 wapone 0425 pete x oute Created waypoints nm Deletethe gt lt Route Created 1226 2006 WaUpOIS 2 266 nm route Click here to Import a route Mew Reverse Copp Import E spart Properties Print Show All Hide All Default Database Pe z vv Creates a New Route Click here to S Click here to view the 2 make a Copy A Properties of a route 4 of the route Reverses the order of the waypoints 0 Click here to Export the route L a Figure 4 7 PlanBook A S D S vA O A ia I gt 22 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Click here to sync Tides amp Currents Title Bar shows the name j i Use menu options to access Configure Set you
22. When you click on an item such as a mark waypoint route or the boat a gray rectangular border is drawn around that item indicating that it is the currently selected item Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Navigation Software 103 Print Preview Tool Use this command to display the active window as it would appear when printed When you choose this command the main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which the page will be displayed in its printed format This allows you to see what the printed page will look like before you send the data to your printer Print Tool Use this command to print a chart section float plan tide graph or current graph This command presents the Print dialog where you may specify the range of pages to be printed the number of copies the destination printer and other printer configuration options Quilting Tool This button controls the enabling and disabling of ChartQuilting ChartQuilting is enabled by default Range Circle Toggle Tool Click this button to display Range Circles around the boat icon Range Circles provide an easy visual reference to distances around your boat They are similar to the Range Circles that can be displayed by some radars Range Circles are completely customizable and you can change the number of circles range circle radius range circle thickness and range circle color 72 NS Range Bearing Boat to Point Tool Creates a range bearing line from
23. ns he is 2 Windspeed True Wind Angle Apparent Wind Angle True 1 1 1 1 13 14 i 04 Nc wu l S a gt wa a S S a gt wy WA g S E l A 14 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide B amp G Format continued 27 RC 7 RC RC 30 RC Table 3 10 B amp G Format a wapene OOOO e femea OOO bfe o 0 Wind Angle appen O a Wind ngletue O o magrenew SS OCKAM Format continued Table 3 11 OCKAM Format Testing the Connection When you have connected one or more input and or output devices to your computer test the connections to verify that they are working correctly Nobeltec provides a tool called Port Test Start All Programs Nobeltec Port Test There are 4 links in Port Test that are used to attempt to connect to COM Ports 1 4 using Window s HyperTerminal program Since many computers have more than 4 COM ports using a Serial to USB adapter use the Tools Options Ports Configure View Data button to verify which data is being received How to Log Inputs and Outputs Sometimes it may be necessary to log a large amount of data so that it can be manually analyzed for problems 1 Click on Tools Options Ports Configure 2 Click the Log All Input check box or the Log All Output check box Data is saved in a file named comx in log where x is a number corresponding to the COM port used located in C Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series
24. object on the chart by clicking the lt Tab gt Hot Key Marks Marks A user defined point on the chart that can be labeled and connected to other marks Use the lt F7 gt Hot Key to create a new mark at the Lat Lon of the cursor Event Mark Event Mark Event Mark marks the boat s current position To create an Event Mark select Edit New Event Mark from the main menu or press lt F5 gt An event mark will be automatically placed at the boat s current position Press and hold lt Ctrl gt while creating an Event Mark to add current depth to the name if depth sounder is connected To change the default Event Mark icon 1 Select Tools Options from the main menu 2 Goto the Misc Tab 3 Select a new icon from the Default Event Mark Icon listbox 4 Click OK Line Circle Boundary Boundary Man Overboard Figure 6 2 Examples of User Created Objects Annotations Annotations An annotation is a Mark without an icon consisting of multiple lines of text displayed on the chart Man Overboard Man Overboard Assists in recording and navigating to a position Man Overboard is a modified Mark but retains all normal Mark properties 1 Click the Man Overboard button on the ToolBar or lt F4 gt 2 The chart will re center and place the icon directly under the vessel 3 The Man Overboard mark will become the active mark with range and bearing information displayed on the console or NavBar
25. the boat to a point When you select this tool a line will be drawn from the boat icon to the mouse cursor Move to the position you want and click the left mouse button A mark will be placed with a line drawn from the boat icon to the mark The range and bearing from the boat icon to the mark will be displayed on the line 28 Range Bearing Point to Point Tool Creates a range bearing line between two points Click to place the first mark then click at a second location to place the second mark A line is drawn between the marks and the range and bearing between the two marks will be displayed on the line SON l N S 3 gt S gt a S I S b 104 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Raster Charts Display Tool This changes the active window chart type to raster charts Rectangular Zoom Tool This tool allows you to zoom to a specific part of the chart Click and hold the left mouse button on the chart where you want to zoom in Then drag the mouse cursor down and to the right You will see a box drawn in the area you re highlighting This is the area of the chart that will be displayed 112 is Reset Cross Track XTE Error Tool This button resets the Cross Track Error to zero This can be a useful tool when you exceed the Cross Track Error limit and decide on a new course to steer Resetting the Cross Track Error will then give you a fresh start to your intended target Right
26. using the Sounder Menu or via the Sounder Display Right Click Menu No No l wa x Q S A l N N 164 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Figure 22 5 Sounder Frequency Split Screen The benefits of each frequency are described in Table 22 1 Shorter wavelength provides a sharper picture but can t go as deep e Finer resolution is better for finding smaller fish and viewing seafloor details e Narrow beam is more focused and reduces the influence of rough water Table 22 1 Frequency Comparison Adjusting the Range Increase Range Ie Decrease Range Show List Of Ranges Range is maximum depth you determine that the InSight Sounder should display onscreen plus any shift that is applied to the view While the actual depth may exceed your settings no data will be returned beyond this artificial limit Range can be adjusted manually using the Increase Range and Decrease Range buttons Single clicking either button will increase or decrease the range by one setting based on measurement preferences The small down arrow next to each button brings up a list of available ranges allowing you to instantly jump to a specific range Current Sounder range can be seen by examining the depth scale to the right of the Sounder Display Auto Range Auto range feature enables an automatic range finder within the Nobeltec Navigation Software In this mode Sounder will automatically
27. 4 PlanBook Marks Tab 2 In the drop down box next to Origin select your vessel If you have named your vessel in the Boat Properties menu your vessel s name will appear in the drop down box If you have not the default name of SS Nobeltec will appear 3 Inthe column labeled Rng Brg To you should now see the updated range and bearing for each mark in the program from the vessel s Current position To calculate range and bearing from a user specified point to a mark 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Marks Tab 2 Click on the Select New Origin button next to the Origin drop down box The Insert Waypoint window appears 3 Input your Lat Lon coordinates or to use an existing waypoint click the radio button labeled Select an Existing Waypoint and select from the list of available waypoints 4 Once information for the new origin has been input click OK which will return you to the Marks Tab of the PlanBook The updated range and bearing information will be displayed in the Rng Brg To column Display Route Marks Waypoints The marks that make up a route waypoints can be displayed on the Marks Tab of the PlanBook To have your waypoints listed along with your other marks place a check mark in the box next to the option labeled Display Route Marks Once the waypoints are listed with your other marks they can be edited or deleted just like any mark in the
28. AIS Targets Show Hide Tool Controls whether any AIS targets are isplayed in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Q Y a Soundings Display Tool This tool toggles Passport Depth Soundings ff and on O en g Streets and Roads Tool This turns on all the Streets and Roads data contained within the Passport Charts Tide Bars Tool Click to Display Tide Bar icons on the screen m l Tile Windows Horizontally Tool Arranges the open windows into equally sized horizontal windows Tile Windows Vertically Tool Arranges the open windows into equally sized vertical windows W Toggle Lay Lines Sailing Plus Pack only Gives you the option to display no lay lines or select from small medium or large lay lines io Toggle Lay Lines from Boat Sailing Plus Pack only Gives you the option to display no lay lines from your boat or select from small medium or large lay lines Toggle Wind Arrows Sailing Plus Pack only Choose Apparent and or True Wind Arrows and then select small medium or large arrows or to display no wind arrows Clicking the button toggles through settings for both arrows or no arrows 91 ns Toggle 3D Depth Indicator Gives you the option to display the depth marker keel marker both or neither This button toggles you through available selections Topographic Charts Display Tool This changes the active window chart type to USGS topographic charts Tracking Tool Click this button to
29. After activating the current arrows you should see current arrow icons as shown in Figure 11 1 on the chart If you do not there may be no current stations in the area currently displayed within the chart window In this instance zoom out until you are able to see the closest tide and current station s Interpreting Current Arrows As shown in Figure 11 1 current icons appear as a transparent red arrow The arrow points in the direction the current is moving based on the present system time on your PC In addition the size of the arrow serves as a visual indication of how strong or weak the current is A large arrow indicates strong currents whereas a small arrow indicates a weak or slow current The numbers displayed with the current arrow is a current speed Speed values are displayed as determined by your Tools Options Units settings If you have the Display Screen Tips on Charts option turned on place the cursor on any station to see the name of the station and its associated value speed and direction The Display Screen Tips on Charts option is on by default when the program is installed i Q Ro a gt wn O S WwW oy WA ic aS l 78 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Adjusting Arrow Size If you boat in an area where there are a large number of current stations the current arrows can at times overwhelm that other information on the chart In this instance yo
30. Boat Track Recording With Tracking activated at least one Record By option must be selected e Course Change records a track segment every time your course changes by the specified number of degrees Input this specification into the provided text box This option is useful on trips where you wish to record only major course changes The default setting is 15 e Time set the time interval that best meets your needs The default time interval setting is 300 seconds 5 minutes Boat x General Log D A Track Alarms Stats Display Range Circle W Enable Boat Track Recording W Record By Course change in 5 000 or more Degrees M Record By Time Every 300 Seconds W Record By Distance Every 0 540 Nautical Miles Enable Wake Temporary Track Limit To Figure 8 4 Boat Properties Track Tab e Distance records intervals of user specified distance to produce an evenly segmented track Input this specification into the provided text box The default distance setting is 0 5 NM WARNING Setting Record By options to a small number i e 1 of Course Change or every 10 seconds will create a large number of track points This increases overall file size and can slow software performance Enable Wake When checked the Enable Wake box limits the length of the track to a user specified time integer minimum value is 1 second This is useful if you are travelling in a small area and the chart is clu
31. Calculation 47 Track Properties 47 Q Quilting 33 103 R Radar 135 137 161 Compass Deviation Table 141 Heading Line Rotation 140 Initial Radar Setup 139 MARPA Symbology 152 Radar Configuration 153 Radar Presets 142 Radar Setup Wizard 6 Radar Toolbars 138 Radar Troubleshooting 158 Radar Window 137 Radar with Admiral 149 Understanding Radar 155 Range Circle Toggle 103 Repeater Ports 62 Right Mouse Button Right Mouse Menus 29 Routes 37 41 71 110 activate a route 41 Adding New Waypoints 42 Advanced 41 Append 42 Creating a Route from a Track 71 Deleting 42 Great Circle 42 Joining 42 Remove 42 Reversing a Route 43 Route froma Track 42 Glossary amp Index 201 Route Wizard 43 Setting a Waypoint Arrival Alarm 41 Sharing Waypoints 43 Splitting 41 Uploading 112 Using Existing Marks 43 S Sailing Plus Pack 177 B amp G 182 Lay Lines 180 NavView 183 Ockam 14 182 Polar Display 177 Polar Display Settings 178 Polar Values 179 Terminology 177 Unlocking 177 Screen Intensity Night Tool 104 Scrolling Panning 35 Autoscroll 35 Hand Panning 35 Search 17 Sea Trials 109 Serial Number 3 My Nobeltec Program amp Chart Information 206 Set and Drift Calculation 47 Setting the computer clock 98 Site Key 3 Software License Agreement 4 Sounder 161 Adjusting Sounder Image 162 Configuring the InSight Sounder 168 Fishfinder Basics 170 Sounder Features 163 Sounder in NavView 170 Sounder NMEA Data 169 A S S lt Qo
32. Charts International and Domestic Charts Installing Passport World Charts Passport Deluxe Charts and Supplemental Data Sets Installing Current Passport Deluxe Chart Permits Installing Supplemental Passport Deluxe Data Installing Legacy Passport Charts and Permits Installing New Chart Permits and Product Unlock Codes Step 3 GPS Port Setup Wizard Using the GPS Port Setup Wizard Step 4 Radar Setup Wizard A Note About Radar Setup Installing Your Radar Solution Setting Up Your Radar oh NININININN NN ee e SDDD DO DUUUARARBR RWWWWWUWW W 3 Hardware Setup Overview GPS Setup Electrical Connection GPS to Computer Identifying the Wires RS232 GPS Settings Connecting the Wires Connecting the Nobeltec Cable to Your Computer Multiple Input Devices Manual Device Settings Port Types To Configure Input COM Ports Other Options on the Ports Configure Tab Port Priorities To Set the Priority NMEA and Other Device Support Testing the Connection How to Log Inputs and Outputs 4 Basic Screens PlanView Primary Screen Elements Title Bar Main Menu ToolBars Console Display Chart Window Pane The NavBar Info Tab MOB Tab Weather Tab Status Messages Tab Active Mark Tab T amp C Tides amp Currents Tab Targets Tab Search Tab GPS Trip Tab Chart Management Modifying Passport Vector Charts Displaying Different Chart Types The Chart Table Table of Contents V Opening Charts 18 The Open Tab 32 Chart Objec
33. Contours or Filled Contours e Swell The swell is depicted as Arrows or Hollow Arrows Storms Can show Maximum Information such as the storm name and history and a circle indicating wind strengths or Minimum Information Options x Depth Custom Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Option Setting Weather Provider Nobeltec Pressure Filled Contours Frequency 2 Mb Wind Wind Feathers Current Arrows Sea Surface Temp Line Contours bd Available Regions North Atlantic FREE Daily Bronze service E DEMO FREE Daily Gold service S Figure 8 10 Tools Options Weather Tab e Apparent Wind Angle AWA This is the way that the wind is impacting your ability to navigate factoring in your speed direction currents etc e Theoretical True Wind Angle TWA This is the actual data about wind without accounting for bearing speed etc Console Tab The Console Tab controls which information is displayed on the PlanView Console Display The Console Display contains small information panels which can float or be docked in any position on the Console Select which panels to display from Tools Options Console To display a Console panel place a check mark in the check box next to the item in the Display on Console list GN REMEMBER You must a
34. Direct to Mark Power The other option is Calculate First Waypoint TTG Using Wind e Use Set amp Drift in Sailing Calculations When this field is set to Yes Nobeltec Navigation Software calculates your lay lines using speed over water wind angle and current When set to No current data is not included in these calculations Polar Display Settings From the Tools Options Sailing tab you can access the Polar Display Settings dialog box e Units of Measure The default setting for this option uses the current speed measurement unit selected using Tools Options Units The other selection is Seconds per Nautical Mile i NOTE All units of measure are adjustable from Tools Options Units e Goal Percentage of target speed Use this field to temporarily adjust target speed based on current conditions This option is most beneficial if you have an inexperienced crew or modified sail confirmation and you wish to create realistic targets for performance e RealTime Data Real Time Data options include e Auto Record Real Time Data When you place a check mark in this check box Nobeltec Navigation Software begins to collect data while underway for onscreen display Real time data points are logged during auto record of TWS TWD BSP information As you receive data for true wind speed true wind direction and boat speed the values are saved in a file that contains only the interpolated wind speed the angle and the interpola
35. Edit Place a mark in this check box to prohibit on screen editing to the current polar e Boat speed at cursor When you move the cursor around the polar diagram the Boat Speed at Cursor box updates with the speed where your cursor is located If you move the cursor outside of the polar the value returns to N A e Settings Click this button to open the Polar Display Settings window You can also open this window under the Sailing menu Polar Display Settings The Polar Display Settings window is where you can create and manage your polar diagrams using the Polar Values tab Use the Display Settings tab to determine what objects to include on the diagram and their colors See Chapter 8 Tools and Options for more information on the Sailing tab fields To open the Polar Display Settings From the Polar Display window click Settings Open Tools Options Sailing then click the Polar Display Settings button Open Sailing Polar Settings Click the Polar Settings button on the ToolBar Display Settings Tab The following settings are applied to the Polar Diagram itself Fields available on the Display Settings tab include e Units of Measure The default setting for this option uses the current speed measurement unit selected using Tools Options Units The other selection is Seconds per Nautical Mile The Polar data is stored in Kts When you select another unit such as kph or mph the data will display in that unit bu
36. Goto Properties Delete Print Show All Hide All Default Database 7 Figure 9 5 PlanBook Tracks Tab Creating a Route from a Track Nobeltec Navigation Software has the ability to create a route from any track This is done with the Create Route from Track button on the Tracks Tab of the PlanBook This feature allows you to re navigate a path you have followed before To create a route from an existing track 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Tracks Tab 2 Select the track that you would like to convert into a route Click the Create Route from a Track button 4 You will now need to enter a value into the Ignore Track Marks Closer Together Than XX Nautical Miles box When you convert a track into a route each track point could potentially be a waypoint This setting will ke l V a i Co N lt x S S 2 a l oO 72 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide help eliminate an excessive number of waypoints 5 Click OK The Boundaries Tab The Boundaries Tab of the PlanBook Figure 9 6 lists all boundaries you have drawn in your program Boundaries are listed alphabetically Using descriptive file names and giving alphabetically similar names to boundaries you wish to group together helps you locate them more easily in the PlanBook The PlanBook also allows you to edit and delete boundaries CA PlanBook 6
37. Menu Button to perform right clicks without a mouse Multiple Monitor Support Many Windows operating systems support more than one monitor Nobeltec has optimized Admiral to take full advantage of multiple monitor configurations However in order to use the Multi Monitor function in Admiral you must have an additional video card and monitor If you are using Windows XP some single video cards can even be treated as two Check the documentation that came with your computer Video Cards To set up your multi monitor installation and configure your video cards 1 Install additional video cards into your computer 2 Open the windows control panel and select Display 3 Click Settings and select Multiple Monitors 4 Choose the resolution of the displays Click OK when finished Using Multiple Monitors When you are using multiple monitors only one pane or monitor will have the focus When a pane has focus it is drawn with a yellow outline All keyboard commands are sent to that pane To move focus to another pane click on the pane you want to use 19 Networking General Benefits Benefits of using a network on your vessel include Improved Uptime Redundancy In case of computer failure users can immediately switch to a different computer e Cost Savings Passport chart sharing allows multiple computers to share a single copy of charts e Less Wiring A wireless or CAT 5 network can be used instead of wiring each NM
38. Mouse Button Tool This tool is designed to make using Nobeltec on a touchscreen monitor much easier Most touchscreens react to a touch on the monitor in the same way as a left mouse click and do not provide an option for performing a right click By clicking the Right Mouse Button Tool the next item you touch on the screen will be considered a right mouse click instead of a left mouse click Route Tool The Route Tool is used to create routes To create a route click to place the first and successive waypoints To complete the route double click as you place the last waypoint or press the lt Esc gt key Route Wizard Tool This button activates the Nobeltec Route Wizard The Route Wizard lets you select a beginning and ending waypoint and then creates a new route based on a few user defined criteria E ea Save User Interface UI Tool This button opens the Save User Interface dialog box which allows you to save the layout of all the ToolBar buttons on your screen Screen Intensity Night Tool Used to activate Night Colors E Screen Intensity Normal Tool Used to deactivate Night or Twilight Colors and return to the normal screen color intensity a E Screen Intensity Twilight Tool Used to activate Twilight Colors Y o Shaded Relief Charts Display Tool Turns the Shaded Relief feature off and on Use the small down arrow next to the button to select display and color options for both land and sea x
39. N 8 15 2006 46 07 264 N LON 124 01 673 W 46 06 104 N 123 37 353 W 124 01 614 W 21 447 nm 068 T PASST L 7 439 nm 025 T 3D Elev 1001 ft Bie et 3D Depth 94 ft 4 A D U WA AS A lt a i gt Figure 4 4 PlanView Screen Elements MOB Tab Use the MOB Man Overboard Tab of the NavBar to immediately drop a Man Overboard icon on the Chart window pane and start tracking the location of that object The MOB tab allows you to create a MOB icon focus the chart on the MOB icon clear the MOB icon or proceed to another MOB notice Additionally dynamic and static information about the MOB such as Lat Lon distance from boat distance from cursor and duration of the MOB alarm will display NOTE You can also use the lt F4 gt Hot Key to instantly create a Man Overboard icon and alarm while underway Weather Tab The Weather Tab on the NavBar is where you can control certain features of Weather display depending on the Weather Provider you selected from Tools Options Weather Content of this tab changes depending on the provider selected See Chapter 13 Weather amp Wind for more details about Weather Status Messages Tab This tab contains warning messages and information about your charts hardware connectivity network etc Status Messages can be exported to a log file to track specific events i NOTE Target threats such as ARPA MARPA and AIS targets when detected are sent to the Targ
40. Nobeltec will set the origin to current location the cross track error to zero and steer to the mark 3 When you arrive at the waypoint it will be deactivated How to Use the Autopilot Active Route 1 Create a route in your test area 2 Right click on any route leg and select Activate This will automatically activate the route and first waypoint in the route 3 After activating the route Nobeltec will direct the vessel along the route line When the vessel reaches the first active waypoint it will steer the vessel to the next waypoint and so on until you reach the end of the route Arrival Circle and Crossing the Perpendicular Waypoint arrival is an important feature when using your software with an autopilot Nobeltec uses two items to determine if you have reached a waypoint Arrival Circle and Crossing the Perpendicular Nobeltec can switch from one waypoint to the next without a prompt or you can acknowledge an on screen prompt for waypoint changes This feature can be set using the Misc Tab of the Tools Options menu Automatically Activate Next WP Upon WP Arrival Setting Arrival Distance for Existing Marks To set the Waypoint Arrival Distance for existing marks and waypoints 1 Right click on a Mark or Waypoint and select Properties 2 From the Properties dialog box click on the Range Circle Tab 3 At the bottom of the Range Circle Tab you will see a box labeled Arrival Circle You may change the defau
41. Passport Chart regions If you do not install your Passport Charts first the additional data packs cannot be installed 2 After the Passport Charts have been installed close your Nobeltec Navigation Software and insert the Passport Deluxe Data DVD into your DVD drive 3 The Passport Data installation wizard will automatically search your PC for Passport regions A list of data types with a sign next to each will display Click on the sign to see the regions available for that data type Place a check mark in the box next to the region names and types you wish to install You cannot install Passport Charts or other data for any region for which you have not yet purchased a Chart Permit Chapter 2 Installation 5 4 When installation is complete click OK to launch the Nobeltec Navigation Software The new data will be available upon launch NOTE CD ROM discs are available on request For CD ROM installation close all programs insert the CD and follow onscreen prompts Installing Legacy Passport Charts and Permits AX warnine The following installation instructions do not apply for charts newer than WF 18 as World Folios newer than WF18 have an auto install feature Only World Folios 19 and higher are supported by Nobeltec Technical Support 1 Start your Nobeltec Navigation Software program 2 Click File Chart Table Install 3 Click the Install button to the right of the Chart Table Figure 2 2 4 Insert the P
42. Radar functionality you will need to run the Radar Setup Wizard to establish radar settings NOTE Make sure your radar and IR2 BB if applicable are powered on and connected to your PC prior to running the Radar Setup Wizard To launch the Radar Setup Wizard 1 Click Start Programs Nobeltec Radar Setup Wizard 2 Once the opening splash screen appears click Next Radar Setup Wizard Port Configuration x E The radar control box is properly connected to a T clean power source The radar is powered on re Before we get started Please verify that the following steps have been performed g The radar has been installed according to the Installer s Guide The radar is corectly connected to the radar control box e The radar control box is securely connected to the PC or network router hub with the correct cables Click Next to Proceed lt Back Cancel Figure 2 3 Radar Setup Wizard Port Configuration 3 Verify that you have accomplished all of the requirements as outlined by the bullet points shown in Figure 2 3 and then click Next Chapter 2 Installation 7 The Radar Setup Wizard will search your available serial and Ethernet ports for incoming information including GPS and heading sensor data Once your IR2 or IR2 BB is detected click Next After your radar is located by the Radar Setup Wizard you may rename your radar to an identifying name such as radar model C
43. S Y S l LA 34 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide To remove charts from the quilt 1 Click File Chart Table and then click on the Quilting Tab 2 From the list on the left click on the chart you want to remove from Quilting If no charts are listed no charts are installed 3 Click Remove then click OK Removing Charts From Quilting While On An Open Chart Right click on the chart to remove from the quilt Select Remove Chart Name from the Quilt from the pop up menu Removing All Skewed Charts From Quilting This feature is usually used only on raster charts 1 Click File Chart Table and then click on the Quilting Tab 2 Below the list of charts that appear click Remove All Skewed Charts 3 Click Done Closing Charts You can close the chart by clicking the Close X button in the upper right corner of the chart window or by selecting File Close Chart File Close All or File Close All But Active You can also close all windows by clicking the lt Ctrl Shift F4 gt Hot Key a en Figure 5 7 Closing a Chart Window 6 Basic Skills Navigating Charts This section shows you how to view and manipulate the chart window It is essential to master these skills before proceeding to the following sections Automatic Panning Move the cursor to the edge of the chart to scroll across a chart Drag cursor back to the middle to slow speed or release to stop scroll
44. To install and configure a system like the one shown in Example 2 1 Install Admiral and a Dongle on each computer 2 Install the Passport charts on one of the computers Later in the setup and operation you will have the opportunity to share the charts across the GlassBridge Network 3 Install the raster photo topographic charts on each computer as desired 4 Connect the GPS and other NMEA input devices to at least one of the computers If desired you can use an A B box and connect the inputs to both computers 5 Connect output cables through an A B box to the autopilot and any other device as required 6 Connect all computers to a hub router or wireless network Make sure that the network is setup to support TCP IP networking Nobeltec recommends a router or switch capable of DHCP address service for the best performance Setting Up the Navigation Inputs On the Client Computer Each computer that is directly connected to a NMEA producing device GPS etc needs to be configured to receive this information See Chapter 3 GPS Setup for more information Configuring the GlassBridge Network Options 1 Disconnect all the computers from the GlassBridge Network and then start each copy of Admiral 2 Verify that each installation is working properly After you are satisfied with each setup then proceed to the next step e ke l y S gt Xa gt 3 1 S a 124 Nobeltec Nav
45. ToolBar Buttons Chapter 4 Basic Screens 15 ToolBars once displayed can be picked up dragged and dropped elsewhere onscreen to provide you with the most customized display possible You can also use the ToolBar Options window to save ToolBar settings allowing you to quickly switch between several various ToolBar configurations See Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec for a full list of available ToolBars AY warnine Including too many ToolBars can clutter your screen and reduce your ability to quickly locate the appropriate tool for any given situation Console Display Console Panels display navigation information such as Lat Lon speed over ground speed over water etc See Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Console panels can be resized and repositioned You can also change the colors and size of the fonts to change the emphasis of certain panels Items to display on the Console are selected using Tools Options Console Chart Window Pane This is the window that displays the chart your vessel and objects such as marks and routes Nobeltec Navigation Software ships with low resolution planning overview charts To view harbor level detail you will need to purchase and install Passport charts The NavBar The NavBar is another available tool that can help you use common features of Nobeltec Navigation Software quickly and easily The NavBar displays along the bottom of the PlanView screen and contains a series of ta
46. WA Ha N A hil leeway N A F woe Oise Moe were Of Sts Memes dot Mak Tec Tages jjer Trip Guru hahi Saker bed Cpe hart Clr hoe eaters 43 F901 TETA T 12 41 7 W Lt FUMI W OU nen 100 0 OPi nm Ai 10 Depth 10 it Diria Potion iiiar aia D Depite Fit Figure 21 21 MARPA Targets in Point and Click Radar N SAN REMEMBER MARPA requires a well adjusted and properly setup digital compass If using a magnetic compass you will have to setup a deviation table to adjust the compass input for magnetic interferences on your boat Acquiring MARPA Targets Acquiring MARPA targets in Nobeltec is simple The first step is to identify the target that you wish to track N l q S S Ka D S gt Aa S S S ce l T N 152 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide There are three ways to acquire MARPA targets using Nobeltec Navigation Software s exclusive Point and Click Radar Double Click In the InSight Radar window pane simply move your mouse on top of the radar target that you wish to track and double click Right click In the InSight Radar window pane move your mouse on top of a radar target right click and select the option Acquire this target Acquire Mode The Acquire mode changes the cursor to a dashed box When in this mode every left click in the InSight Radar window pane and a chart window that has Radar Overlay tells Nobeltec to track the radar object at the location you c
47. While Admiral s NavView has all of the commonly used features for navigation it does not have some of the planning features used in PlanView NavView s Multiple Monitor Support One of the features of NavView is the ability to have a single computer drive more than one monitor This is particularly useful when using integrated devices such as the InSight Radar Hooking up multiple monitors allows you to show the InSight Radar on one screen as a dedicated radar while the other monitor s show other navigation data Figure 21 18 Multiple Monitor Example A primary benefit of NavView is its use of screen real estate By eliminating the Windows ToolBars and other functions your PC looks and operates more like a device specific monitor than a PC Full Screen Radar Console When the InSight Radar is being displayed as a full screen in NavView a special Radar Console provides detailed navigation and radar information on either the right or left side of the screen Figure 21 19 The reported values in the Radar Console are affected by the settings in the Radar tab of the program Options Changing the side of the Radar Console from left to right or turning it off altogether is also accomplished through the program Options Chapter 21 Radar Usage 149 The Vessel Vessel name Speed Heading Position lt The Cursor Bearing Range Position lt Selected Target Type ARPA MARPA Name Range and Bearing Course Sp
48. a computer as the Marks and Routes Home Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network Click Enable Advanced Networking Select one of the options in the drop down list box When finished click OK To copy objects to and from the Marks and Routes Home 1 2 3 Place a check mark in the box next to Routes and Marks Home 4 5 1 Click File Navigation Objects Import or Export Nav Objects 2 At the top of the dialog click to choose the Marks and Routes Home in Import From Export To drop down list box 3 Select the objects that you would like to transfer or select Import All or Export All 4 When finished click OK Advanced Networking Settings Advanced network features include chart radar and sounder sharing Sharing Charts To Share Charts on the GlassBridge Network 1 Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network 2 Click Enable Advanced Networking 3 Click Chart Sharing and then choose from one of the three available options Ask Yes or No Selecting Ask will prompt the user each time the computer is started whether or not to share charts Yes will share all Passport Charts each time the program opens and No turns Chart Sharing off Sharing Radar If you purchased a Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 IR2 and it is connected to your system the radar data is shared on the network automatically No additional GlassBridge Network configuration is necessary in order for this data to be Chapter 19 Networking 12
49. actual threats e Use GPS Time When selected program time conforms to the time reported by your GPS device e Detect GPS MOB and MOB Hardware Used to detect NMEA sentences related to MOB coming from devices such as a GPS or other MOB specific hardware you may have onboard Incoming Data Display x COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 B DO30wn1 5EN gt 40 31 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1_4 D030 vil 5EN gt 40 34 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030 wmiul1PT ao7AK KWGmG008H lt 0 69 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 B52G6 005k 756nqmU wwwmSCP06 0 05 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030 vii IPT ao viTK gt kho0042 0 07 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030 viAu1PT ao 786KJUS700 lt 14 0 1E COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030wnlw1PT aG 49 gt KRtQ00 lt 1 p 0 23 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 4030 vil W1PT ao gt 4T KS 3wGO0D1L 0 68 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 A A4QUd 60000WiqOBdvk1 E15 gt 0D0 0 1D COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 15MvVUPP1 G lt sgHKUSSrQ0wB0 lt 0i 0 21 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 15N54 PPO0GSNP JKgk1 wBO0S0 0 54 COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 1817KFO02P 081 7LJIMJE mF IE FO 11 01 F COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 B 15MqvJPO3mG gt LiKST pUsDiFO8Gt 0 2D Pause Clear Figure 8 8 Incoming Data Display Window Log All Input and Log All Output This tool is used for debugging and problem solving Sometimes a Jeppesen Marine product support provider will ask you to record input or output for diagnostic purposes Default Log location is Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series COM1 OUT LOG The log is reset when the application is restarted e Configure This Inpu
50. and Marking Course Up Rotates the chart to always display according to your heading boat icon pointing up Right click on the chart and click Chart Orientation Course Up from the pop up menu the lt H gt Hot Key or Course Up button on the ToolBar North Up Some raster charts are produced with orientation other than North Up You can orient these charts by right clicking the chart and selecting North Up Use the lt N gt Hot Key to toggle North Up on and off Bookmark Use the Bookmark feature to save a particular chart scale or chart location and return to it with a single keystroke To Set a Bookmark 1 Open the chart you want select a scale and position on the chart 2 Click Edit Set Bookmark or click lt Shift F10 gt To go to a Bookmark click the lt F10 gt Hot Key Objects User Created Objects You can place a number of icons or navigation objects on the chart at your specification These include marks waypoints routes and more Objects like Routes Marks and Waypoints are used to navigate courses plan trips and determine the optimal course to follow Each object has specific characteristics called Properties that provide information about the object Properties include the object name icon arrival circle etc All objects are created and manipulated in a similar way Connected Objects Connected objects include Instant Waypoint Range and Bearing Boundaries and Routes Use Marks to connect these o
51. appears on the Polar display Show Best Angles This toggles the best upwind and downwind angles to display optimal VMG windward and leeward These angles appear as red lines drawn from the origin of the polar to the farthest polar speed indicated Fill Velocity Range This setting determines whether the area from the polar boat speed line is filled Fill Color This setting fills in the polar drawn on the Polar Display if the Fill Velocity Range selection is Yes Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 65 Polar Display Settings x Display Settings Polar values Units of measure Seconds NM Goal Percentage of target speed 100 Real Time Data I Auto Record Real Time Data Interval 1 minute na Clear real time data Option Setting Polar Line Ss Polar Data Points Sa Current Situation Dot m Real Time Data a Show Boat Yes Show Best Angles No Fill velocity Range Yes Fill Color Background Type Grid Figure 8 25 Polar Display Settings Display Settings tab e Background Type With this option you can customize the polar background The choices include Grid which shows the angles boat speed circles as lines Gradient which fills in each speed range from the polar start color to the polar end color and Alternating which alternates the polar start color and the polar end color from each speed range to the next e Grid Color This is the color of the grid e Polar Start Color Pola
52. available panels in the Console Although you may add any panel you wish to the Console keep in mind that many of these require the corresponding NMEA compatible instrument to be connected to the computer before data will appear in that panel Panel Properties Each Console panel properties that can be customized to suit your personal preferences Customization options include font style font size color and weight In addition panels may be aligned vertically or horizontally with or without titles Floating and Docked Console panels when visible may either be docked to one of the four sides of the window or they may be left floating The panel will always stay on top of the other windows in the Nobeltec Navigation Software display You may move or dock a floating panel by dragging and dropping it onto the Console A docked Console panel may be made to float by dragging away from the docking area SN I N S 3 a S Sy S Ss I S 106 Abbreviation SOG COG VMG WPT XTE RNG BRG GPS or DR CSR 3D DPT ame BS Eta HOG 2 mp WS TWD AWS AWA 5 a s oO Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Function Abbreviation Function Speed Over Ground lt Boat Vessel Icon s Lat Lon Name gt Course Over Ground lt Mark WPT Active Mark or Waypoint Name and Name gt Lat Lon Velocity Made Good Cursor Lat Lon at Cursor Locati
53. charts This feature works best with Passport Deluxe charts which contain Jeppesen Marine s high resolution sea floor depth data Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Video Custom Contour Options Min Step Max L click to add R click to chanae color Gradual oor sor sor M a A o b Ji 3b spl Water Contour Options First Contour Second Contour Style C 5 Feet C 15 Feet Gradual C 10 Feet C 20 Feet V Filled 15 Feet 25 Feet Cancel Help Figure 8 15 Tools Options Contours Tab Custom Contour Options The Custom Contour Options section of the Tools Options Contours tab contains settings for establishing and shading Land contours e Minis where you set the minimum land elevation from which contouring will begin e Step is where you set the distance to place between contour lines e Max is where you establish the maximum elevation of land contours to show on the chart e The Color Strip to the right of the elevation settings is used to establish colors for specific elevations e Height markers the gray bars on the color strip can be dragged back and forth to your specifications affecting the Land Contour coloring for the range specified Add height markers by left clicking on the color strip Drag a he
54. displayed see Figure 9 2 4 Input the waypoint s Lat Lon coordinates or to use an existing waypoint click the radio button labeled Select an Existing Waypoint and select from the list of available waypoints 5 Click Insert Waypoint The waypoint will immediately be added to the route All numbered waypoints listed after the new one will be renumbered according to their new place in the Route List 6 Click OK to close the Insert Waypoint Window Editing Waypoints Most of the time to edit a waypoint you can find it on a chart right click and edit in the Properties menu You can also use the PlanBook to edit routes manually To edit a waypoint 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab Select the name of the route to edit From the Route Detail for Tab highlight the waypoint to edit Double click the waypoint that you wish to change The Properties window for that Mark will open For cells that contain data such as Lat Lon or speed you may also click on the cell and press lt Enter gt to manually input a new value 5 When finished close the Properties dialog box Deleting Routes and Waypoints The easiest way to delete an object is to right click on the object and select Delete from the pop up menu You can also delete waypoints or an entire route from the Route Tab of the PlanBook To delete a route 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main
55. distance exceeds the selected setting will not display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Options are Do not hide 5 10 20 40 60 or 80 units of measurement Default is Do not Hide i NOTE All subsequent AIS Filtering features are Admiral Only e Only display targets in an AIS TXT file When selected only targets whose MMSI numbers are listed in the AIS TXT file located in C Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series are displayed This setting enables you to track specific known targets while ignoring unknown targets e Only display targets that are not anchored moored or aground Removes targets from display whose reported status is anchored moored or aground If targets whose status is anchored moored or aground are moving at 0 2 Kts or higher their status is ignored and they will continue to display Default setting for this option is Off Show Specific Target Types Select from the displayed list which Target types you wish to display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Targets whose type is not checked in this field will not display AIS Filtering x V Display AIS Targets Hide Targets Beyond Do not hide v Only display targets in an AIS TXT file Show Specific Target Types Ww Unknown Reserved For future use Wing in Ground Fishing vessels Towing vessels Towing vessels and length of tow exceeds 200 m essels engaged in dredging or underwater opere wivessels ennaned in divinn one
56. enable tracking of your boat Tracking is the onscreen recording of your boat previous movements E Vector Charts Display Tool This changes the active window chart type to vector charts If you have not purchased Passport Charts this button will not work Video Display Tool Opens a Video display window where you can display streaming camera feeds provided your onboard cameras are connected to Admiral e Weather Overlay Tool This quickly opens the NavBar to the Weather Tab so that weather predictions can be overlaid on your charts Zoom In Tool Click this button to view a smaller area of the chart Q Zoom Out Tool Click this button to view a larger area of the chart Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Navigation Software 105 The Console The Console is a set of small display panels Depending on the instruments connected to your PC you can have panels that display pieces of navigational information such as Speed Over Ground Speed Over Water Latitude and Longitude Wind Speed Wind Direction Water Temperature and Depth just to name a few In addition to the configuration capabilities the entire Console may be shown or hidden from view in the program window To show or hide select View Console from the main menu If the Console is being displayed on your screen quickly remove it by right clicking on the Console and selecting Hide Console from the pop up menu Available Console Panels Table 16 1 contains all
57. improve image clarity and sharpness Clutter settings range from Off no filter to 9 weaker returns are filtered out a NOTE To manually control Clutter settings you must be in Manual Mode Signal Level The Signal Level filter provides a threshold for displaying sounder returns This filter removes weaker returns from the display these can also be filtered further by adjusting Noise and Clutter This filter specifies how strong the return for display must be to appear onscreen Signal Level settings range from Off no filter to 5 weaker returns are filtered out Noise The Noise filter reduces the possibility of interference from nearby echo sounders and electronic devices This filter can be enabled or disabled Colors Another key way to adjust Sounder display is to use customizable color schemes Eight pre configured color schemes are available from Tools Options Sounder tab Press Colors to access the Sounder Colors dialog box The Sounder Colors dialog box can be used to select any theme from the drop down box at the top or modify any theme to suit your own preferences You can adjust the color of all sounder returns add remove adjust color dividers select the type of coloring method Single Solid Gradient and specify a wide range of colors for text background bottom line etc Chapter 22 Sounder 163 SS Select a Saunder Color Thame taght ergy Beset There ty Def aRts Sorda Rabanne Selec
58. in the Chart lt Tab gt Window Delete selected object lt Application Key gt Show right click Context Menu for selected object Centers Chart Window on boat lt Ctrl F2 gt Center on Boat Course Up Max Ahead Toggle Radar Overlay On Off Creates MOB mark beneath boat lt F4 gt Lat Lon New event mark beneath boat New Mark at cursor Limited scroll in arrow direction Drag selected object Drag selected object Program Program FBS New Route Route Opens SkyMate window usable only Gato Boolanaik lt Ctrl U gt when SkyMate has been selected as your weather provider lt Shift F10 gt Set Bookmark Radar Standby Transmit Chart Window cont Range Bearing Line Boat to Point Cancel tool route boundary etc lt Shift F12 gt Range Bearing Line Point to Point se osta Bais Hold this key down to temporarily JRE ters T the Properties Menu for object p clear all Passport data layers with focus lt 1 gt Set Anti aliasing Crystal View Raster lt Ctri A gt lt 47 Rotate chart in arrow direction Oo charts only 3D View lt 2 PB Turns Hand Panning On Off lt gt New Mark at cursor Next screen mode color lt Ctrl Shift F gt Enter Fleet Manager Edina Chart Window hah Toggles Chart Grid on and off Deueasesnge zoom Heading Up Increase range zoom out North Up wee End current tool back to mouse Toggle vector other layers pointer 20 Turns on Depth Soundings Toggles Depth Soundings de cl
59. its best Auto Gain AO The auto gain function automatically preserves the look of the lt gt image based on the auto gain preset Adjust Auto Gain before adjusting the Auto Sea Once the auto gain is set it will be set for all ranges To adjust the Auto Gain preset 1 Click Auto Gain to turn on the Auto Gain function 2 Select Adjust Radar Presets by right clicking on the radar image window or select Radar Radar Presets from the main menu 3 Adjust the Auto Gain control down if the image looks too strong or up if the image looks too faint 4 Click OK once the image appears as intensely as you prefer Auto Sea Clutter Aa The Auto Sea function adjusts the image to dynamically compensate lt i gt for changing sea state due to wind or swells The radar evaluates the SEA type of echoes returned and applies Sea Clutter control from the center of the image outward If the sea state increases due to apparent wind changes more Sea Clutter control is automatically applied to the leeward side of the image to counteract wave chop on that side of the vessel Auto Sea is a combination of two modes Harbor Sea Clutter and Auto Sea Clutter control When the range of the radar is less than 1 mile Nobeltec Navigation Software automatically places the radar in the Harbor Sea Clutter mode greater than 1 mile the program switches to Auto Sea Clutter mode Harbor Sea Clutter is applied in situation where Auto Sea Clutter control is l
60. not anchored moored or aground 9 Towing vessels and length of tow exceeds 200 m Vessels engaged in dredging or underwater opere vessels ennaned in diving aneratinns z gt Show All Hide All Figure 20 6 AIS Filtering Show Specific Target Types Select from the displayed list which Target types you wish to display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Targets whose type is not checked in this field will not display Changing Alarm Settings Using Tools Options Targets you can change the alarm settings for displayed targets To change the alarm settings i 2 3 Click Tools Options and then the Targets Tab Click Target Threat Settings Adjust the CPA Closest Point of Approach This is the distance from your vessel that a target may reach before a target is deemed a threat Set the TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach This is the time remaining before the CPA is reached Enter a value in seconds Click the Audible Alarm if desired Target Threat Settings x Use these settings to specify when an SRPAIMARPS or AIS target should be considered a threat See the latest User s Guide or User s Guide Supplement For more information e Detect Threats Me Audible Alarm when Threat Detected Criteria CPA 058 S9 jmi F TEPA 300 Seconds CPA Closest Point of Approach TEFA Time until Closest Point of Approach na Figure 20 7 Target Threat Settings Nobeltec Navigation S
61. program window 1 Move the cursor to any area of the ToolBar that is not a button 2 Click and hold down the left mouse button 3 Drag and drop the ToolBar to the desired position The ToolBar changes to a vertical orientation when you dock it on either side of the window If you drop the ToolBar on the chart window it becomes a floating ToolBar 4 Move all Tools and ToolBars as needed Click on the Reset ToolBars to Default in the ToolBar Options Menu to start over SON l N S 3 gt S Sy N S S S i S 100 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Nobeltec U11460 1 466 940 20 1 2 314 641 Feet U 5 Ei MA Eile Edit View Tools 1 Click and hold your Beye left mouse button here ot ie T x Drag from the ToolBar Salm b ew 3 To here and then release the mouse button Figure 16 2 Moving ToolBars ToolBar Buttons In addition to allowing you to select ToolBars you can select the individual Tools to display on the ToolBar The steps for displaying individual Tools on the Console are the same as for displaying the ToolBar Listed below are the available tools and a brief description of their functionality f 3D Charts Display Tool Automatically tiles your chart window vertically and opens a 3D window next to your normal 2D chart 91 3D Depth Indicator Tool Gives you the option to display the depth marker keel marker both or neither T
62. resource and Windows will open it for you TN 7 Open Ping 192 168 0 1 t v The range resolution is defined as the minimum distance between two targets in the same bearing which are discriminated as two images in the radar picture Bearing Resolution Wen Clee dages anen in ain Pi Whe the ragen dianie o aall i Figure 21 34 Run Window larger than the baam vedik thormar than the beam wedth s gt 5 This ping function requests a return message from the radar You should J 5 Le A see the following SY a e Ante EPer ana babi ena P PEE PEENE tation Ti kan aE ri Pinging 192 168 80 1 with 32 bytes of data Reply fro 1 bytes 32 time 65ms TTL 244 Figure 21 33 Bearing Resolution Reply from ae EET eae TTL 244 Reply from 1 bytes 32 time 65ms TTL 244 Reply from 9 1 bytes 32 time 82ms TTL 244 mebuy fron 132 teg 9 t poces tine esee Tbe e y rom PrE So es me ms Bearing resolution is defined as the minimum bearing where the two targets Reply from 10 1 bytes 32 time 65ms TTL 244 Reply from G 1 bytes 32 time 65ms TTL 244 of the same distance are displayed separately as two independent images on eae fron Bld botese32 tineeteme TTLe244 P Reply from 1 bytes 32 time 65ms TTL 244 the screen and is determined by the transceiver Horizontal Beam Width Reply from O41 bytes 32 time 65ns ITL 244 Reply from 1 bytes 32 time 64ms TTL
63. shown in the center of Right mouse click on the 3D window to Vector chart window the screen in Center on Boat mode access additional commands Figure 4 12 PlanView 3D Navigator 3D Navigator Nobeltec s exclusive 3D Navigator allows you to view the ocean floor and land in clean representational 3D graphics Familiarize yourself with the navigational controls prior to using this feature You can also use the mouse keyboard or computer joystick to control movement in the 3D window Visual Navigation Suite and Admiral include low resolution bathymetric charts but for frequent 3D navigational viewing Jeppesen Marine recommends purchasing Passport Deluxe charts Deluxe regions include high resolution bathymetric charts which make 3D viewing easier and more enjoyable See Chapter 12 3D Navigator for more information about 3D navigation WARNING 3D Passport bathymetric charts are navigational aids While Jeppesen Marine commits to deliver the best elevation depth data possible errors in source material data processing and 3D presentation may occur It is advisable to always have official navigation charts as the primary means of navigation 3D Navigator Modes When a 3D chart is open you may keep the boat centered Figure 4 135 or enter Explore Mode Figure 4 14 which allows you to view all parts of the chart regardless of where the boat is To switch between modes right click on the bathymetric chart and select the mode you want
64. than the active e Active Mark 2 Same as above but shows the Helmsman Display rather than TTG and ETA e Reset Click this button to reset all of the selected Trip s fields to Zero e Min Speed If the vessel is moving slower than 0 2 Kts distance travelled is not calculated Odometer This is the total distance travelled while the Nobeltec Navigation Software has been running e XTE Helmsman Display Range Bearing and ETA to active waypoint along with the Helmsman Display and Cross Track Error XTE e Time and Status Displays Date amp Time along with the status of GPS V gt I ioe 116 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide GPS Trip Info Bar any smk toas zio See Uite ioie 27 7 nm Reset Figure 18 5 GPS Trip Info Bar GPS Strength Window This window see Figure 18 6 contains the diagram of the available satellites positioned in the relative sky The GPS Strength diagram is of a relative sky with the location of available satellites Next to the diagram up to 16 GPS satellites can be displayed as white bars with the height of the bar representing the strength of signal If the bar is labelled W it is a WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellite Lat 4431 097 N Lon 120 56 250 W pinl 8 10 11 i7 19 26 27 28 29 Figure 18 6 GPS Signal Quality window On Chart Warning Indicators On Chart Warning Indicators are graphics displayed in the bottom l
65. the 3D Navigator window 1 Open Nobeltec Navigation Software 2 Click on the Display 3D Charts button on the ToolBar or click View Chart Display Types Display 3D Charts from the Main Menu 3 A3D Chart window pane will open The 3D ToolBar The 3D ToolBar provides you with easy access to controlling the look of the 3D Navigator window A brief description of each button can be found below Mode This toggles the 3D view modes Terrain Exaggeration Used to enhance the 3D image by over or under exaggerating 3D data Minor changes in elevation become visible in areas that might otherwise appear completely flat or vice versa Depth Marker g Gives you the option to display the depth marker keel marker both or neither This button toggles you through available selections Vessel Exaggeration av Increases or decreases the size of the 3D boat icon A scale of 1x means that the boat is represented to scale relative to the surrounding area No I lw S a S S e A l N 84 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Elements of the 3D Navigator Window 3D Locator The 3D Locator is a green square that appears on your 2D chart windows and it shows the area represented in the 3D window The gray arrow in the middle of the 3D Locator box shows the direction of the 3D view Click and drag the 3D locator to change the view in the 3D window This automatically
66. the Bimini waypoint into a Layover Make sure the Layover column is displayed Next enter a layover of 20 hours which results in departure the next morning of 7 30 am After you have entered this information click the Update button to update the waypoints in the list Repeat the layover process described above for the other waypoints which are Freeport and Fort Lauderdale Houia Summa Peta Upelote lis vrer Rius Upham z Cepertuae Date Time i 12005 Tal ae Drign 55 Minnow zJ Wessel S0G 00 Nx Apok io Ara I Apy Curents I dppb Siet Dait Sat F si iaioe Fiete Lint E Rael Finite Distal for Miam te Baharas March 2003 16 Waypesras Meme Hum Typa LogETA Cuntent L Layovm Time Ti HAA ALA Fi Hiart Miei di Ha Hii 3 Mima 005 5 Nome ORES NA NM Haima Harma piiama HMesrral Figure 17 4 PlanBook Calculating Layovers i N l S La as aa SY z I N T 112 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Printouts After you have completed the route planning in the PlanBook make some printouts of various points of interest along the route Areas of interest might include departure and arrival points such as Miami Bimini or Fort Lauderdale Upload the Route Sometimes it is a good idea to backup the route by uploading it to a GPS or plotter In the event of computer failure this will provide you with a backup that you can u
67. the Dongle to one of the computers For the purposes of these instructions lets call this computer PC1 Attach any navigation devices such as a GPS to computer PC1 5 Connect the two computers to a hub or wireless network Make sure that the network supports TCP IP networking NOTE For detailed network connection information see your installer or documentation provided by the equipment manufacturer Admiral uses an auto detect feature to automatically broadcast the NMEA data and to automatically receive data that is detected on the network Connect the two computers and Admiral will determine how to share the NMEA data that is available If you want to explicitly configure data sharing options then you can select deselect the options as described in the section More Information About Data Sharing later in this chapter Chapter 19 Networking 123 Behavior of Example 1 This is a simple network installation The main benefit is that the GPS Information is shared on the network and that the charts are also installed onto both computers The vessel icon on PC2 will move on the screen based on the GPS input from the network If there is ever a problem with the primary computer you can easily swap the two computers Setting Up Example 2 A fully redundant system requires at least two Admiral units and two Dongles more may be added if desired This installation takes advantage of all the features that the GlassBridge Network provides
68. the most critical pieces of data for target acquisition is a stable and correct heading value MARPA or AIS targets are generally lost when the target is too small returning too weak of an echo or the heading fluctuates too much If you experience lost targets consistently you can create a recording of your radar and send it to us for further troubleshooting To record right click on the Radar display and select Record Playback The software will ask you for a file name The extension for the existing IR2 radar is RAD Please zip your playback file and email to support nobeltec com with a description of your problem My radar image occasionally looks smeared What is causing this Blurring of the radar image generally occurs due to one of two reasons a The PC is trying to perform too many computations at one time Jeppesen recommends using a 1GHz system to prevent this b As the radar changes ranges there is a transition between the previous pulse length the radar was using and the pulse length of the new range setting The transition between these two causes the smearing to occur Chapter 22 Sounder 161 22 Sounder Usage Understanding the Sounder Display The InSight Sounder Display provides you with information in both text and Starting the InSight Sounder graphic form The display can be Split or in full screen mode Sounder pings are represented over time moving from right to left as the sea lake or river Once you have
69. time Shallow Water Alarm A depth sounder is for many people a safety device In new waters especially having eyes under the vessel in the form of a depth sounder provide extra assurance for safe travel The InSight Sounder s shallow water alarm will sound whenever the bottom is detected as being shallower than where the alarm threshold is set When the alarm is set it can be viewed in the Sounder Display as seen in the image below h Fishing TF Figure 22 12 Shallow Water Alarm Settings To configure the shallow water alarm right click in the Sounder Display and select Shallow Water Alarm or select this item from the Sounder menu The Shallow Water Alarm Settings dialog box is displayed and the alarm setting can be entered To enable the alarm simply right click in the Sounder Display and select Enable Shallow Water Alarm A check mark indicates that the Alarm is set Advanced Sounder Features Temperature and Temperature Graph If your transducer is configured with a temperature sensor or another temperature sensor is configured to feed temperature information into Nobeltec Navigation Software the temperature value can be displayed on the Sounder Display There are two ways to temperature e Temperature as Text Use this option to simply display the current temperature in the units of measure you ve selected Units of measure can be selected from the Tools Options Units tab e Temperature Graph W
70. to control the ship s bearing AutoScroll This feature allows you to more easily create routes and boundaries which exceed the parameters of the view window As you come to the edge of the view window while creating or dragging objects the chart will scroll automatically in the proper direction AWD See Apparent Wind Direction AWS See Apparent Wind Speed Azimuth Azimuth of a body is the arc of the horizon intercepted between the North or South point and the foot of the vertical circle passing through the body It is reckoned in degrees from either the North or South point clockwise entirely around the Horizon source Our Restless Tides Bathymetric Measurement of the depth contours and slopes of the floor of a body of water sea lake ocean or river obtained through topographic charting Beam Ship width Bearing BRG The angle between the direction of the boat and the reference direction expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation T or M Due north corresponds to 0 degrees east to 90 south to 180 and west to 270 For compass bearings the reference direction is magnetic North For true bearings the reference direction is true North Bearing from Boat to Cursor BBC This data is an aid in route making and planning BBC is expressed in degrees with a notation of True or Magnetic Variation Boat Speed The speed of the boat relative to the water Bookmark A saved combination of
71. to insert a new waypoint 2 Choose Insert New Mark from the pop up menu A new waypoint will appear on the route line at the point where you clicked 3 Drag the new waypoint into the desired position Using Existing Marks During Route Creation You can create a route from existing marks using the Route tool to connect existing marks and convert them into the waypoints of a route To create a route from a series of existing marks 1 Place Marks on your chart as desired using the Marks tool 2 Using the Route tool from the ToolBar click on the first mark A dialog will appear asking if you would like to place a new mark or use the existing mark Click Yes to use the existing mark 3 Repeat this step with the remaining marks creating a route Chapter 7 Advanced Routes 43 Sharing Waypoints This feature allows marks to be shared between multiple routes which is useful if you have several routes which end or begin in the same place If you change the name or position of a shared mark it will be changed for all routes To share a waypoint between routes 1 Create the first Route 2 Begin creating the second Route 3 When you get to the area that contains the mark to be shared click on the existing mark from the first route 4 When prompted click Yes to use the existing mark Reversing a Route The first waypoint of a route is automatically numbered 001 and waypoints increase in numerical order To navigate a r
72. unique perspective Shaded Relief T Shaded relief is a 2 dimensional view of the 3D data To turn Shaded Relief on and off click on the Shaded Relief ToolBar button Clicking on the small down arrow next to the Shaded Relief button presents advanced Shaded Relief options Using these options you can select to have Shaded Relief shown on land water or both In addition you can also select to shade the details in color or gray scale Using the 3D Window Center On Boat Mode This default viewing mode keeps the view in the 3D window always centered on your boat You can change the viewpoint and increase or decrease the zoom level Select Center on Boat Mode at any time by clicking on the Mode button on the 3D ToolBar Zooming and Panning In Center On Boat Mode Zooming and panning when using Center On Boat Mode is similar to zooming in a normal 2D chart window You can Zoom In and Out using the buttons on the program ToolBar the lt gt and lt gt keys or lt A gt and lt Z gt keys on your keyboard To pan move the cursor to the edge of the 3D window When you see a small arrow next to your normal cursor click and hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor or arrow keys Center On Boat Mode keeps the boat at the center of the view The boat is visible at all times except when obscured by a land feature Use the lt gt and lt gt keys or tools on the ToolBar or the lt A gt and lt Z gt keys on the ke
73. unknown values It is used when GPS unavailable or lost while at sea Some of the features in Dead Reckoning are included for the purpose of learning and experimenting with the software when the computer is not connected to any navigation inputs In this mode you can simulate boat placement and movement on your home computer without a GPS connected Boat X General Log O R Track Alarms Stats Display Range Circle W Enable Dead Reckoning Follow Active Route Calculate Speed kts 0 00 Heading T 000 COo Drift kts 000 Set T 000 SOG kts Figure 8 3 Boat Properties D R Tab Dead Reckoning is enabled automatically whenever GPS input fails or is interrupted The boat icon will then continue on its same speed and heading until input resumes This feature can be disabled from the Tools Options menu on the Misc Tab To enable Dead Reckoning manually 1 Plot a check mark in the check box next to Enable Dead Reckoning If you have an active route place a check mark in the box next to Follow Active Route to have the boat icon follow that route 2 Select the radio button next to the values you would like to calculate Speed Heading Drift Set or SOG COG 3 If not following an active route enter the known or approximated values into the active text boxes required for calculation Calculating Speed and Heading for Dead Reckoning If the GPS is connected SOG and COG wi
74. unlocked the Sounder feature and used the GPS Port floor appears beneath the transducer In Figure 22 2 strongest returns are _ Setup Wizard to recognize the hardware you can view Sounder displayed in blue weaker returns in red and orange and weakest returns using Nobeltec Navigation Software in yellow The sea floor is shown in brown and black and the bottom line is 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation Software aqua Color themes can be customized to suit your individual requirements 2 Open a Sounder Display by clicking the Sounder ToolBar button or using Sb nder Sofware the Sounder menu Sea Floor Depth Menu ToolBar Indicator Sounder Window Help V i HVS VASSSG A WAN BEOCaSE wa Sounder Display We CS Wwe eA mY t ispl d lb x N ati ay Sounder Toolbars Frequency Shallow D Split a Indi Water Alarm o i ndicator requency t lt W Display 4 Scope Sounder g R Depth Scale E w Display Depth Scale ToolBar w Display Bottom Line P w Display Depth Text Bottom Line Temperature x Display Temperature Text f Graph w Display Temperature Graph Indicator p x Display Boat Speed Text w Display Tuning Indicators Options Shallow water Alarm Sea Floor i ca A Scope Enable Shallow Wwater Alarm Live Mode Demo Mode Record Playback Mode Scale Indicators Figure 22 2 InSight Sounder Display Figure 22 1 Sounder Menu On the right side of the screen the A scope displays th
75. waypoint this station will update accordingly Troubleshooting The following paragraphs contain a few standard troubleshooting tips for Networking Since there is not one standard brand of networking equipment keep available the User s Guides for your hub switch or router Test the Cabling 1 Start all of the computers on the network 2 Check status lights on the hub switch router for each computer If your equipment does not have status lights check the status indicator inside Windows 3 Verify cable connectivity and power supplies Test the Glass Bridge Network 1 Start Admiral 2 Click Tools Options and then the Glass Bridge Network Tab 3 Click Network Statistics 4 If the computer is connected to the Glass Bridge Network the system name column will be populated If other computers on the network running Admiral you will see them listed as well Serial numbers and other fields will also be populated How to Use the Glass Bridge Network Test Utility This utility will test UDP one of the networking protocols that is running behind the scenes 1 This can be done with or without Admiral running 2 Click Program Files Nobeltec Support Tools Network Test Utility 3 This utility can send and or listen to UDP data which is the protocol Admiral uses to send and receive NMEA data Run this tool on each computer without running Admiral or use both Admiral and the utility in combination The utility will d
76. wind symbols Wind is coming from the cardinal direction of the line toward the tip The feathers on the end signal the wind speed e Current Ocean Currents can be shown as Arrows or Hollow Arrows e Sea Surface Temperature Can be shown as Line Contours transparent contours with temperature labels or as Filled Contours e Sea State Also referred to as wave height these can be shown as transparent Line Contours or Filled Contours e Swell The swell is depicted as Arrows or Hollow Arrows e Storms Can show Maximum Information such as the storm name and history and a circle indicating wind strengths or Minimum Information e Apparent Wind Angle AWA This is the way that the wind is impacting your ability to navigate factoring in your speed direction currents etc e Theoretical True Wind Angle TWA This is the actual data about wind without accounting for bearing speed etc Pressure Contour Wind Barb Weather Front Surface Currents Figure 13 1 Weather Elements On the Screen Nobeltec Weather Nobeltec and GRIB Weather Options NOTE SkyMate options are edited using SkyMate Connect XM WxWorx layer options are controlled using the XM WxWorx Weather Layers window accessible through the PlanView NavBar After selecting GRIB or Nobeltec as your weather provider you may determine which weather layers you wish to overlay on your charts Place a check mark in the Weather Options check boxes on the Navb
77. windows are open the Ghost Cursor provides a second cursor that visually illustrates where the cursor is on each chart you have open This is especially useful when using photo and vector charts together as you can place your cursor on an object on the vector chart and see the corresponding location on the photo S N l N S 3 a S gt a S I S b 102 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Goto Lat Lon Tool This tool allows you to input the latitude and longitude you want the chart centered on Grid Display Tool This tool opens a plotting grid You can use it like any other chart Hand Panning This tool allows you to easily move the chart across the Chart window pane When enabled the cursor will change into a Hand icon and you will be able to drag and drop the chart easily Press the Hand Panning ToolBar button again lt B gt or lt Esc gt to turn off Hand Panning Increase 3D Boat Scale Tool Makes the 3D vessel icon larger l Instant Waypoint Tool When the tool is selected left clicking ona location will create an Instant Waypoint An Instant Waypoint is actually a route consisting of only two waypoints one at your boat present position and one at the position on which you clicked It creates the route and activates the second waypoint Land Features Tool Toggles the Passport land data layer a Leg Range and Bearing Tool This turns the range and bearing la
78. 110 111 112 112 112 112 112 113 113 113 113 113 115 115 116 116 116 117 118 118 119 119 119 119 119 120 120 120 Table of Contents Menus Right Mouse Menus Multiple Monitor Support Video Cards Using Multiple Monitors 19 Networking General Benefits GlassBridge Network Admiral Only Shared Information Chart Sharing Data Sharing NMEA Data Sharing Sounder Sharing GlassBridge Network Only Radar Sharing Security Dongle Installing Admiral Without A Dongle Configurations of GlassBridge Networking Example 1 Example 2 Setting Up the GlassBridge Network Setting Up Example 1 Behavior of Example 1 Setting Up Example 2 Setting Up the Navigation Inputs On the Client Computer Configuring the GlassBridge Network Options Behavior of Example 2 More Information About Data Sharing Processed NMEA Data Raw NMEA Data Sharing Send NMEA Data Listen to NMEA Data Creating a Routes amp Marks Home Advanced Networking Settings Sharing Charts Sharing Radar Sharing Radar Targets Sharing Sounder Sharing Active Routes Marks and Waypoints Troubleshooting 120 120 120 120 120 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 121 122 122 122 122 123 123 123 123 123 123 124 124 124 124 124 124 125 125 125 125 125 125 126 126 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Test the Cabling Test the Glass Bridge Network How to Use the Glass Bridge Netwo
79. 183 specification Datum Setting Nobeltec Navigation Software assumes that the GPS will be outputting data at the WGS84 Datum The setting is configured in the GPS Dead Reckoning A method of navigation where known values position course speed time and distance to travel are used to calculate unknown values Values such as set and drift can also be incorporated Depth Sounder See Sounder Deviation Changes in the magnetic field due to the ferrous composition of surrounding objects affecting the measured direction of magnetic North Deviation is measured as the angular difference in direction between the actual magnetic heading and the compass heading DGPS Differential GPS A network of 60 radio beacons in conjunction with a GPS that sends correction information used to reduce positional error to the 1 3 meter range Digital Selective Calling DSC A type of VHF radio that allows boats to contact other similarly equipped boats using that boat s MMSI Number DSC allows two radios to communicate selectively with each other while excluding other receivers from using the signal DSC can report position information Dongle Small hardware device that unlocks Admiral VNS and international chart capabilities Replaces the use of a Serial Number and SiteKey Dongle Number Similar to the Serial Number a Dongle Number is attached to the Dongle made up of 20 digits in the following convention 1234 123456 1234 123456
80. 244 Figure 21 35 Ping Response Once the radar responds close the Run window If the ping request does not respond or gives the message Hardware error Request timed out or anything other than Reply from 192 168 0 1 there is something wrong with the connection To troubleshoot the connection check the following 1 The PC and the IR2 Control box are connected with a crossover cable and not a straight through cable The Network Interface Card NIC software is installed correctly The radar is powered on and has been for at least one minute The LED lights on the RJ 45 connector for both the PC and the MDS box are illuminated and or blinking The left most LED should remain solid while the other LED may blink Verify the IP address and Subnet mask are correct If you are uncertain about the PC s network configuration please contact the network administrator or the NIC provider s technical support Chapter 21 Radar Usage 159 Troubleshooting Network Connections Test the Connection without the Radar Wizard If the Radar wizard is unable to see the IR2 try to locate the radar in another manner Power the radar on and wait 1 2 minutes for the radar to obtain an IP address from the Router hub The IP address assigned to the radar is dynamic and may change if the radar is powered off for a period of time or if the router hub is re powered The Router that Jeppesen Marine recommends you use allow you t
81. 5 propagated on the network However if you have one of the first generation InSight Radars to share radar data on the network you will need to follow the instructions listed below 1 Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network 2 Click Enable Advanced Networking 3 Click Yes or No for the Radar Sharing drop down box 4 When finished click OK NOTE InSight Radar users will need to run the Radar Wizard on each computer that needs to view radar Refer to the Radar User s Guide for further instructions on using the Radar Wizard Sharing Radar Targets After acquiring MARPA Radar targets using Nobeltec Admiral it is helpful to share these targets with the other computers on the GlassBridge Network To do this click Tools Options GlassBridge Network and then click Share RADAR Targets Any computer with this setting will share MARPA targets on the GlassBridge Network Sharing Sounder If you have purchased and installed a Nobeltec InSight Sounder you can share Sounder data to any computer connected to the GlassBridge Network Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network Tab to setup Sounder Sharing i NOTE The following Sounder settings are NOT shared across the network Sounder COM port configuration UDP port configuration colors and all options set using the Tools Options Sounder Tab EXCEPTION Tools Options Sounder Tab Transducer Offset Temperature Calibration Speed Calibration and 50 and 200 kHz Gain Ca
82. 9 pin serial port on your PC If your computer does not have a 9 pin serial port you may need to use a SeaLevel Serial to USB adapter Multiple Input Devices You can select multiple COM ports for input For example a GPS on COM port 1 and a depth sounder on COM port 2 If you connect two devices which supply the same type of data such as two GPS units you must set up port priorities to tell the program how to handle multiple sets of similar data See Port Priorities on Page 11 Manual Device Settings You can manually set up your NMEA devices using the GPS Port Setup Wizard To set up your hardware device select Tools Options Ports Configure Tab Port Types IA TIP You can select the same COM port in two or more columns If you select the same COM port for both Input and Output Autopilot then data can both come into and be sent from the COM Port this is fairly common Input Ports Designates COM ports that will receive data from other devices Output Autopilot Ports Designates ports to which data will be sent To Configure Input COM Ports 1 Select Tools Options and then the Ports Configure Tab 2 In the Input Ports list select the COM port s to use A Warning Indicator will let you know if the port is unavailable or improperly configured 3 Select a COM port and then Configure This Input Port beneath the list box to restrict the type of incoming data see Figure 3 4 4 To fine tune your settings yo
83. Bathy Radar Selection Gu a a EA Choose radar to edit settings for E a a Playback Radar Strong Opacity Background Weak l Singe ae M Gradient Less OE Chart Radar Option Setting Auto Range Links With Chart w Radar Overlay Only Keep Range Setting No Suppress Echoes Around Boat radius No Show Ghost Cursor Yes Degree Values on Radar Rings Yes v Cancel Apply Help Figure 21 24 Tools Options Radar Tab Ghost Mouse Cursor Shows a ghosted image of the mouse cursor in every chart window Most typically this would be used when the radar display and a chart window are not in the same rotation angle so identifying targets is made simpler Degree Marks on Radar Rings Turns on or off the degree values from the radar range rings Vessel Centric Bearings This option lets you change how the angle of the Electronic Bearing Line is measured and displayed The value set here is used in the InSight Radar window pane Radar Text Banner This option changes how the radar information is displayed when overlaid on an electronic chart There are three options Boxed Full and None This option does not affect the display of the text itself only the background box Radar Resolution not on all radars This option is only available if you have certain versions of the Nobeltec digital radar Further the options included are based upon which Nobeltec digital radar you own Click the down arrow to see what options a
84. Click OK to complete these changes To change Tender Target colors 1 From an open Chart window pane right click on the Tender 2 Select Tender Color from the pop up menu 3 Select a color for this target from the color selector 4 Click OK to complete these changes Locating a Tender Onscreen To locate an active Tender 1 Open the NavBar or InfoBar Targets tab 2 Locate the active Tender you are searching for from the Targets drop down menu 3 Click Find to center that Tender onscreen NOTE In PlanView you can place a check mark in the Lock check box to keep your chart centered on the selected Target Chapter 25 Tender Tracker 187 Tender Tracker Alarms Seetrac Alert If your STU is equipped with an Alert function users of the STU can raise an audible alarm within Admiral by pressing and holding the Seetrac Alert Button An alarm message will appear onscreen when that alert is received The message reads Tender ID has sounded an onboard alarm BRG XXX distance XXX Click Acknowledge to clear this alarm Ls Ww I D a M as A S Tender Out of Range Alarm If a Tender exits an established Tender Guard Zone a Tender Out of Range alarm will sound and an alarm message will appear onscreen This alarm will clear once the Tender re enters the Guard Zone or can be turned off manually Range for a Tender Guard Zone is between 0001 and 1000 units NOTE All units of measure are adjustable fro
85. Controls whether any AIS targets are displayed in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar When unchecked all subsequent options in this window are disabled Hide Targets Beyond This option allows you to select a maximum distance range for detected AIS targets to display Targets whose distance exceeds the selected setting will not display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Options are Do not hide 5 10 20 40 60 or 80 units of measurement Default is Do not Hide i NOTE The following filtering features are Admiral Only Only display targets in an AIS TXT file When selected only targets whose MMSI numbers are listed in the AIS TXT file located in C Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series are displayed This setting enables you to track specific known targets while ignoring unknown targets Only display targets that are not anchored moored or aground Removes any targets from display whose reported status is anchored moored or aground If targets whose status is anchored moored or aground are moving at 0 2 Kts or higher their status is ignored and they will continue to display Default setting for this option is Off AIS Filtering x V Display AIS Targets Show Specific Target Types Unknown Reserved for future use 4 Wing in Ground W Fishing vessels W Towing vessels v v at 4 Hide Targets Beyond Do not hide l Only display targets in an AIS TXT file Only display targets that are
86. Creates a route with two waypoints one at the vessel and the other where you click on the chart e Objects Lets you place an object such as a mark onscreen Chapter 18 NavView 113 View Provides you with options for zooming in Zooming out moving to the Next View and opening the View Manager e Vessel Provides a menu for turning on one of the autoscroll modes turning the chart to course up or leg up activating tracking adding range circle or accessing Boat Properties e Charts Provides a set of menus for working with the Charts e Other Access other miscellaneous actions such as GPS transfer e Exit Provides you with an option to exit Admiral close the program entirely or exit NavView and return to PlanView e MOB Sets a Man Overboard mark directly beneath the vessel s current Lat Lon Quick Tips NavView is easy to navigate once you understand how the Menu Buttons function 1 The blue buttons on the right side of the screen activate available menu options 2 If there is a small arrow on a Menu Button that button links to additional sub menus 3 Click Back to return to the main menu You may need to click Back more than once if you are in a secondary sub menu Menu Button Auto Hide Menu Buttons can be hidden to maximize screen space To enable choose a specified period of time from Tools Options Misc NavView Menu Auto Hide 5 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute or 5 minutes or select No to disable
87. Details about a selected chart will display here Use the scrollbar on Paper Chart Issue Date 03 01 2005 the right to reveal additional information Correction Date 08 13 2005 Click here to Uninstall charts Use this feature to remove charts you do not intend to use and to save disc space Click here to Add or Remove charts from Quilting in circumstances where the charts are incompatible or redundant i Projection Mercator The QuickView Chart Preview window ri Search Previous Next The QuickView button displays a small overview of the currently highlighted chart in the QuickView Chart Preview window gt Single Chart V Maximized T V NothUp Course Up D Hel Click on the Objects Tab to change view settings and to create new pL ans object folders Type a chart name in the These check boxes control Chart Table x Search field and use the how the chart will display Open Objects Install Uninstall Quilting Previous and Next buttons to when you open it Object Folders locate the name or similar names 4G Default Database a Show Name Length Hof Waypoints CCQ Boundaries a Route Created 8 15 2006 1 554nm 2 This list contains objects in the default database folder Ca DSC Vessels In Dis Bi oS Route Created 8 25 2006 4 281nm 2 ies Moes Bi we Route Created 8 25 2006 6 866nm 2 KICA Marks x Route Created 8 15 2008 22 267 nm_2 l Re ae CS Range BeSing on Objects ar
88. E15 gt 0D0 0 1D noon ae COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 4 15MvVUPP1 2G lt sgHKUSSiQ0wB0 lt 0i 0 21 SEE y COM 7IAIVDM 11 4 15N54 PPOOGSNP JKgk1 wBOOSO O54 iti ages e COM 7IAIVDM 1 1_4 1817KFO02Po081 7LIMJE mFIE FOG 01 F ARPA targets based on magnetic No COM 7IAIVDM 1 1 B 15MqvJPO3mG gt LiKST pUsDiFO8Gt 0 2D Display DSC Targets Yes Target Name Settings Full l iv Display Predictors 6 Minutes Target Threat Settings F Display Wakes 5 Minutes DSC Directory AIS ARPS Target Timeouts 30 Seconds Enhanced AIS Filtering DSC Target Timeouts 30 Minutes Tender Directory Figure 20 3 Incoming Data Display W Window D S S as VY S OOO _ au Figure 20 2 Tools Options Targets Tab N Changing Target Appearance To display Wakes and Predictors 1 Open Tools Options Targets 2 Place a check mark in the Display Predictors check box to show an extension line from the target to its projected trajectory NOTE The Display Predictors option does not apply to Tenders 3 Click Display Wakes to see how a target has moved over time 4 Click the small down arrow next to the Target Name Settings option to change the appearance of the target names Full Short or None 5 Click OK to complete these changes NOTE Tender Short and Full names are identical either option displays the description of the Tender as input into the Tender Directory To change Tender Target colors 1 From a
89. EA producing device to each computer e Redundance Using a recommended network configuration a redundant system can be installed in a very short time GlassBridge Network Admiral Only Using Nobeltec s GlassBridge Network you can connect two or more computers that have Admiral installed on a network in order to share data and charts Networking adds redundancy enhanced performance and reliability You can share data such as routes amp marks NMEA data radar images and even Passport charts from one computer to another This chapter discusses the features of networking Some of these features are specific to the GlassBridge Network only Shared Information Chart Sharing Due to restrictions required by many global hydrographic offices each copy of Nobeltec Navigation Software that you have on your vessel is required to have its own set of charts NOTE The GlassBridge Network allows you to share Passport Charts between computers This saves money and makes installing charts easier Data Sharing Networking provides support for sharing navigation objects from one computer to the next Create a route on one computer and move it to another without having to copy it onto a floppy drive or other portable Chapter 19 Networking 121 media When sharing data on a network Nobeltec Navigation System allows you to set one computer as the Server The computer that is specified as the Server is where all your routes marks tracks a
90. Edit polar data area NOTE Press lt Tab gt or click Add Row to add another angle speed row to a particular wind speed e Drag and Drop Left click on or near an existing polar point and drag the polar point to a different location on the polar diagram If you drag one dot on top of another and release the mouse button the two points become one If you click on the diagram but not on or near a point a new point is created e Right click on or near an existing polar point to remove it from the polar diagram Creating a New Polar File If a polar has not been loaded the message NO POLAR SELECTED appears in the Polar Display diagram To create a new polar follow the instructions listed in Editing a Polar File then save the data as an SPP polar file You can also use the auto record feature to determine your actuals and then edit your polar based on those results Saving the Polar File Once you edit a file you can save under a new file name From the Polar Display window click Settings Select the Polar Values tab Click Save Polar As The Save As dialog opens Type a new name for the polar in the File name box Click Save to save the file Click OK to close the Polar Values tab oF Be wW eS Lay Lines and On Screen Indicators The Tools Options Sailing tab provides a number of options that determine how sailing information is presented in the Chart window These options include Apparent Wind Indicator True W
91. GPS position and are displayed relative to the boat heading To adjust an EBL click and drag it to the desired angle The angle displays in degrees and is found in the lower right corner of the radar display EBL in Clock degrees Relative degrees Absolute degrees Guard Zones One of the powerful InSight features is the ability to create fully customizable guard zones This zone acts as a shield to the vessel If the InSight Radar receives radar returns inside the guard zone you will be notified with an alarm Once a guard zone is created you can click on any of the outer edges to change the size and shape of the guard zone in that direction Click in the center to move the whole guard zone around the vessel When radar echoes enter the guard zone you are notified in the Status tab of the NavBar as seen here One MCs Wester 6 Staha Messages GAtve Met Bac O tages EZA P004 S 44 06 AM Heder echen n quad pore t 1 J Figure 21 13 Radar Echoes shown in Status Tab of NavBar WARNING Neither guard zones nor any other part of the InSight Radar should be relied upon as the sole means for detecting collision possibilities To improve the function of the guard zone make sure your radar is properly adjusted to see targets inside the guard zone Pulse Length 4kW and Higher g g vw Pulse Length is the length of time of each transmission of radar iza waves by the transceiver Typically a longer pulse length produ
92. GPS units can only handle a limited amount of text Click on the Advanced button to change the names then click Next ba Va S N gt Si 9 AQ S S a 3 S I A T 98 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide ia GPS Transfer Wizard 7 Available GP Functions GPS Type eTrex Software Version 2 1 Select the function from the list g Get Route from GPS C Send Waypoints to GPS Get Waypoints from GPS Update System Time from GPS vary Follow the onscreen instructions and click Next The GPS Transfer Wizard will now begin downloading data from the GPS You should see the progress bar and a summary of the data that is being received When all data has been transferred click Next Close the GPS Transfer Wizard and open the PlanBook by clicking on the PlanBook tool on the ToolBar The objects you selected to download should appear in the PlanBook Setting the Computer Clock Get Track from GPS GPS requires a very accurate clock in order to work properly Each GPS 12 005 Bak Cancel 2 Figure 15 1 GPS Transfer Wizard Function Selection Screen 7 The GPS Transfer Wizard will now begin sending your data to the GPS You should see the progress bar and a summary of the data that is being sent When completed click Next to finish 3 Downloading from a GPS 4 This is one way to back up information contained in the GPS unit 3 To download information from your GPS t
93. Input Options Listen to All sentences C Exclude sentences listed below C Include sentences listed below only More Info SSS sentence streams Click Port Speed 4800 v Protocol NMEA DIBA on the More NMEA 0183 OK Cancel BiG Info button for ox _ caca Ea more examples Figure 3 4 COM Port Input Configuration NOTE To configure autopilot ports see Chapter 14 Autopilot Other Options on the Ports Configure Tab This tab also contains settings for several other options including Require Valid Checksums On All Sentences If this option is enabled the software will ignore any data that does not contain a valid checksum used to verify the validity of incoming data Equipment conforming to previous versions of NMEA 0183 specifications do not always use checksums in all data sentences Require Checksums To Be Valid if Present Verifies validity of sentences which contain checksums but accepts sentences which do not contain checksums Report Checksum Discrepancies Alerts if a checksum error is found Detect GPS MOB and MOB Hardware Used to detect MOB sentences from some GPS units or to connect to external MOB devices such as the Emerald Marine Alert 2 Log All Input and Log All Output Used for debugging and problem solving Sometimes a Nobeltec product support provider will ask you to record input or output for diagnostic purposes see Page 14 Configure Autopilot Opens the Configure Aut
94. J 199 A S S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 200 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide K Keel Offset 49 L Layovers 68 Leg Range and Bearing Toggle 102 Lights and Buoys Display Tool 102 Line Boundary Tool 102 M Man Overboard 17 37 Man Overboard Tool 102 Marks 96 102 Autopilot Active Mark 96 Mark Tool 102 MARPA 138 139 MARPA Symbology 152 Multiple Monitor Support 120 My Nobeltec Program amp Chart Information 206 N NavBar 80 NavBar Tool 102 Navinfo 27 NavView Making Changes 120 Options Dialog 120 View Manager 116 New Log Entries 102 New Route 68 New Waypoint 68 Night Vision 106 NMEA Support 11 North Up Tool 36 O Objects 33 Annotations 37 Boundaries 39 Boundary Circles 39 Man Overboard 37 Marks 36 Routes 37 Tracking 38 Waypoints 37 Options 103 Other Features Display Tool 103 Output Ports 50 Overzooming 35 p Passport World Charts 31 PlanBook 67 111 Editing and Deleting Waypoints 68 69 Estimating Arrival Time 68 Fuel Consumption 69 Layovers 68 Managing the PlanBook 20 New Route 68 PlanView 15 Basic Screens 15 PlanView Screen Elements 16 The PlanBook 20 Pointer 103 Polar Display See Sailing Plus Pack Print 103 Printing Printing Tides and Currents Information 75 Printouts 112 Properties 45 47 Alarm Properties 48 Automatic Dead Reckoning 46 Boat Properties 45 66 Description 45 General Boat 46 Icon Properties Page 45 Set and Drift
95. K to confirm your settings From the Ports Configure tab select View Data to see which data is being sent No No I wa Q S a l N N 170 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Sounder in NavView Admiral Only The InSight Sounder has been designed to work especially well inside the NavView interface mode Using NavView you can configure your InSight Sounder to fill an the entire screen or one of multiple window panes In addition you can create multiple Views allowing you to step through chart 3D radar and sounder displays effortlessly BLAPBRDRPASARX Figure 22 16 Sounder in NavView ToolBar in NavView All of the right click menu items are available in the Sounder Display window in NavView When focus is given to the Sounder Display a Sounder ToolBar is available at the bottom of the screen see Figure 22 16 Select Tool from the menu in the bottom right hand corner of the screen to make the Sounder ToolBar appear The right facing chevron arrow indicates that additional buttons are available for this ToolBar Sounder and Fishfinder Basics How It Works A Sounder is capable of producing electrical pulses which the transducer converts into sound waves sent downwards in a cone shaped column As the sound wave hits objects in the path of that column such as fish seaweed debris structures and eventually the sea floor reflected sound waves are returned to the transducer Th
96. Key or select Edit New Route from the main menu 2 Click on the chart to place the first waypoint see Figure 6 3 As you move the cursor to the next position a line is drawn from the previous waypoint to the cursor and range bearing text is displayed Click on each subsequent position until the route is completed Double or right click on the last waypoint location or click lt Esc gt e Il y wa o a a a a a A x lt A AS A ia I Koe 38 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide 5 Enter a route name or accept the default name which is the date and time the route was created The naming prompt feature can be disabled from the Misc Tab of the Tools Options dialog Left click to create the first waypoint Click again to create _ the next waypoint pe Double click left mouse button when finished Figure 6 3 Creating a Route To move a waypoint click on the waypoint and drag and drop it to the desired location Tracks Tracking A Track is a graphical representation of the historical path of your vessel It is made up of a series of track points connected by line segments whose length depends on the frequency of track recording Track point recording can be modified using the Boat Properties menu Track Tab Track Colors can be modified with the Tools Tracking Track Line Coloring option To turn tracking on or off click on the Track button on the ToolB
97. Longitude and Latitude 1 10 000 minute Course Over Ground Relative to true north to 1 10th degree True Heading 0 to 359 degrees derived from gyro input Time Stamp The universal time to nearest second that this information was generated Class A AIS units broadcast the following static information every 6 minutes MMSI Number Vessel specific unique identifier links the data broadcast to the described vessel Transmitted with every sentence IMO Number Unique identification reference related to ship s construction Radio Call sign International call sign assigned to vessel often used on voice radio Name Name of ship 20 characters are provided Type of Ship Cargo See Table 20 1 Dimensions of ship To nearest meter Source Reference point on ship from which position is calculated Draught of Ship 1 10 meter to 25 5 meters note air draught is not provided Destination 20 characters are provided at Master s discretion ETA Estimated Time of Arrival at destination month day hour and minute in UTC at Master s discretion Class B Class B is nearly identical to Class A but broadcasts dynamic information every 3 minutes when underway at a speed of less than 2 Kts and every 30 seconds at an underway speed of greater than 2 Kts Static information is broadcast every 6 minutes on alternating channels Class B is only required to receive not transmit text safety messages and other application identifier
98. MBER You must purchase and install the correct weather hardware in order to display weather data from SkyMate or XM WxWorx e Weather Provider With Jeppesen Marine s weather partnerships you can receive weather updates from Jeppesen Marine WeatherMail SkyMate GRIB or XM WxWorx i NOTE When you change Weather Providers it may take a few minutes before data from the new Weather Provider displays on screen e Pressure Barometric pressure can be displayed as contour lines with labels or as a color gradient Options are Filled or Line e Frequency This refers to the number of barometric pressure contours that you want to show The options are 2 Mb or 4 Mb e Radar Opacity Radar weather overlay can be made more or less transparent with this setting Options are 25 50 75 or 100 e Satellite Opacity Satellite cloud cover overlay can be made more or less transparent with this setting Options are 25 50 75 or 100 e Wind Wind can be displayed as arrows or as wind barbs Wind barbs are meteorologically correct wind symbols Wind is coming from the cardinal direction of the line toward the tip The feathers on the end signal the wind speed e Current Ocean Currents can be shown as Arrows or Hollow Arrows e Sea Surface Temperature Can be shown as Line Contours transparent contours with temperature labels or as Filled Contours e Sea State Also referred to as wave height these can be shown as transparent Line
99. Main Menu Click on the Marks Tab F PlanBook Routes Marks Tracks Boundaries fx PlanBook Calculations to Mark Departure Date Time 12 29 2006 12 39 55 PM SOG 0 0 kts Origin SS Nobeltec x Select New Origin Graphic Show Lat Lon 4613 543 N 124 03 033W 69 231 nm 302T Never Never 46 02 775 N 124 08 582W 67 758nm293T Never Never 4554 346N 12438 238 W 85 125nm282T Never Never 4619 078 N 12408 715W 75 531 nm304T Never Never 4614 112N 123 49 076 W 61 588nm308T Never Never 4613 646 N 12350 893W 62 318 nm307T Never Never 4613 646 N 12350 893W 62 318 nm307T Never Never 4611 531 N 12401 815W 67 466nm301T Never Never 4536 674N 122 39 492W 0 417 mnm289T Never Never 4536 536 N 122 38 867 W 88 4 yd 090 T Never Never 46 06 442 N 124 02 445W 65 401 nm297T Never Never F Display Route Marks Rng Brg To TTG ETA Current Link Tid No Curent Link Nee No Current Link i No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No No Current Link No gt Properties Delete Print Column Setup Show All Hide All Default Database 8 15 2006 amp Treas 001 Squa 001 Squa Mark Squa Mark Squa 8 30 2006 Treas 8 30 2006 amp Treas 8 31 2006 amp Treas Boundary Circle ye x Re Mark Squa wl4kt6 Squa Dx x Bx Bx Bx Bx x Import Export Figure 9
100. Menu to view the Routes Tab 2 Select the name of the route to delete 3 With the route highlighted click on the Delete button To delete an individual waypoint Chapter 9 PlanBook 69 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab 2 Select the name of the route to edit 3 Click on the Route Detail for Tab and highlight the waypoint that you want to delete 4 Atthe bottom of the screen click on the Delete button Changing the Waypoint Order This is used to change the relative position of a waypoint in a route Moving a waypoint in a route can be accomplished in the PlanBook by using the Move Up or Move Down buttons which are located along the bottom edge of the PlanBook under the Route Details Tab 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab 2 Select the name of the route to edit 3 Click on the Route Detail for Tab and highlight the waypoint that you want to move 4 Click the Move Up or Move Down button Repeat as needed for any waypoint that you want to move Fuel Consumption The PlanBook can be used to calculate your projected fuel consumption for any route that you have created in your program Just enter values for the rate of fuel consumption for your vessel at different speeds and the program will calculate the rest Information regarding your vessel s fuel consumption rates are available from your boat manu
101. N we If the GPS Port Setup Wizard does not start automatically select Tools Options Ports Configure from the Main Menu Click GPS Port Setup Wizard 1 When the Nobeltec GPS Port Setup Wizard pop up appears click Next 2 GPS Port Setup Wizard searches all available Serial Ports for devices 3 If you have connected a device to the computer on a specific port and GPS Port Setup Wizard does not recognize the data click the View button next to that port If the data is garbled or unreadable contact Jeppesen Marine Technical Support to troubleshoot your issue 4 Follow the remaining onscreen instructions to complete setup Step 4 Radar Setup Wizard A Note About Radar Setup Nobeltec Navigation Software is designed to receive input from a Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 IR2 or input from a Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB which will digitize radar output from most industry standard radars Admiral and VNS 8 0 and later versions support input from up to two 2 IR2 Radars The IR2 or IR2 BB Installation Guide s instruct you how to physically connect these Nobeltec Radar products with your PC Nobeltec Navigation Software will establish an interface with your hardware using the Radar Setup Wizard When you run the Radar Setup Wizard all radars must be installed powered on and connected to the network or PC The IR2 BB for non Nobeltec radars must also be connected and powered on The Radar Setup Wizard will detect
102. NMEA Sharing cCOMs NMEA data to other devices NMEA Data Sharing enables sharing RAW NMEA MICOME T bs data between computers on the LAN See cea oe I SendNMEAData IF Listen to Ockam Data T Listen to NMEA Data Listen to B amp G Data 2 2 OK Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 21 Tools Options Data Sharing Tab Repeater Ports designate the COM ports that will be used to output or repeat all of the data that your software receives Repeater ports should only be used to forward data to other devices Sounder Tab If you have purchased a Nobeltec InSight Sounder and unlocked the Sounder features with the Sounder Unlock Code an additional tab is displayed in the Tools Options menu to adjust Sounder settings For complete information regarding InSight Sounder please refer to Chapter 22 Sounder NOTE All units of measure are adjustable from Tools Options Units Open Sounder Display at Startup Indicates whether or not a Sounder Display should be created whenever Nobeltec Navigation Software is started Default is Yes Histogram Speed Speed at which the sounder returns are scrolled across the screen Default value is 1 1 Display A Scope Default is Yes Display Depth Scale Indicates whether or not depth numbers appear down the right side of the Sounder Display Default is Yes Display Bottom Line Default is Yes Display Depth Text Default is Medium Display Boat Speed Text When ena
103. NOBELTEC by Jeppesene Making Every Voyage Possible Nobeltec Navigation Software Users Guide PR JEPPESEN WW VEValat NOBELTEC by Jeppesene Nobeltec Navigation NOBELTEC j g NOBELTEC v Call Jeppesen Marine at 800 946 2877 to order InSight Radar 2 IR2 The all new IR2 leverages the power of the PC to bring together the world s best navigation software with the familiarity of traditional radar to create the ultimate navigation system IR2 offers unparalleled chart plotting and radar abilities that provide higher resolution and greater confidence IR2 surpasses traditional radar systems through its use of the award winning Visual Navigation Suite and Nobeltec Admiral These navigation programs make the IR2 easy to use affordable to update and provide functionality not found on other radars What s more Nobeltec s IR2 models can be connected to a vessel wide network providing all of your nav stations with radar and chart plotting data for true redundancy Nobeltec Product Part InSight Radar 2 IR2 Call Serial Port to USB Converter Serial Port to USB Converters are a great tool for when your computer does not have an available serial port The converters work by allowing you to plug in any NMEA 0183 device into the converter and then using an available USB port to receive the data Jeppesen marine offers a Single Port and a 4 Port converter Nobeltec Product Part Si
104. Option Setting Auto Range Links With Chart w Radar Overlay Only 2 Keep Range Setting No Suppress Echoes Around Boat radius No Show Ghost Cursor Yes Degree Values on Radar Rings Yes v Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 9 Tools Options Radar Tab Automatic Double Speed Defaults is Disabled You can select a SOG minimum at which the radar output speed will increase to double time When SOG drops below that rate for 8 seconds or more radar output co I 8 a a Ro Ss wa WA SZ a S x kar 2a a gt aL l ee 52 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide speed reverts to normal time e Radar Coloring Choose either single or gradient coloring and select a color for up to 4 range settings of reception Strong to Weak e Opacity Select the opacity or transparency of objects detected by your radar and showing on the charts e Background Select the background for your chart and radar In use you can toggle between radar units by right clicking on the radar display and clicking Select Radar Weather Tab The Weather Tab is where you configure how weather graphics will appear when overlaid on the charts Before using this tab you must select a Weather Provider see Chapter 13 Weather and Wind The following are the options available from the Weather Tab NOTE Not all of these options are available with all weather providers G N REME
105. Pack is as an upgrade package available to users of Nobeltec Admiral who are equipped with a Seetrac Tender Tracking System Seetrac s Tender Tracking System is a stand alone radio frequency transmission system that can be interfaced with your computer through a standard COM port connection When properly configured Tender Tracker provides onscreen up to the minute target data about smaller affiliate watercraft called Tenders including smaller boats jet skis wave runners or even passengers carrying a wireless Seetrac Tender Unit STU Tenders can be viewed onscreen using your Admiral target tracking capabilities and can greatly improve security and safety of these affiliate vessels and objects keeping you constantly aware of their movements i NOTE Jeppesen Marine highly recommends that you use an approved Seetrac installer for Seetrac hardware installation The Tender Tracking System consists of a Seetrac Base Unit SBU and up to 99 STUs one installed on each affiliate Tender Typically the operational range of the wireless STU is five NM although a long range system is also available STU transmissions are only visible to the vessel containing the SBU for that Tender not to other vessels within range The SBU can be set to Autonomous or Managed Mode In Autonomous Mode Admiral will display STU signals as transmitted by the SBU In Managed Mode the SBU can be instructed to listen to STU channels for specific durations
106. Packet Once Admiral has received raw NMEA data and configured COM port priorities the official status and position COG SOG LAT LON etc of the vessel can be determined using the GlassBridge data sharing features This preferred data can be shared with other copies of Admiral on the GlassBridge Network By default Admiral is configured to share processed NMEA data Program DVD Will clearly show the program title Admiral Visual Navigation Suite or Tides amp Currents product version 9 0 4 1 etc and build number RADAR RAdio Distancing And Ranging Microwave pulses used to detect objects usually metallic based on wave reflection Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services RTCM In the United States the Federal Communications Commission FCC and U S Coast Guard use RTCM standards to specify radar systems Emergency Position Indicating Radio Beacons and the basic version of Digital Selective Calling DSC radios Range The distance between two specified points usually the ship and a mark Range from Boat to Cursor RBC The distance between the ship icon and cursor Raster Chart Charts where the chart information is stored as a rasterized image Examples are raster charts are Raster Plus RPL BSB and GeoTIFF Rasters are the scanned images of the original paper chart Rate Of Turn ROT The speed at which heading is changing Repeater A feature used to output all incoming NMEA data to other dev
107. PlanBook see Figure 9 4 you can manage all the marks you have created The Marks Tab allows you to edit or delete a mark and also calculate its range bearing and ETA Marks are listed alphabetically so it is helpful to use similar names for marks you wish to group Fishing Spot 1 Fishing Spot 2 etc Editing and Deleting Marks The easiest way to edit or delete objects is to find them on a chart right click and select Properties or Delete from the pop up menu However you can edit and delete marks from within the PlanBook as well To edit the properties of a Mark 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Marks Tab From the list of marks double click on the mark to be edited The Mark properties dialog will appear Edit the properties and then close the properties dialog box To delete a Mark 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Marks Tab Click on the mark to be deleted Click the Delete button which is located along the bottom edge of the PlanBook window The mark is immediately removed from the program Calculating Range and Bearing to Marks You can calculate the range and bearing to any position from the vessel or from a user specified point using the PlanBook To calculate range and bearing from a mark to your vessel 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the
108. PlanView window at a time 9 PlanBook The PlanBook is a tool used to help you manage Routes Marks Tracks and Boundaries plan trips and estimate arrival times See Figure 4 7 for a detailed overview of the PlanBook Screens NOTE Information in the PlanBook is based on the date time settings of your system clock Predictions for a specific date must be manually input Opening the PlanBook In PlanView open the PlanBook by either clicking on the PlanBook tool on the ToolBar or by selecting Tools PlanBook In NavView you must set up a PlanBook view using the View Manager see Chapter 18 The Routes Tab The Routes Tab of the PlanBook see Figure 9 1 is a tool that can be used to create edit and manipulate routes In addition it also allows you to obtain ETA s and print out reports As shown in the image below there are also two sub Tabs one that lists all of your routes and another that provides details or a list of the individual waypoints for the selected route F PlanBook 0X PlanBook Route Options Route Summary Departure Date Time 12 29 2006 12 39 55PM Waypoints 2 Distance Starting to Ending WP 22 266 nm SA z Distance Origin to Ending WP 90 025 nm Origin SS Nobeltec Z Select New Origin ETA to Ending WP 01 06 00 42 Vessel SOG kt Apply to All L Time to Ending WPP Poe 0 0 S adi Fuel Starting to En Apply Currents Apply Set Drift Set Fuel Rates
109. Port Setup Wizard The InSight Sounder product voucher has not been redeemed The InSight Sounder unlock code was entered or written down incorrectly Click on Help About Nobeltec on the main menu Make sure that the serial number listed here is the same one that was used to redeem the product voucher Nobeltec Navigation Software is not 7 1 or later Go to www nobeltec com services voucher to enter your voucher number and receive your unlock code Once you have the unlock code follow the instructions for entering your unlock code in Chapter 2 of this guide Verify that all numbers and or letters are correct by going to www nobeltec com store or contacting Sales or Technical Support at 800 598 4976 Be sure to have your serial number available when using either option If a different serial number was used to redeem the product voucher you will need to go through a process called a Hard Uninstall If this is the case DO NOT attempt to uninstall the software yourself Instead please contact the Technical Support Department at 800 698 4976 and they will walk you through the special hard uninstall process Go to www nobeltec com support to download the latest Service Pack or contact Jeppesen Marine to obtain an update CD Table 22 3 Cannot Configure Sounder in GPS Port Setup Wizard GPS Port Setup Wizard Does Not Detect Sounder The SeaLevel USB RS 422 adapter is not installed properly in the device manage
110. Presets the Auto Gain function is designed for a hands free operation of the radar By setting the gain preset the software preserves relative gain settings for every range level Sea Clutter SEA a SEA Use the Sea Up and Sea Down keys to reduce the effect of random echo returns from waves or rough water near the vessel Sea Clutter is sometimes referred to as STC Slow Time Constant or just SEA Reducing the on screen clutter caused by the echoes of waves is accomplished by increasing the SEA value Sea Clutter shows on your radar screen as a thick cluster of radar returns Increasing the Slow Time Constant can help filter out the echoes between rough seas and real targets When STC is Off When STC is On Figure 21 11 Sea Clutter Auto SEA 4kW and Higher AWO Based on the Radar Presets the Auto SEA function is designed for lt i gt hands free operation of the radar By setting the SEA preset as described in the chapter titled Setting up the InSight Radar the software adjusts to the changing weather conditions to maintain the radar quality The effect of Auto SEA varies based upon range and conditions Rain The vertical beam width of the radar antenna allows you to see targets on the surface even when a ship is rolling This feature however can have the side effect of confusing rain snow or other conditions with real targets Increasing the Rain value helps to discriminate between weather and solid returns Chap
111. Radar Plotting Aid Annotation A navigation object composed entirely of text Its purpose is to place descriptions or other information on specific areas of a chart Apparent Wind Direction AWD On board wind direction measurements the AWD may not be the same as the True Theoretical Direction TWD Nobeltec Navigation Software derives TWD from AWD by taking any bearing deviation into account Apparent Wind Speed AWS When the vessel is in motion on board wind speed measurements the AWS will differ from stationary measurements True Theoretical Speed or TWS TWS is derived from AWS by taking the vessel s motion into account Automatic Identification System AIS AIS provides a means of broadcasting digitally navigation information including ship position speed heading dimension name destination ROT aids to navigation base station reports and more Created by the IMO and sanctioned by the U S Coast Guard for ship monitoring and collision avoidance It is used by ship traffic monitoring and control locations throughout the world to improve situational awareness and help prevent collisions at sea Automatic Radar Plotting Aid ARPA The functionality entailing the detection of moving targets and calculating their speed and course Used to automatically detect radar targets and output to other devices ARPA is a collision avoidance system Autopilot A self steering device which attaches to a ship s steering mechanism
112. Recorder Data Yes displays your recorded data and uses that data to build 3D representation in the 3D display window No disables Bathy Recorder Apply Tidal Offsets This setting applies a tidal offset to your data allowing for changes in currents and tides during recording Default is Yes If the option is set to Yes when any depth data point is received by the 3D engine the offset of the closest tidal station as determined by settings in the NavBar Tides amp Currents tab is applied to the depth For example if the Sounder or Depth Finder device reports depth at 12 feet and the closest tidal station shows a high tide at 4 feet the actual depth is stored as 8 feet If there is no tidal station within 50 nautical miles no tidal station influence is considered Bathy Recorder Frequency of Data Collection Use this setting to control how often Bathy Recorder will record a data point Options are every meter every 5 meters every 10 meters every 20 meters and every 50 meters Default is every 5 meters More frequent data collection results in larger Bathy Recorder files and higher detail co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa A SZ 2 S O OS SS J Aa a a l ee 56 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide However if performance of your computer becomes an issue consider using a longer frequency Bathy Recorder Frequency of Screen Refresh This drop down list allows you to select how frequently t
113. S b 17 On the Water This chapter puts all of the elements covered in the previous 16 chapters together and gives a general overview of how most people use Nobeltec Navigation Software from day to day Sea Trials Before you start using Nobeltec on a regular basis it is a good idea to get out on the water and run some simple tests to make sure that all hardware is performing the way that it should A sea trial does not take up a lot of time and will give you more confidence in your system Listed below are some tests that you can perform to test your system Turning On the System Avoiding a Wayward Mouse TIP If you are using Windows XP and have a GPS connected to a USB port using a Serial Port to USB Converter then you may at some point experience a problem known as wayward mouse GPS and other equipment use a standard NMEA 0183 data sentence to communicate When NMEA made this the standard data sentence for marine electronic equipment the main type of port on a PC was a serial port With the advent of Windows XP most computer manufacturers began to discontinue the use of serial ports replacing them with USB ports Keyboards and mice on these systems plug into USB ports Since the NMEA 0183 data sentence is not compatible with a USB port the work around is to purchase a converter If your GPS is turned on and is connected to a USB port Windows XP during the boot up process may believe that your GPS is a mouse When Wi
114. S based electronic navigation can provide a finely tuned focus on your boat and surrounding navigational obstacles however like all technologies GPS technology has limits A prudent navigator will understand these limitations and how they possibly affect the safety of the boat and crew i NOTE NMEA 0183 1 0 1 5 only supports 2 digits of Latitude and Longitude precision approximately 60 feet 18 2 meters NMEA 0183 2 0 and higher supports 3 digits of Latitude Longitude precision approximately 6 feet 1 8 meters Another limitation to complete accuracy is the accuracy of your digital charts Electronic charts are made by skilled cartographers however some cartographic surveys upon which digital charts are based were made over 50 years ago Therefore it is possible for errors to occur in the final products Navigation Software Plus Packs Bathy Recorder The Nobeltec Bathy Recorder sold as a Plus Pack for Visual Navigation Suite VNS and Nobeltec Admiral enables you to record sea floor topographic information using your Sounder Depth Finder device and to incorporate that data into your 3D display When you use the Bathy Recorder to customize your sea floor charts those charts will constantly improve with repeat trips over the same areas enabling you to have a perfect picture of important sea floor terrain as well as your favorite fishing and diving spots Fleet Manager Fleet Manager interfaces with SkyMate satellite hardw
115. SCOT PILOT F Lock Find Fiaing Lait 02 becsnda hi More into p Rang 000 p Latin i permeata 872 120 Km 4146 953km 283T 4405 933N l Enpa iat eamh p TOPA Dearing p Soa Lewngitinte Rate of Tors ekcawten 10 19 34 096 T 200ks 06902873W Deiat FOCIA Figure 21 22 Target Acquired shown in Targets Tab of NavBar The Targets tab of the NavBar shows all the targets that are being tracked including AIS targets Use the drop down box in its upper left corner to choose the target that you wish to view The More Info section is used to display the extra information from AIS targets Setting a Target Alarm The alarm settings are set based on the target s CPA and or TCPA By default the alarm settings are set to CPA 2 nm TCPA 300 seconds When a predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than the CPA alarm or its predicted TCPA less than the TCPA alarm limit an audio alarm sounds and the target displays as a red triangle with a red vector To change the alarm settings go to the program options by clicking iR on the Options ToolBar button or through the menu system by clicking on the Tools drop down menu and then on Options Now click on the Targets tab and change the Target Threat Criteria as desired For more information on the Options see the section later in this chapter JN warnine The CPA TCPA alarm should never be relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision The
116. SS Se a oe ana Figure 25 1 Tender Onscreen Example Chapter 25 Tender Tracker 185 STU transmissions include COG SOG Range and Bearing from the main vessel CTS Depth and Wind all of which are displayed in the Targets tab of the InfoBar or NavBar The Tender is displayed as a target in the Chart window pane using a diamond shaped target icon see Figure 25 1 and standard target behaviors Unlocking Tender Tracker Once you purchase Nobeltec Tender Tracker Plus Pack contact your Jeppesen Marine product distributor for an Unlock Code This code will unlock the Tender Tracker Plus Pack features already embedded in Admiral To use your Unlock Code to unlock Tender Tracker follow the instructions on Page 6 Installing New Chart Permits and Unlock Codes Setting Up Tender Tracker Upon installation of the Tender Tracker Unlock Code all Tender Tracker functionality is available However you still need to direct Nobeltec Admiral to look for SBU output in order to recognize Tender Tracker data and display affiliate objects onscreen as secondary targets To set up receipt of SBU data 1 Open Tools Options Ports Configure 2 Inthe Input Ports column place a check mark next to the COM Port where the Seetrac Base Unit SBU is connected 3 Click Configure This Input Port 4 Change the Port Speed for the Seetrac COM Port to 9600 baud 5 Click OK to close the COM Input Configuration window i NOTE If you are usin
117. Settings window which is available either via Tools Options Sounder or via Sounder Options and clicking the Transducer Offset button in the lower left of the window The Transducer Offset field must be set to gt 0 greater than 0 feet Shallow Water Alarm Settings Trigger alarm when depth sensor reports a depth less than 120 000 ft Alarm Responds To Sound Water Depth No Sound Depth Below Transducer Sound Once Depth Below Keel Sound Continuous Transducer Offset 10 1 ft OK Cancel ok Figure 23 4 Shallow Water Alarm Settings Transducer Offset NOTE In order to generate accurate bathymetric recordings Bathy Recorder settings must allow for the waterline offset of the transducer Using a Sounder or Depth Finder Bathy Recorder is designed for use with a Sounder or Depth Finder device that is connected to your onboard computer and can output NMEA 0183 depth data When depth information is being received accurately by Nobeltec Navigation Software the Console panel on the right hand side of the screen will display Depth Dpt information Cursor Position Lat 4 7 35 632 WN Lon 122 73 202 W Dpt 64 3 ft Figure 23 5 Console Display with Depth Information AN re Choppy seas impact performance Jeppesen Marine recommends that you do not use Bathy Recorder when choppy seas may give you an inconsistent cone angle or if your boat is in a si
118. Tender Tracker devices are connected to your computer and configured properly these targets can also be displayed in the Chart window pane There are three main components to target tracking in Nobeltec Navigation Software Onscreen representation of targets in the Chart and Radar if selected window panes Target data displayed in the Targets tab of the NavBar or InfoBar Configuration of target display using the Targets Tab of the Tools Options menu Prior to Setting Up Target Tracking In order to properly set up Target Tracking you must first install all target tracking equipment Target Tracking requires that target information is received from one or more of the following sources A GPS device required for valid target data A Heading Sensor required for valid Radar target data An AIS Transceiver Receiver outputting valid AIS sentences to the computer A DSC radio transmitting DSC sentences A Seetrac Tender Tracking System Base Unit SBU transmitting Tender data to your computer Radar transmissions from either e A Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 IR2 connected to the computer The IR2 is a radar specially designed by Nobeltec to send digital imagery directly to a personal computer through your computer s Ethernet port or A Standard External Radar connected to a Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB which is in turn connected to your computer The IR2 BB is a specially designed hardware component that convert
119. Terrain Color n Terrain Grid Color Boat Type power Memory Usage Maximum Vanl A or Ds x Cancel Apply Figure 8 13 Tools Options 3D Bathy Tab Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 55 Keel Marker Select desired depth for the keel marker e Keel Marker Color Select the color of your keel marker This is the color the keel marker appears when you are in a safe water depth e Keel Marker Alarm Color Select the color of your keel marker when it is too close to the terrain e Alarm Depth Margin Specifies the thickness of your keel marker as well as the depth to set off the keel marker alarm Enable HW Acceleration Yes to accelerate graphics No to disable Open Close 3D ToolBars with 3D Window Yes to open Bathy Source Display 3D Bathymap Data Yes displays the Passport Deluxe 3D high resolution bathymetric chart data in the 3D display window No disables Bathy Source Display ChartGridding Data Yes allows you to create 3D sea floor topographic data from 2D vector charts in areas where those high resolution sea floor charts are unavailable or to supplement existing vector data in places where the high resolution 3D sea floor topographic data is available When you select Yes this data is used to build 3D representation in the 3D display window No disables this feature NOTE The following options only appear if you have purchased and unlocked Bathy Recorder Bathy Source Display Bathy
120. Tips Your Serial Dongle Number Your Serial Number is unique to your copy of Nobeltec Navigation Software You must either input your Serial Number when you initially launch the product using the Activation Wizard or use a Dongle with the Serial Number on the tag which bypasses this requirement MW TIP If you ever need customer support you must have your Serial or Dongle Number available Please write your Serial or Dongle Number in the My Nobeltec Program and Chart Information table inside the back cover of this User s Guide The Dongle If you are using a Dongle with Nobeltec Navigation Software you do not need a Site Key to access charts and supplemental data Install the Dongle into an available USB port prior to launching the software for the first time NOTE Some systems require a parallel port Dongle Please contact your Nobeltec product distributor if you require a parallel port Dongle Chapter 2 Installation 3 The Site Key North America no Dongle only In order to complete software installation users in North America who do not have a Dongle must receive and input a Site Key from Jeppesen Marine within 30 days of initially installing the software Nobeltec provides up to 3 computer specific Site Keys for each Serial Number US Purchasers only You may install the software in multiple locations but will need to obtain a new Site Key for each installation in order to use the software after 30 days IN TIP If y
121. Yes displays targets No disables Display Predictors When selected this option will display a course predictor line in minutes for all detected targets Display Wakes Similar to a predictor line the Display Wakes option allows you to see a historical track of where the target has been AIS ARPA Target Timeouts ARPA targets normally transmit reports every few seconds Select how long an ARPA or AIS target will remain on your screen between reports If the software does not receive a report during this set amount of time it will be removed from the display DSC Target Timeouts DSC targets only transmit data when requested by another DSC equipped marine radio Select how long a DSC target will remain on your screen between reports If the software does not receive a report during this set amount of time that target will be removed from display Target Threat Settings Use this button to detect potential threats based on information received from ARPA MARPA and AIS targets If a target meets criteria for this setting the target will render in red and a warning message will be shown e Detect Threats Check this box to look for threats as determined by your CPA and TCPA settings When there is no check mark in this check box the Alarm CPA and TCPA options are disabled e Audible Alarm When Threat Detected Check this box to receive an audible alarm when CPA or TCPA meet safety zone criteria e Closest Point of Approach CPA U
122. Zone a Tender Out of Range alarm will sound and a pop up will appear onscreen This alarm will clear once the Tender re enters the Guard Zone or can be turned off manually The range for a Tender Guard Zone is between 0001 and 1000 units of measurement NOTE All units of measure are adjustable from Tools Options Units To create a Tender Guard Zone 1 Place a check mark in the Tender Alarm check box 2 Click the EI button to open the Tender Alarm Settings window 3 Input a distance from the boat that you do not wish the Tender to exceed This is a 360 radius around the vessel 4 Select how you wish the alarm to function if the Tender crosses the Guard Zone No Sound Sound Once or Sound Continuous 5 Click OK to close the Tender Alarm Settings window Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 49 Seetrac Alert If your STU is equipped with an Alert function users of the STU can raise an audible alarm within Admiral by pressing and holding the Seetrac Alert Button An alarm message will appear onscreen when that alert is received The message reads Tender ID has sounded an onboard alarm BRG XXX distance XXX NOTE Tender ID settings are configured using the Tender Directory from Tools Options Targets see Chapter 25 Tender Tracker Click Acknowledge to close this message and turn off the alarm Stats Tab The Stats Tab is where you input specific information about your vessel Within Admiral you may also s
123. a Show Boat Yes e Show Best Angles Yes Fill Velocity Range Yes Fill Color v Restore Defaults Cancel Help Figure 24 2 Polar Display Settings Display Settings tab Chapter 24 Sailing 179 e Background Type With this option you can customize the polar background The choices include Grid which shows the angles boat speed circles as lines Gradient which fills in each speed range from the polar start color to the polar end color and Alternating which alternates the polar start color and the polar end color from each speed range to the next e Grid Color This is the color of the grid e Polar Start Color Polar End Color If using gradient or alternating these are the colors from which the gradients or first alternating colors start or end in the velocity ranges or circles Restore Defaults Click this button to reset all display settings to the original default settings that came with this Plus Pack Polar Values Tab Create and manage your polar diagrams using the Polar Values tab When you make changes the polar is automatically saved when you close the Polar Display Settings dialog when you close the application and automatically every 10 minutes It is always a good idea to back up your data before you make changes Fields available on the Polar Values tab include Active Polar file name The active polar file name appears When you installed Nobeltec no polar was selected so the default Polar file nam
124. a reference from which to reckon heights or depths It is called a tidal datum when defined in terms of a certain phase of the tide Tidal datums are local datums and should not be extended into areas which have differing hydrographic characteristics without substantiating measurements In order that they may be recovered when needed such datums are referenced to fixed points known as bench marks source Our Restless Tides View Locator A red rectangular outline in the QuickView Window which represents that area of the chart visible in the main view window View Manager Screen layout tool that allows you to determine which hardware products and features of Nobeltec Navigation Software you wish to display onscreen VMG See Velocity Made Good VRM See Variable Range Marker WAAS See Wide Area Augmentation System Waypoint A mark of which routes are made The ship when following a route steers by successive waypoints Wide Area Augmentation System WAAS A system of ground stations providing GPS signal correction information WAAS capable GPS receivers can have position accuracy closer than three meters 95 of the time World Folio DVD Contains the entire world of vector charts Open World Folio regions with permit codes purchased from Jeppesen Marine or an authorized Nobeltec product dealer Glossary amp Index 197 XM WxWorx XM is a satellite provider who streams radio content www xmradio com WxWorx provid
125. a to compensate for these local deviations HE TIP Using a Combination GPS Heading sensor that determines heading based on dual GPS antennas instead of magnetic influence can significantly improve the accuracy of incoming heading data and simplify the radar alignment process A REMEMBER Aligning the radar with a chart is sometimes difficult Even highly accurate charts are subject to the interpretation of navigable objects by that chart s cartographer Radar images however are real time transmissions of radar wave returns You should expect that there may always be some level of disparity between the chart and the radar Adjusting the Compass Master Heading Correction This process allows you to align the digital compass with the vessel center line This is normally a one time process that corrects the entire 360 radar output equally To align the compass 1 Open Nobeltec Navigation Software 2 Click on the Boat Properties Tool or Right click on the boat and choose Properties from the pop up menu 3 The Boat Properties General tab shows how compass bearings are displayed True or Magnetic along with the magnetic variation at the boat location Click Deviation to open the Compass Heading Corrections dialog 5 Determine the amount of offset and enter it into the Compass Heading Corrections window Master Correction field 6 Because the master value affects all degrees equally make sure to enter that value before proceeding
126. accessible radar units and walk you through setup of each Users of Admiral and VNS 8 0 and later versions can toggle between radar units by right clicking on the radar display and clicking Select Radar Installing Your Radar Solution Included with your Nobeltec IR2 or IR2 BB radar solution are installation and wiring instructions The majority of technical support issues revolve around incorrect installation Nobeltec strongly recommends using a qualified marine technician to install all radar hardware If you install the hardware components yourself be sure to completely test and verify your wiring and connections Depending on which radar solution you own your radar may integrate to the computer using the USB Universal Serial Bus port or an Ethernet Network port Instructions for each of these connections is documented in the IR2 or IR2 BB Radar Installation Guide NOTE The Nobeltec IR2 BB requires a separate driver installation prior to setting up your Radar Setting Up Your Radar This section assumes that you have correctly installed an IR2 Radar or the IR2 BB and that it is functioning properly Once your radar or black box is installed you can then integrate the radar feed into the software To integrate Radar features into Nobeltec Navigation Software you must first use the Radar Unlock Code provided to you with your IR2 or IR2 BB purchase see Page 6 Installing New Chart Permits and Unlock Codes Once you have unlocked
127. ace mode CNX A OROG aan aa mer as lett OE af Figure 1 1 Nobeltec Navigation Software Screen Both of these industry leading navigation programs can provide you with unparalleled awareness of your nautical environment interfacing our exclusive brand of geographically referenced digital charts and marine navigation aids with other navigation tools such as a Global Positioning System GPS radar depth sounder onboard camera and a DSC radio Chapter 1 Introduction How Navigation Systems Work Nobeltec Navigation Software is an important part of a complete onboard navigation system which should include your computer navigation software digital nautical charts and a Global Positioning System GPS receiver A P GPS ey M Satelite RY GPS i Receiver Figure 1 2 How Navigation Systems Work This software ships with planning overview charts supplemented by Passport World Charts and Deluxe data Chart Permits sold separately Passport World Charts Passport World Charts are Jeppesen Marine s signature brand of the entire World Folio of 14 000 nautical digital vector charts subdivided into regions and stored on a series of CDs and DVDs available from Jeppesen Marine Each Passport World Chart region is encrypted and you must purchase a Chart Permit number sold separately for each region you wish to use in order to access that region Chart Permits can be purchased directly from Jepp
128. ace names marine facilities etc To Show or Hide Objects On the Screen 1 Click File Chart Table Objects 2 Click the check box next to the object type for which you wish change settings If the object has a check mark in the check box it will display 3 Click Done when you are finished Creating New Folders 1 Click File Chart Table Objects 2 Click the New Folder button 3 Name the new folder Dragging Objects Into a Folder 1 Click File Chart Table Objects 2 Highlight the object s to move 3 Click and drag the object s into the folder The icon will momentarily change into a until you place it over the desired folder Chapter 4 Basic Screens 19 Click here to Open charts The first folder provides a list of charts for Chart Table x your current position Click the sign for a complete list of all charts ______ Open Objects Install Uninstall Quilting Click here to Install charts and Unlock Codes Some chart types may originate from sources other than the Nobeltec Navigation program AJZ THE WORLD a 18003 UNITED STATES WEST COAST CAPE BLANCO TO CAPE FLATTERY 018520 U S WEST COAST OREGON WASHINGTON YAQUINA HEAD TO COLUMBIA RIVER U50 NORTH PACIFIC OCEAN EASTERN PART U501 WEST COAST OF NORTH AMERICA MEXICAN BORDER TO DIXON ENTRANCE hd 1 185238 Horizontal Datum WGS 84 Source Local Latitude Shift 0 000000 Longitude Shift 0 000000
129. al Leg There may be areas during your voyage where you will be travelling faster or slower than your average speed To figure those instances into your ETA calculations you will need to set the speed for an individual leg the distance between two waypoints To set the boat speed for an individual leg 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab Click on the name of the route that you want to work with Click on the Route Detail Tab 4 From the Route Detail Tab in the column labeled Leg SOG identify the first leg that you want to change then click on the leg speed A gray outline will surround the value Press lt Enter gt and then change the value You do not need to input units 5 Repeat for each leg speed you wish to change ke l V a i N x S Qa I ox 68 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Estimating Arrival Time Estimated Time of Arrival ETA is calculated based on the route segment lengths legs and the Speed Over Ground entered for each leg Arrival time can start from the present time or from a user specified time and date To determine ETA based on a user specified time 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab Click on the name of the route that you want to work with In the Route Options field input a departure date and
130. alled the dead range and the shadow can be produced entirely or partially Since the dead angle due to the funnel mast etc is detectable during the installation of the transceiver it can be eliminated by changing the radar mounting position False Echoes Caused by Side Lobes Other Targets Real echo of strong reflection target true echo Main Lobe Side Lobe Antenna False echos caused by side lobe Figure 21 26 False Echoes Caused by Side Lobes The radiation beams emitted from the transceiver comprise side lobes in addition to the main lobe Since the side lobe energy is very low it does not affect distant targets A false echo due to the side lobes is produced from a close in target with strong reflections A false echo caused by the side lobes appears as an arc It is eliminated by slightly reducing the gain or by changing the FTC level Radar Horizon Because light is generally refracted downward we are able to see a slightly farther distance than the actual physical horizon This expanded perception is called the optical horizon which is approximately 9 farther away than the physical horizon Radar Antenna H1 D H2 O ay Figure 21 27 Radar Horizon The radio waves used for radar are called microwaves and like light they travel in straight lines Microwaves have similar characteristics to light and images produced by microwaves on your radar screen are called the radar horizon Since microwaves ar
131. ally splits the screen and ToolBar buttons are disabled the 2D chart As you zoom in creates a 3D window covering half because they do not function in or out on the 3D Navigator this the workspace the 3D window box will change size accordingly E Nobeltec 3D Navigator Center On Boat File Edit view Tools R ar Sounder Sailing Window Help l xij rf i Nobeltec Lat 46 11 531N Lon 12401 815 W Change 3D Mode qa A A ro es F A TOH 3 A k a Change 3D Net 3D Navigator Center On Boat joj x U18003 1 736 560 16 lt lt 67 n w vo Gape 7 5 Zuo nm Exaggeratio Toggle 3D Depth As Indicator gt fai Decrease 3D TF 7 e Boat Scale ee LLHdgUps N A 7 LLHdgDrP N A Incr ee 2 i Tu 2 LLHdgDns N A Oat scale rs ar San Heel N A Center On Boat Mode Leeway N A Explore Mode BottomLock BottomLock Height Favorite Boat Views Zoom gt X Appearance b Mo nna Cage d Render d AY A Al ee Status Bar e doe rime ene Info Mo F Weather v Show Thumbnail ve Mark Za T amp C Targets QQ Search GISPS Trip x r Cursor Position J Cursa Se Leper Selected Object Last Clicked Location y Display 3D Toolbar 46 09 368 N ir aA T 124 00 211 W v Capture Bathy Bedoni Data 2 432 nm 153 T Display Bathy Recorder Data 3D Depth 46 ft Te erat ae eae Sl Boat Icon is
132. and connect it to the software correctly However you must already have the device wired and transmitting data to an available serial port NOTE If your NMEA device uses an RS422 connection standard consult your device manufacturer for wiring instructions or contact Jeppesen Marine for an RS422 interface device If your device wiring pins are labeled Transmit Receive or Transmit Receive it is most likely RS422 standard GPS Setup Electrical Connection GPS to Computer Most GPS models have differing proprietary connectors for data access For this reason the 9 pin data cable provided by Jeppesen Marine is unfinished on one end You will also need a connector cable which may have been packaged with your GPS originally or may need to be purchased from your GPS retailer or manufacturer Connection Type RS232 Typical Computer COM Port Signal Ground Ground Receive Data Data In Transmit Data Data Out Table 3 1 Pinouts For The 9 Pin Nobeltec Serial Data Cable Chapter 3 Hardware Setup 9 Identifying the Wires RS232 The serial port connector supplied by Jeppesen Marine has a label which identifies the wires to be used which are Data In Receive Data Out Transmit and Ground These are three of the nine wires on the 9 pin serial connector It is possible that your GPS cable will have more than three wires showing Since there is no industry wire color standard other than pin numbers you will need to re
133. ar Weather tab to display or remove various weather features You may display as many features as your weather provider and service level permits Not all data types are available in all purchased or downloaded files Listed below are the types of weather options available to overlay on your chart If the weather provider or service level that you purchased or downloaded does not include the data types listed below they cannot be displayed on your chart Figure 13 1 shows how these features might appear on your charts e Barometric Pressure This check box turns on pressure contours e Wind This check box turns on or off the display of wind values e Ocean Currents These are jet stream current predictions and should not be confused with the coastal and tidal currents contained in your Tides amp Currents software program e Sea State Sea State is the roughness or choppiness of the water typically a function of the wind tides and other weather inputs e Swell This is the rolling movement of the ocean Swells are generally measured in height and time between peaks e Weather Systems and Fronts This check box shows or hides major weather system fronts as analyzed by meteorologists e Tropical Storm Information Track tropical storms around the globe e Sea Surface Temperature Course Sea Surface Temperature is shown as color contours so you can actually see the water temperature e Precipitation Radar images of coastal precipita
134. ar the lt T gt Hot Key or Tools Tracking Track Line Coloring Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only Tools Track Line Coloring opens the track coloring dialog box Track Coloring allows you to color the track line based on specific data types such as water temperature or depth If you use this option you must be receiving appropriate data from an NMEA device For example if you choose track based on depth you will need to have a transducer sending depth data Use the drop down menu to select a data type to track e The color bar is segmented by dividers that indicate the number of Tracks created e Left click your mouse in the color bar to add a Track range divider Right click between two Click and drag the divider to adjust range settings Use the drop down menu to select an item to track segments to change the color Track Coloring I Color Tracks By lt lt c obm T 054 Zoom In Select a data type to color track lines wilt This coloring will override any custom color selected for a track Next select colors using sliders on the col bar To add a color range click in the color bar to create a new slider To remove a slider drag it off the ba To change colors right click on the color line between sliders Use the zoom and scroll buttons to navigateYhe color bar ha I Left click on line to add dividers Cancel Figure 6 4 Track Coloring Menu e Drag the rang
135. ar image to the chart Open the Boat Properties Menu 4 From the General Tab of the Boat Properties Menu click Deviation to open the Compass Heading Corrections window Click Deviation Entry to open the Compass Deviation Adjustment tool Incrementally adjust the New Deviation settings to line up the radar and chart images 7 Once the radar and chart images are lined up click Add to add this value to the deviation table 8 Change boat headings and repeat the process until you feel confident that the radar image lines up with the chart at each heading Compass Deviation Adjustment Tool x Use this tool to adjust the compass deviation visually Click Add to store the deviation adjustment in the Magnetic Compass Deviation Table accessible through Boat Properties Unadjusted Heading Master Heading Correction Current Deviation Close ora f i New Deviation i Adjusted Heading hl Figure 21 9 Compass Deviation Adjustment Tool N d l q S S Ka D S gt Aa S S S ce l T N 142 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Setting IR2 Radar Presets 4kW Models and Above Only The Auto Gain and Auto Sea functions allow for hands free operation of the radar As with any other setting on the radar these modes must be properly set up in order to operate correctly Radar Presets x Profile sc Cuve 4 e been OK 0 8 Presets Cancel Manual Sea 10 arn AEAN 0 50 Resto
136. ard a 506 Spred Over Water 3 4 4 s EES FP g ea 2 AWS Apparent Wind Speed a rh Rape GC Grom Orde Range to Active Mat k Rance AL Ahumb Line Panne to Artrve Mark ma C Figure 18 13 NavInfo Customize Sub Panel Strip Charts Some Navinfo subpanels are available to be viewed as a strip chart These panels are marked with a small diamond in the lower left hand corner To toggle the current Navinfo subpanel between a data view and a strip chart view double click anywhere on the subpanel To return to the regular Nav subpanel view double click on the strip chart Tracking Data For Strip Charts You can store the data points you have selected for your Navinfo Panels for up to 48 hours in Admiral and 24 hours in Visual Navigation Suite This allows you to toggle to a strip chart at any point to see the most recent values Saving Strip Chart Data Strip Chart data is retained upon shutdown You can also save your Strip Chart data at any time by selecting File Save All Nav Objects PlanBook PlanBook is available in NavView as one of your configurable windows See Chapter 9 PlanBook for details on how to use the PlanBook co l S D S gt I ioe 120 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Switching Configurations To toggle between multiple NavView layouts click on View To proceed through each layout click the Next View button or lt F6 gt to togg
137. are multilayered informational charts that are easy to read and structured for an adjustable layout RASTER CHARTS are a facsimile of a paper chart where text is embedded in the image Resizing or rotating raster charts will result in a text distortion AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHY are geo referenced images that can be viewed like a navigation chart and used as additional aids to navigation TOPO MAPS are USGS Topographic Maps for the United States They are raster scanned geo referenced and can be used like a navigation chart 3D or BATHYMETRIC CHARTS are elevation models of the surface of the Earth Bathymetric sea floor topographic charts are grid based charts that Nobeltec interprets and renders in 3D Chart Scales Chart scales are expressed as a percentage of original chart size or to scale You may zoom in or out either as a percentage of the area or in something called Apparent Scale AS AS is the scale visible at a given zoom level For example if a chart you are viewing at 100 has a natural scale of 1 10 000 AS remains 1 10 000 because your view is a 1 1 ratio If you zoom out to 50 AS becomes 1 20 000 because 1 onscreen is now double the mapped area Chart Type Controls Chart Type ToolBar x Figure 5 1 Chart Type Selection ToolBar When chart data is installed you can switch between different types by clicking the Chart Type ToolBar Figure 5 1 To close all charts and windows use the lt Ctrl Shift F4 gt Hot Key
138. are to provide you with the ability to track multiple vessels plot vessel positions on vector charts examine past tracks on each vessel and quickly send e mail to any ship in your fleet This tool is ideally used in a central location on shore such as a fleet office Each fleet vessel must be equipped with SkyMate hardware Sailing Plus Pack The Nobeltec Sailing Plus Pack is an upgrade package available for Jeppesen Marine s Nobeltec Visual Navigation Suite and Nobeltec Admiral Sailing Plus Pack is ideal for both cruising and performance sailboats because it provides customizable polar diagrams and computer calculated lay lines that help sailors achieve the ultimate sailing experience The Polars provided in this Plus Pack are delivered through a partnership with US Sailing and are designed to provide you with that organization s high quality official polar data Tender Tracker Plus Pack Admiral only Nobeltec Tender Tracker Plus Pack is as an upgrade package available to users of Nobeltec Admiral who are equipped with a Seetrac Tender Tracking System Seetrac s Tender Tracking System is a stand alone radio frequency transmission system for secure transmission of key assets that can be interfaced with your computer through a standard COM port connection When properly configured Tender Tracker provides onscreen up to the minute tracking data about smaller affiliate watercraft called Tenders including smaller boats jet skis w
139. arious functions of the Tide and Current Time ToolBar e Date You can change the prediction date by clicking on the small arrow next to the date window e Time Use the up or down arrows to change the prediction time Change the Time Use PC s System Time Figure 11 2 Tide and Current Time ToolBar e Animate This button animates the tide bars and current arrows over a 24 hour period Current arrows will get bigger and smaller and change directions as the current moves in and out In addition the blue section of the tide bars will also move up and down showing the high and low tides e Use PC s System Time Placing a check mark in the box next to this option sets the tide and current predictions to the time and date that is set on your PC updating every fifteen 15 minutes Displaying Tides and Currents Details Tides amp Currents is a separate program that works in conjunction with Nobeltec Navigation Software When you activate the tide and current icons the tide bars and current arrows provide you with a visible representation of what the tides and currents are doing You can also open up a detailed graph that shows statistical information over a 24 hour period To open a graph for any tide or current station 1 Turn on the current arrows by clicking on the Current Arrow tool on your ToolBar or right clicking on the chart and selecting Tides and Currents Current Arrows from the pop up menu 2 Right click on the tide o
140. ars asking if you want to continue You cannot Undo this action after you click the button Options Options settings include Polar Line The selected color is applied to the curved line that it follows Data points connect with a curved line that follows the expected interpolated boat speed at all angles Polar Data Points The selected color is applied to the data points Current Situation Dot This indicator is drawn if the polar diagram shows a polar line for the same wind speed AWS as the boat s current speed Real Time Data This is the color of the real time data dots that are drawn periodically on the polar based on the Display Real Time Data settings Show Boat This determines whether the boat and the current situation line and dot appears on the Polar display Show Best Angles This toggles the display of the optimum angles for best upwind and downwind VMG Fill Velocity Range This setting determines whether the area from the polar boat speed line is filled Fill Color This setting fills in the polar drawn on the Polar Display if the Fill Velocity Range selection is Yes g Polar Display Settings x Display Settings Polar values Default speed units v Goal Percentage of target speed 100 Real Time Data Units of measure F Auto Record Real Time Data Interval jad Clear real time data Option Setting Polar Line ya Polar Data Points Current Situation Dot BE Real Time Dat
141. ase the Tender Tracker Plus Pack to track affiliate objects such as jet skis or wave runners using Admiral software capabilities Options x e Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network DataShaing Sounder Sailing Video Option Setting Display ARPA Targets Yes ARPA targets based on magnetic No Display DSC Targets Yes Target Name Settings Full v v Display Predictors 6 4 Minutes Target Threat Settings ess 5 zj Minutes DSC Directory AISZARPA Target Timeouts 30 Seconds Enhanced AlS Filtering DSC Target Timeouts 30 4 Minutes Tender Directory Cancel Help Figure 8 18 Tools Options Targets Tab Target Tracking Setup specifications for detected targets on the Targets Tab Options and a brief description are listed below e Display ARPA Targets Admiral only Yes displays ARPA targets and No disables e ARPA Targets Based On Magnetic Choices for this option depend the type of heading sensor connected to your radar For Magnetic heading sensors select Yes For True North sensors select No e Display DSC Targets Yes displays DSC targets and No disables Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 59 Target Name Settings Determines how the target name will be displayed Short Name Full or None Default setting is Short Display targets on radar display
142. assport World Charts DVD into the DVD Drive AN re If you purchase an annual subscription your chart permit will automatically unlock charts on future World Folio DVDs as they are released for the duration of time permitted on your subscription 5 Inthe Permit field input the Passport Chart Permit Once a valid permit is input the permit will appear in the window below 6 Once you have input all permits purchased click Finish Chart Table x Open Objects Install Uninstall Quilting Install Type Permits amp Unlock Codes Install Figure 2 2 Chart Table Install Tab IN TIP If you are installing Passport charts through a network drive or have copied the chart database to your hard drive you need to tell the Chart Setup No S S S 2 ar S A S l N 6 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Wizard where to locate the charts Browse to locate the file Setup id 7 Tell the Chart Setup Wizard where to locate the charts usually on the Passport Charts DVD Charts folder by browsing to the Charts folder 8 Click Next 9 When asked to install the charts on your hard drive click Yes Installing New Chart Permits and Product Unlock Codes Chart Permits unlock a Chart region and Unlock Codes unlock supplemental features sold separately such as Radar Bathy Recorder etc For Chart Permits please make sure that you have already redeem
143. ater height of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mercator Projection The Mercator projection is a conformal projection devised by Gerhardus Mercator in 1569 Similar to a cylindrical projection in that the horizontal and vertical distances are stretched towards the poles Unlike the cylindrical projection the vertical and horizontal stretching of the chart preserves shape and direction Due to increasing distortion towards the poles Mercator charts are not very useful for representing cartographic information towards the poles Lines of latitude and longitude are straight lines on the Mercator projection On Mercator charts rhumb lines can be drawn as straight lines because the Mercator projection preserves bearing Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid MARPA A feature of contemporary radars that greatly enhances their ability to track targets lock on estimate closest point of approach calculate the target s true speed and course and output this information to other devices MMSI See Maritime Mobile Service Identity MOB See Man Overboard National Marine Electronics Association NMEA This organization has determined a standard 0183 to which all data transmission to and from marine peripherals must conform The NMEA issues standards for interfacing marine electronics devices Pronounced nee ma Not to be confused with NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association Computers directly con
144. athymetric data being transmitted by your Sounder or Depth Finder device see Figure 6 Throughout recording the Bathy Recorder indicator will appear in the upper right hand window of the 3D display Nobeltec Navigation Software must be receiving both GPS position and depth information from a depth sounder before sea floor topographic data samplings are taken You can verify that both data feeds are functioning using the console a NOTE If GPS position and depth information are not available an error message will be displayed in the NavBar Message Tab e Configure Bathy Recorder This allows you to change your Bathy Recorder default settings after setup Clicking this option will open Tools Options 3D Bathy e Import Bathy Data When selected this option opens a standard browser window for you to locate appropriate Bathy data to import into the Bathy Recorder Data must be in tab delimited format and should include latitude longitude and depth When data is imported the 3D display window if open changes to Explore mode and is centered upon the first data point in the imported file e Import Existing Track Data This allows you to convert saved boat track lines into Bathy Recorder data Tracks can be easily created using Nobeltec Admiral or VNS Track data can also be imported from an existing chart plotter Sounder onboard your vessel i NOTE You must have saved track data in order to perform this function e Delete Bathy Data
145. auto pilot 1 Click Edit Boat Properties from the main menu 2 Goto the Alarm Tab To activate a route i 3 Place a check mark in the check box next to Waypoint Arrival 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints 4 Click on the dotted button to access the Settings dialog 2 Click Activate from the pop up menu The route will turn green and the first waypoint will be activated 5 Enter the distance from the current active waypoint at which you want the Waypoint Arrival Alarm to occur This will change the default setting TIP Deactivate by selecting Deactivate or by activating another route to the new distance which affects every waypoint you create after the a change Activating a Waypoint 6 Select the radio button for the alarm setting of your choice An alarm The first waypoint of a route is automatically activated when that route is message box will still display even if the No Sound option is selected S activated but you can also manually activate a different waypoint To activate 7 Click OK x a different waypoint right click on that waypoint and select Activate Splitting a Route S Waypoint Arrival a ot One route may be split into two separate routes using the Split Route A When you are within a certain distance of the active waypoint an arrival command You may decide to break some long routes into smaller routes or message displays and you are prompted to activate the next waypoin
146. ave runners or even passengers carrying a wireless Seetrac Tender Unit STU Tenders can be viewed onscreen using your Admiral target tracking capabilities Tender Tracker can greatly improve security and safety of your Tenders and passengers keeping you constantly aware of their movements XM Plus Pack In order to use XM WXWorx you must have an XM compatible satellite receiver connected to your computer XM WXWorx provides a continuous weather feed over the robust XM satellite radio network enabling you to download high resolution real time weather data using the XMLink application to overlay that data inside of your Nobeltec Navigation Software directly over your vector charts and planned routes 2 Installation Step 1 Installing Nobeltec Software Install Nobeltec Navigation Software 1 Start your computer and if possible connect to the Internet Close all open programs including any anti virus software TIP You must have Internet connection to register your charts 2 Insert the Nobeltec DVD into the DVD drive 3 The installer should automatically launch the setup wizard Or open the CD files from My Computer and double click on setupvns exe 4 Click Next In the subsequent setup wizard screens you can select from a number of setup options Jeppesen Marine recommends that you accept the default program locations for all files 5 When the installation is complete close the installer by clicking Finish Installation
147. aying Current Arrows Interpreting Current Arrows 66 67 67 67 67 67 68 68 68 68 69 69 69 69 70 70 Fl 71 71 72 72 73 73 73 75 75 75 77 77 77 77 Table of Contents Adjusting Arrow Size Tide and Current Time ToolBar Using the Tide and Current Time ToolBar Displaying Tides and Currents Details The Tides amp Currents Graph Weekly View and Daily Table Changing the Date The Tides amp Currents ToolBar Multiple Windows in Tides and Currents Tides and Currents on the NavBar ETA Calculator Calculating Best Departure Time Calculating Transit Time Calculating Speed 12 3D Navigator Passport 3D Bathymetric Charts ChartGridding Opening the 3D Navigator Window The 3D ToolBar Mode Terrain Exaggeration Depth Marker Vessel Exaggeration Elements of the 3D Navigator Window 3D Locator The Status Bar 3D Color Legend Data Resolution Screen Resolution Predicted Depth At Boat Track Line Predictor Line 3D Vessel Keel Marker Depth Indicator Changing the 3D Landscape Terrain Sky and Water Shaded Relief Using the 3D Window Center On Boat Mode vii viii Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Zooming and Panning In Center On Boat Mode Explore Mode Zooming and Panning In Explore Mode BottomLock Adjusting BottomLock Height Favorite Boat Explore Views Importing Non Nobeltec Bathymetric Data Bathy Recorder 13 Wind and Weather Wind Conditions At Cursor Weathe
148. bels of each route leg on and off e Lights and Buoys Display Tool Displays a list of options for displaying lights and buoys on Passport Charts For more information see the section on Passport Charts in this manual 4 6 Line Boundary Tool Creates a Boundary Line Load User Interface UI Tool This button opens the Load User Interface dialog box which allows you to open a pre saved layout of all the ToolBar buttons on your screen e Man Overboard Tool Immediately places a Man Overboard mark at the vessel s present position In addition the Man Overboard mark is made active so that the Console panels will show range and bearing to the mark Al Mark Tool Used to select the Mark Tool The Mark Tool is used to create navigation marks on your chart After selecting the Mark Tool click on the chart to place a Mark e More Charts Tool Displays a menu of installed charts which are available for the current location gt Native Up Tool When using raster charts some charts maybe skewed The Native Up Tool changes the rotation of the skewed chart so it is displayed like a non skewed chart NavBar Tool Toggles the NavBar on and off B E New Log Entry Used to add an entry to the ship s log ws connect to the SkyMate system provided you have SkyMate hardware installed Nobeltec Connect External program window that allows you to Open New Photo Window Tool This button splits your scree
149. beltec Navigation Software User s Guide General Tab The General Tab allows you to input the name of your vessel set the bearing to true or magnetic and display a course predictor line lock the vessel at current Lat Lon coordinates and display a line to the active mark or waypoint If no GPS is connected input a set of Lat Lon coordinates to move the boat to that location If your Nobeltec program is receiving GPS data the boat will be automatically moved to the position indicated by the GPS Deviation Table and Master Heading This table provides a method for making adjustments to the input heading used as well as a table for entering the vessel deviation the impact of magnetic interference at specific degrees To setup the deviation table 1 Open the Boat Properties Menu 2 Click the Deviation button on the General tab 3 Adjust deviation on a per bearing basis by adding deviation amounts which are the same amounts shown on a compass card and which may have been provided by your compass adjuster 4 You can also add a Master Heading correction which will apply to all headings Use this option to correct for a misaligned heading sensor Log Tab This Tab contains a logbook feature for keeping accurate records of voyages Automatic Logging In automatic mode log entries are automatically created at a specified time interval This automatic log records specific boat information including date time Lat Lon Soeed O
150. bjects into a single object The chart will scroll if a route extends beyond the chart window If Quilting has been disabled an adjacent chart will open as needed This creates routes without interruption and with a close up view Use the lt gt and lt gt keys to zoom in or out If Quilting is off use lt Ctrl gt lt gt and lt gt to switch charts Manipulating Objects on the Chart There are three ways to place an object 1 Click the object button Mark Annotation etc Right click and select New object name from the pop up menu or select Edit New object name from the main menu 2 Click the chart where you would like to place the object To move an object 1 Click on the object to move and hold down the left mouse button 2 Drag and drop the object to a new location or right click on the object and choose Properties to edit the Lat Lon of the object NOTE You can also use the following Hot Keys to move an object you have clicked on in the Chart window pane lt Shift 7 gt or lt Shift Page Up gt moves the object up lt Shift gt or lt Shift Page Down gt moves the object down lt Shift lt gt or lt Shift End gt moves the object left lt Shift gt gt or lt Shift Home gt moves the object right To delete an object 1 Click once on the object you wish to delete 2 Press lt Delete gt or select Edit Delete NOTE Once you have placed moved or deleted an object select the next
151. bled the speed of the vessel is displayed in the bottom left corner of the Sounder Display Default is Medium Display Temperature Text Default is Medium Display Temperature Graph When enabled a moving indication of water temperature appears on the Sounder Display Default is No Display Tuning Indicators Auto Gain Auto Clutter and Auto Range indicators are drawn on the bottom of the screen when enabled Default is yes Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Option Setting Open Sounder Display at Start up No 4 Histogram Speed Tal Display 4 Scope Yes Display Depth Scale Yes Display Bottom Line Yes ad Transducer Offset 50 kHz Gain Calibration 0 4 Temperature Calibration 0 a Fahrenheit 200 kHz Gain Calibration 0 Speed Calibration 2 Colors OK Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 22 Tools Options Sounder Tab Show Ghost Cursor When the mouse cursor is moved over a Sounder window this causes the location of the Sounder returns to be indicated by crosshairs in any chart windows that are visible Default is Yes Open Close Sounder ToolBars with Sounder Window Causes the Sounder ToolBars to open close when the Sounder Window is opened closed Default is No Display Shallow Water Alarm Indicator Default
152. bs containing tools and data for some of the most frequently used or highest priority options available such as Man Overboard Targets Weather etc Info Tab The Info Tab contains three information panels Cursor position giving you the Lat Lon of the location your mouse is hovering over and the RNG and BRG to boat from the cursor location Cursor Tooltip which displays the Static information about the last object your mouse hovered over in the Chart window pane Selected Object Last Clicked Location which gives you the Name Lat Lon if applicable and other information about the last object you left clicked on in the Chart window pane oN l y wa o A A z WA 16 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide OCOLUMBL e x B Nobettec U18520 1 185 238 12 OVERZOOM lt lt 50 272 nm gt gt Feet U S WEST COAST OREGON File Edit View Tools Radar Sounder Sailing windy Help MENKE OAs Sx OBO PLEET Le ok aa IOI SS Nobeltec Lat 45 59 339 N Lon 124 06 071 W m F ah ale Ji ih Jo ease iy 46061046 i a ee 124 01 614 i Mark LLHdalips w A LLHdgOrP N A Sat Hee N A ee 1 S Leeway N A 12 o User Created i a 5 i Warning Indicators View in the ig mfo Info AM Weather 1 Status Messages Active Mark T EPEA D Search AFGPS Trip Cursor Position _ Cursor Tooltip Selected Object Last Clicked Location LAT 46 06 245
153. calculator estimates that you will use 244 gallons at 12 0 Kts Compute Best Departure Time ETA Calculator best and worst departure times are computed for the range entered Vessel Speed fi2 kts Earliest Departure 3 3 2003 6 33 12PM Latest Departure 3 4 2003 2 33 12 AM 12 0 KTS og B 17 hrs 4 mins 11 9 KTS 46 hrs 55 mins 8 00 p 10 00 p 12 00a 2 00a Departure Times Departure Times Fuel Estimate Best 03 04 2003 1 284M 16hrs 55 mins 305USGal Worst 03 03 2003 9 09PM 17 hrs 4 mins 307 USGal lt Back Finish Cancel Help Figure 17 3 ETA Calculator Fuel Consumption Calculation ey Enter the earliest and latest starting times of the trip The Time m i Chapter 17 On the Water 111 Input into the PlanBook The rest of the calculations will be completed in the PlanBook Open the PlanBook and select the Route Miami to Bahamas May 2006 Click the Route Detail Tab for Miami to Bahamas May 2006 Next enter a departure date of May 7 2006 and a departure time of 7 40 am In the Vessel SOG box set the SOG to 12 Kts After setting the departure date and time and entering the average speed click on the appropriate waypoints and change them to Layover and enter a layover time For this example plan on spending one night each in Bimini Freeport and Fort Lauderdale In this case a SOG of 12 kts results in an arrival time of 11 30 in Bimini see Figure 17 4 Change
154. ce Level Options Getting Nobeltec Weather Data Nobeltec Weather Data can be accessed only if your PC has Internet or email access You can download weather data from the Nobeltec website or receive it in an email Nobeltec weather data files are compact typically no larger than 70 Kb 1 Ifyou intend to use Silver or Gold level weather service purchase that service from Jeppesen Marine 2 Select Nobeltec as your weather provider from Tools Options Weather 3 Click the Weather button on the ToolBar or Weather on the NavBar to open the Weather Tab 4 Select the Weather Region to display if downloaded or click Daily Download to get new Nobeltec weather data 5 Place a check mark next to the Weather Overlay layers that you would like to display on the Chart window pane 6 Move the cursor on the chart to see conditions at the cursor position wu l m a Ro gt J D S O35 S 5 l A 92 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Step 1 Obtain Weather Data There are two ways to obtain a weather file from Nobeltec Each method requires a connection to the Internet and or email server Method 1 Download From Inside the Nobeltec Program 1 Click on the Weather Tab of the NavBar 2 Click Daily Download 3 Use the drop down menu to select the region for which you would like to view weather predictions 4 Use the radio buttons to choose the service level that best
155. ced by bridges sand beaches waves and even a boat s wake may all be represented differently than expected based on their visual appearance For correct interpretation of the radar picture it is highly recommended that the operator practice using the radar in good weather conditions Normal Echoes Figure 21 25 shows an example of a typical radar picture compared against a sample real world scenario There are a number of things to learn from this image regarding how a radar works Here is a list of some important ones 1 Buoy 1 is being blocked by the cape or hill and is not visible in the radar display N l q S S Ka D SS Aa S S S ce l T N g K WW 2 156 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Actual circumstance Picture on radar screen Buoy a Echo of small boat Small boat Echo by windbreak forest Echo of buoy Echo of sea ri Sand beach Echo of hill n Soft hi Echo of large boat ie ie Large boat Figure 21 25 Typical Radar Picture 2 Due to its proximity and size the large boat returns a strong radar return that is similar to its actual profile On the other hand the small boat is painted as a small dot because its reflection area is smaller Also notice that the smaller boat s wake returns a large reflection 3 The hill on the starboard side of the vessel because of its dense forest and hilly nature returns large echoes while the sandy beach to the p
156. ceive Select a Voice type from the drop down menu and a voice speed from Test the reports you have selected by clicking Test All To test a single audio report select the report type and then click Test This Click Apply to save all changes or OK to save and close this window The 3D Bathy Tab controls 3D and Bathymetric sea floor topography window appearance Options and a brief description are listed below General Travel Animate Route Speed Increase or decrease the panning and flying speed of the 3D window and animated Route speed can also depend upon the speed of your computer processor Sky Select Sky colors from Daylight Twilight Sunset or Disabled Water Style Transparency Select from various water layer options Terrain Choose terrain rendering options Grid Array or Overlay Solid Terrain Color Select the solid color filling in the wire grid Terrain Grid Color Select the color of lines overlaid on the color array Boat Type Select the vessel type to appear in the 3D window Memory Usage Choose between Minimum and Maximum Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network DataShating Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Option Setting General Travel Speed Fastest Speed Animate Route Speed Moderate Sky Twilight Water Style Disabled Water Transparency 75 Terrain Colored Array Solid
157. ces better long range target detection and a shorter pulse length is for better target range discrimination The pulse length is shown in the upper right corner of the InSight Radar window pane The pulse lengths are pre set for each range so you are not typically required to change this setting However if you are not satisfied with the current pulse length setting it is possible to toggle between the pulse lengths with this ToolBar button Pulse length and Rotation Speed Orientation and Frequency Radar Orientation rotation 4kW and Higher H TIP Radar orientation and rotation settings require your computer to be receiving Heading Sensor data from your Heading Sensor You can rotate the InSight Radar window pane by using the Radar drop down menu or the right click In both cases click on the option Radar Orientation and then on one of its sub menu options The current orientation is displayed in the upper right corner Orientation options are Head Up Rotates the radar image such that the line connecting the center of the radar image to the top of the display is the vessel s current heading The radar is painted relative to your ship s heading North Up Rotates the radar image so that North is always directly at the top of the radar display In this case the line connecting the center of the radar image to the top of the display is the North indicator Course Up This option rotates the radar image to the current Cours
158. changes the 3D window to Explore Mode The Status Bar The Status Bar provides elevation and depth information the quality of the 3D data high res vs low res and amount of exaggeration of the terrain and vessel Font size of the Status Bar can be changed for easier onscreen viewing 3D Color Legend A legend of depth color can be displayed on the 3D window pane This legend shows the range of color changes as established by the user Data Resolution Refers to the resolution of the installed 3D data Low resolution planning data has a resolution of 3 280 feet 1 Km between data points High resolution data has a resolution of 98 feet 30 m between data points and can be obtained by purchasing Passport Deluxe regions not available in all regions Screen Resolution 3D Navigator allows you to zoom in or out just as you would on a 2D chart When you zoom out the visible range becomes larger and the 3D grid Screen Resolution becomes more coarse Screen Resolution is displayed in brackets on the Status Bar represented as a percentage and measurement in feet Predicted Depth At Boat This value indicates the depth beneath the keel at vessels present location Default value for keel depth is 0 feet Set keel depth in the Boat Properties box on the Stats Tab Depths reported by the 3D Navigator are estimated and less accurate than a properly tuned depth sounder With Sounder connected this value is shown red when it is less than th
159. chart selection zoom level and position on the chart Created with the Set Bookmark command it may be returned to at any time with the Goto Bookmark command Boundary A line created by the user This software can be configured so that when the vessel or its predictor line crosses a boundary an alarm will be triggered Bow The front of a ship Broadcast Notice to Mariner BNM See Local Notice to Mariners LNM Cartesian Coordinates Also known as Rectangular Coordinates A two dimensional plane contains an x axis and a y axis Negative x coordinates lay to the left of the y axis and positive x coordinates to the right Negative y coordinates lay below the x axis and positive above the x axis Nobeltec Navigation Software treatment of the x axis does not always conform to Cartesian coordinates Glossary amp Index 189 Chart Nautical term for maps used in nautical navigation that show the depth of waters as well as land boundaries and other obstructions Charts may be paper or electronic and electronic charts may be of raster or vector type Chart Permit Unlock Code Chart Permits unlock a Chart region Unlock Codes unlock supplemental features Each permit code is made up of 20 digits laid out in the following convention 12345 12345 12345 12345 Closest Point of Approach CPA Predicted closest point a maneuvering boat will get relative to any target moving or otherwise located at a point on the relative movement li
160. ck a single point in an object or group of linked objects 1 With the object that you want to lock on the screen right click on the object and select Properties from the pop up menu 2 From the dialog box that appears place a check mark in the box which says Lock Chapter 7 Advanced Routes 41 7 A d d R t To set up Automatic Waypoint Activation Va n ce O u es 1 Select Tools Options from the main menu A 2 Goto the Misc Tab Routes and Waypoints 3 Click Automatically Activate the Next Waypoint Upon Arrival 4 Click the Set Default Waypoint Arrival Distance button to set the Activating a Route waypoint arrival alarm radius and alarm type This tool provides You can have an unlimited number of routes but only one Active Route at notification when your vessel comes within a specified distance from a given time An active route displays as bright green by default and has a the next active waypoint special priority in the navigation system When a route is activated the first waypoint also becomes active and blinks on the screen TIP To set the arrival alarm distance for the current waypoint select When your boat comes within a preset distance called the Arrival Radius AIVAR CCIE Hedi TOMEI Way Pell ENEE EN from the active waypoint the next waypoint will activate You can also view Setting a Waypoint Arrival Alarm onscreen information about the vessel s approach to the active waypoint and forward that information to an
161. clude all possible Navinfo data such as COG SOG wind angles depth etc 3 Ifa data type has not been assigned to a Navinfo Subpanel the panel appears with the selected background colors only 4 Click OK when you have finished customizing the subpanel NavView Admiral Only Exclusive to Admiral NavView offers many of the same features found in Nobeltec PlanView Nobeltec s standard user interface without relying on Windows style screens ToolBars etc While NavView only works in full screen mode you can display multiple windows in that mode To enter NavView press the NavView ToolBar button the lt F9 gt Hot Key or click Window Enter NavView See Chapter 18 NavView for a full description of NavView functionality Primary Screen Elements NavView Menu NavView menu items are similar to those of PlanView The main menu structure is described here see Figure 4 16 for button location oN l S a A a z WA WA D T a Aw A ia I gt 28 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide e Center on Boat Click this button to center perspective on vessel e Instant Waypoint Click on this button and then on the screen to create a waypoint instantly e Objects Click on this button then on the sub menu option and then onscreen to create one of these objects Sub menu options are Route Mark Event Mark Range Bearing Line RBL Line Boundary Circle Boundary Annotation e View Sub m
162. configurations for a wide variety of boats by contacting US Sailing directly at 1 800 US SAIL 1 Terminology The following are some key terms to help you understand Sailing Plus Pack Definition The collection of polar data that is currently selected for the boat Lay Line An imaginary line indicating the optimal course to a windward or leeward mark on which a sailboat can sail directly to its target Active Polar Polars Polar lines comprise a graph of your target boat speed based on the True Wind Speed TWS and True Wind Angle TWA Polars are valuable inputs to tactical sailing calculations such as lay lines Polar Diagram The Polar Diagram represents the boat s predicted or actual performance or progress into the wind also known as VMG given various angles of the wind in relation to the bow For a given angle this is the speed at which you should be gaining ground BSP Target Boat Speed Table 24 1 Terminology Chapter 24 Sailing 177 Unlocking Sailing Plus Pack Once you purchase Nobeltec Sailing Plus Pack your Jeppesen Marine product distributor will provide you with an Unlock Code This Unlock Code is used to unlock the Sailing Plus Pack features already embedded in Nobeltec Navigation Software To use your Unlock Code to unlock Sailing Plus Pack follow the instructions on Page 6 Installing New Chart Permits and Unlock Codes The Polar Display Once the Sailing Plus Pack is unlocked yo
163. d from other vessels on your charts and save MMSI numbers for future recall You can also associate a name with the MMSI number for easy on chart identification DSC radio received distress calls are automatically plotted on your charts You will see a pop up message in the Nobeltec Navigation Software when you receive a distress call over your DSC equipped marine radio The DSC radio and your Nobeltec Navigation Software both require incoming GPS data in order to function Additionally Nobeltec Navigation Software needs to hear DSC sentences coming from the DSC radio Occasionally this may present challenges for installation as most GPS units and DSC radios have a limited number of NMEA input output connection wires exposed Nobeltec recommends the use of a SeaLevel Serial to USB adapter to connect the GPS the PC and the DSC radio NOTE It is highly recommended that a trained NMEA installer perform installation of these devices to avoid wiring problems Once the DSC radio is installed and sending NMEA data Nobeltec Navigation Software will detect the DSC radio and prompt for setup Tender Tracking A new feature of Nobeltec Navigation Software sold as an upgrade to Nobeltec Admiral is the ability to track small affiliate objects called Tenders such as jet skis wave runners or even individual passengers using the Seetrac Tender Tracking interface Tenders can be tracked using your onscreen target tracking capabilities and can g
164. d to calculate actual bottom depth and for monitoring the shallow water alarm Temperature amp Speed Calibration Temperature and speed values may need calibration If you believe that the temperature or speed reported is incorrect these controls adjust the end values 50 kHz and 200 kHz Gain Calibration These controls adjust the gain applied to each frequency Colors From Tools Options Sounder tab you can access the Sounder Colors dialog box Chapter 22 Sounder 169 Sounder NMEA Data NMEA Data Input If you have external non Nobeltec speed and or temperature sensors and they produce NMEA 0183 data sentences the data they produce is usually compatible with Nobeltec Navigation Software just as data received from non Nobeltec GPS or other NMEA sensors Incoming data can be displayed on the Console and Sounder Display NMEA Data Output To output NMEA 0183 data for speed depth or water temperature to another device you can configure an Output Autopilot port to send this data 1 Select Tools Options Ports Configure 2 Select the Output Autopilot port you would like to enable by placing a check mark in the check box 3 Click Configure All Output Autopilot Ports 4 On the Configure Output Autopilot Settings dialog box select the NMEA strings you would like to transmit Recommended sentences are VHW Water Speed and Heading DPT Depth DBT Depth Below Transducer and MTW Water Temperature Click O
165. djust Radar Image NOTE Changes made to radar settings through an IR2 BB may not accurately display changes when shown in the small view If this is the case you may need to adjust the image based only on the full size radar display MBA TIP It is possible you will need to cycle the power to your radar for the Radar Viewer image to appear Radar Contrl i D Range m Trails 3 8 nm v Eoninuous Gain 1675 a j Seal A 14 j x es Rain 22 Foot Tx Trig 34 1 Rotate 1 H l Expand Figure 2 6 Radar Control Window Once you are satisfied with how the radar image appears click Next Radar Setup Wizard has now completed At this point you may configure another Radar or click Finish to exit the radar setup wizard 3 Hardware Setup Overview There are three steps required to connect a GPS Autopilot or other peripheral marine electronic device to your computer 1 Insure your computer has an available serial port or that a SeaLevel USB Serial Port Adapter is being used and connect the device to your computer 2 Make the physical electrical connection to the device using a 9 pin connector 3 Run the GPS Port Setup Wizard to instruct Nobeltec Navigation Software to recognize output sentences transmitted by the device When you run the GPS Port Setup Wizard much of the setup is performed automatically The Wizard is designed to intuitively recognize your hardware device
166. e Show Ghost Cursor Yes shows cursor location on inactive view Degree Values on Radar Rings Show the degree values on your radar ring display Vessel Centric Bearings Choose from Relative Clock Dial Relative Degrees or Absolute Degrees Determines how bearing is shown Radar Text Banner Choose from None Full or Boxed Banner text in chart overlay Radar Resolution Set resolution of the radar Image Clipping Select a circle or square to display radar output square setting provides somewhat broader radar scope Always Open Radar Display Yes to open Radar View on startup No to disable Full Screen NavView Radar Console None Left or Right Side Select where to display Radar settings in NavView Full Screen Mode Open Radar ToolBars with Radar Display Yes for automatic launch of Radar ToolBars No to disable Range Ring Color Select a Range Ring Color VRM EBL Color Select a VRM Variable Range Marker EBL Electronic Bearing Line Color Guard Zone Color Select a Guard Zone Color Radar Text Color Select a Text Color Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Radar Selection Radar Coloring Choose radar to edit settings for Playback Radar Strong Opacity Background Weak Single m V Gradient Moe Chart Radar Less
167. e If you cannot find the answer you are looking for please contact Jeppesen Marine Customer Support i NOTE Technical Support is free of charge for registered users For enhanced Technical Support contact any one of our sales or technical support representatives about becoming a Jeppesen Marine VIP Member North America only or send an email to sales nobeltec com Registering Your Software You must REGISTER YOUR PRODUCT in order to receive free product support Visit the Nobeltec website contact Jeppesen Marine Customer Support or contact your Nobeltec distributor to register your software Registering your software also allows Jeppesen Marine to send you notices of product upgrades and news of interest to Nobeltec product owners iv Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Table of Contents 1 Introduction Nobeltec Navigation Software How Navigation Systems Work Passport World Charts Passport Deluxe North America Hawaii Only Using a GPS Receiver The Limits of GPS Based Electronic Navigation Navigation Software Plus Packs Bathy Recorder Fleet Manager Sailing Plus Pack Tender Tracker Plus Pack Admiral only XM Plus Pack 2 Installation Step 1 Installing Nobeltec Software Install Nobeltec Navigation Software Installation Tips Your Serial Dongle Number The Dongle The Site Key North America no Dongle only To Get a Site Key The Software License Agreement Step 2 Installing Charts Passport World
168. e is No Polar selected The active polar filename is stored across sessions Polar Name Type the name you want to associate with this polar Load Polar File Click this button to browse to the folder where the polar file you want to load is located In the folder named InstallLocation Polars you will see stock polar files for common boats The file type function searches for the Nobeltec polar extension spp but you can also select All Files which allows you to open polar files from many sailing programs When you select a file type designed for another sailing program Nobeltec attempts to read the file If the file cannot be read a message appears stating this Save Polar Click to save any changes that have been made Save Polar As Click to save the changes to a new polar file name A Save As dialog opens with the Polars folder as the default folder You can however browse to any other location Save VMG Targets Click this button to save the best upwind and downwind angles to a tab delimited text file You can import this file into Excel or another program or print it to use as a reference on deck No A I wna 9 o S OQ 180 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide e Edit Polar Data You can select any wind speed that is stored in the polar file By default the lowest wind speed in the Polar File appears Use the Add Wind and Delete Wind buttons to manage your polar data There is no lim
169. e 22 18 Transducer cone angle The Status LED on power to the black box with a voltmeter Also verify the black box is off that the data cable between the computer and the black box is properly wired and connected The Status LED on The Nobeltec InSight Sounder and the Nobeltec Strength of Electrical Pulse The transducer is triggered to send out sound waves by the InSight Sounder ap cas Black box The strength of electrical pulse sent to the transducer by the black the black box is Navigation Software are not communicating box is dependent on the electrical rating in wattage of the transducer as flashing green properly Check the wiring of the data cable well as the material used in creating the element inside of the transducer The 1kW transducers carried by Jeppesen Marine are 50x more sensitive at 50kHz the black box is red Please contact Technical Support and 13 times more sensitive at 200kHz than 600W models The Nobeltec InSight Sounder is communicating with your Nobeltec Navigation Software You The Status LED on should now switch to an automode such as the black box is Fishing or Cruising If limited echoes are displayed steady green operating in Manual mode may result in clear echoes not appearing until the Gain has been properly adjusted Table 22 2 No Sounder Image S A l N N 172 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Cannot Click On the Configure InSight Sounder Option in the GPS
170. e 6 1 Chapter 6 Basic Skills 35 A U13253 1 20 000 2 290 OVERZOO BEE Figure 6 1 Overzoom Feature ro Mngr anning Use the arrow keys on the keyboard With the cursor at the edge of the chart you should see a black arrow next to your cursor Click and hold the left mouse button and move the black cursor towards the center of the screen to slow scroll speed Use the lt Page Up gt lt Page Down gt lt End gt and lt Home gt Hot Keys to scroll the chart up down left and right respectively MWh No Hand Panning The Hand Panning Tool allows you to easily move the chart across the Chart window pane When enabled the cursor will change into a Hand icon and you will be able to drag and drop the chart easily You can also turn on Hand Panning using the lt B gt Hot Key Press the Hand Panning ToolBar button again lt B gt or lt Esc gt to turn off Hand Panning Autoscroll Modes Keep the vessel in the chart windows while underway These options are available from the right click pop up menu or the View Autoscroll menu Look Ahead Keeps the vessel image at the edge of the chart window opposite the side from where you are travelling Follow the Predictor Keeps predictor centered in the chart window Follow the Boat Keeps boat centered in the chart window S Il S a A VA z a A lt vA aS A ia I Koe 36 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Chart Orientation
171. e Bathy Recorder to customize your sea floor charts those charts will constantly improve with repeat trips over the same areas enabling you to have a perfect picture of important sea floor terrain as well as your favorite fishing and diving spots The data provided by your Bathy Recorder can be more specifically oriented to your needs than any chart you can purchase And with Jeppesen Marine s exclusive high quality 3D rendering the Nobeltec Bathy Recorder will give you an unparalleled 360 awareness of your environment Bathy Recorder can give you specific contour lines that standard 3D charts available don t display as well as complete control of the contour line display Create your own custom contours to see the areas of sea floor topography that are important to you See Chapter 23 Bathy Recorder for detailed information about the Bathy Recorder Plus Pack 13 Wind and Weather Nobeltec provides you with a number of options to display wind and weather data directly on top of your charts to aid in navigation decisions Wind Provided that you have a wind sensor attached you can use available wind data in your calculations With Sailing Plus Pack you can also display Wind data overlaid on your charts e Apparent Wind This is the way that the wind impacts your ability to navigate factoring in speed direction currents etc e True Theoretical Wind Actual wind data without accounting for bearing speed etc Both Appa
172. e Level Approximate Range Level Sie Table 21 1 Range Scales in Nautical Miles AN te When the InSight Radar window pane is the active window you can 1 nm also adjust radar range by clicking the Zoom buttons or the keys as BAY lt gt Auto Range This feature automatically adjusts the radar range to match the Chart window pane This keeps the overlaid radar image Auto Range Radar Range Up Down mini x SS Aa S S S ce l T N consistently scaled and sized with the chart When enabled a change in radar range or chart zoom level adjusts the corresponding range or zoom in the other window pane accordingly Table 21 2 Range Levels Radar Range ToolBars Gain There are two additional Range ToolBars designed to give you greater flexibility and control a _ a Use the Gain Up and Gain Down controls to adjust the Auto Range Range Down Range Up sensitivity of the radar A higher gain value makes the radar more sensitive to radar returns allowing it to display weaker targets However if the gain is set too high the image jp T lt gt ja a a t might get overly cluttered with background noise and even strong returns RANGE RANGE MARINA HARBOR BAY HORIZON RANGE could be hidden or masked Conversely a lower gain could cause weak echoes to be missed Rodar Range Toosar S O O Range Levels Marina Harbor Bay amp Horizon Auto Gain 4kW and Higher lt gt Based on the Radar
173. e Over Ground COG As your course changes so does the radar display COG is necessarily different than Heading in that your boat can be pitching and rolling creating sudden heading changes while COG remains consistent Heading is typically delivered via a heading sensor while COG is a function of your GPS and track history Leg Up This option rotates the radar image to the intended course between your Start point or last waypoint and the next waypoint in your route Leg Up is useful when your ship is yawing excessively and the radar image is changing too much This option only works when you have a activated route in a chart window i NOTE When using the 2kW Dome the only Radar Orientation available is Chapter 21 Radar Usage 147 Head Up If the radar image is overlaid on an electronic chart you can select any of the orientation modes listed above Off Centering the Radar Shifting 4kW and Higher Your ship s position onscreen can be off centered to provide greater radar range You can control the positioning of the radar image inside the radar display in one of three ways Click and Drag With your mouse click and drag on the vessel icon to re center the image wherever desired AutoScroll Look Ahead Clicking on this button does two things First it orients the radar image to Heads Up and then centers the radar image at the bottom of the radar display This gives you the maximum view ahead Center on Boat This button
174. e Target 1 Open the NavBar or InfoBar Targets tab 2 Locate the active Target you are searching for from the Targets drop down menu 3 Click Find to center that Target onscreen NOTE In PlanView you can place a check mark in the Lock check box to keep your chart centered on the selected Target Information Listed on the NavBar and InfoBar e CPA Closest Point of Approach Predicted closest distance between your boat and the tracked target based on both vessel s SOG and COG e TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach Time remaining until CPA e RNG Range The distance between your vessel and the target e BRG Bearing The bearing to the target vessel e COG Course Over Ground The tracked target s Course Over Ground SOG Speed Over Ground The tracked target s Speed Over Ground e LAT Latitude The Latitude of the target vessel e LON Longitude The Longitude of the target vessel N O l 5 Ka fae i S O D S bs end is 8 Il S N Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide AIS Target Filtering wy You can filter AIS targets for type distance etc When filtering is enabled an onchart Warning Indicator lets you know that some or all AIS targets are currently hidden Click AIS Filtering from the Targets NavBar NavView Target InfoBar or Tools Options Targets to open the AIS Filtering window which contains the following options Display AIS Targets
175. e appears on the right hand side of the screen and lists the time height for tides and speed direction for currents values in fifteen minute intervals for the station you have selected These features are not on the graph by default but can be activated by right clicking anywhere on the graph and selecting them from the pop up menu They can be permanently added by using the Tide amp Currents Options menu Chapter 11 Tides amp Currents 79 Changing the Date Once the graph is open you can change the prediction date by clicking on the PrevMnth PrevDay NextDay or NextMnth buttons on the ToolBar To set a specific date click on the SetDate button NOTE To return to the current day click SetDate and then click OK The Tides amp Currents ToolBar Tides and Currents has many advanced features that can be accessed through the ToolBar Those features are explained and briefly described below e Tide Allows you to search for and open tide stations in addition to any open windows e Current Allows you to search for and open current stations in addition to any open windows e Groups Provides the ability to create customized folder s of tide or current stations e Print Opens the Print Options box with all print options available Quick Prn Prints the current tide or tide station information e Config Opens the Tides and Currents Options box allowing you to customize the program e Help Opens the Nobeltec Hel
176. e displayed as a hatched out field onscreen Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Navigation Software 101 Context Help Tool Used to access help for a visual element of the screen When this button is clicked the mouse pointer turns into a combination question mark and pointer This feature is currently disabled A Course Up Tool This tool enables or disables Course Up mode for the active chart window Course Up rotates the chart image so that as your boat turns from one heading to another the chart is always displayed with your heading and with the boat icon pointing up The use of this feature along with Range Circles allows you to create a display which is similar to the display of your radar KA CrystalView Tool This button is used to enable the CrystalView feature hich clarifies raster charts so that they are easier to read when zoomed out Current Arrows Tool This button makes Current Arrows visible on the chart Current Arrows make it easy to see the direction and speed of the currents The bigger the arrow the faster the current is moving Decrease 3D Boat Scale Tool Makes the 3D vessel icon smaller D hg Depth Contours Display Tool Toggles on or off the Passport Depth Contours layer Event Mark Tool Creates Event Marks An Event Mark is a mark placed at the location of the boat when you click this button The default name is the date and time of creation Ghost Cursor Tool When multiple chart
177. e divider back and forth to increase or decrease the number of tracks in that range e Drag the divider off screen to remove it e Each color bar segment between dividers can be colored differently e To change the color of a segment right click on that segment and select a customized color from the provided swatch Select a color by clicking on it and then click OK Track Point Management Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only You should never exceed 10 000 saved track points as files in excess of this size can slow system performance At startup if you have 5 000 or more track points you will receive a warning message alerting you to potential system slowness Track Line Legend Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only The Track Line Legend is an on screen legend of existing track line colors shown in the upper right hand corner of the Chart window pane This feature can be toggled on or off using Tools Track Line Legend Track Course Over Ground O 7T f 16T 36 T 54T 0T 90 T 101 T i i 158 T i58 270 T Figure 6 5 Track Legend Boundaries Boundaries mark an area that you want to avoid An alarm will sound when the boat or its predictor line passes over them Types of boundaries are Circle Boundaries Closed Boundaries and Line Boundaries Circle Boundary Isolate and encircle a hazard or other area to avoid on the chart These can be placed to completely surround any hazard Boundary Circles can be used
178. e enlarged newest Sounder returns These magnified returns are also drawn in proportional The first time the InSight Sounder is used it will automatically enter Live scale where strongest returns are also the widest Mode and start searching for depth information Sounder settings are saved from usage to usage so you may need to switch into Live Mode if you have The Sounder Display also contains a number of text items including Depth moved your boat since last usage Temperature Speed Frequency and automatic indicators Most of these can As Sounder data is retrieved the Sounder Display will be populated be hidden to accommodate more Sounder information onscreen Sounder Display can be controlled in three ways using the Sounder ToolBars the Sounder Menu and using the Right click menu S A l N N 162 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Sounder ToolBars The Sounder ToolBars allow you to use most of the features and configure your Sounder easily Decrease Range Sounder Display Shift Down Auto Range Operation Mode Increase Range Shift Up Frequency Less Gain Signal Level Sounder Toning x More Gain 2 CLUTTER SIGNAL NOISE Clutter Noise The Right Click Menu When you right click your mouse in the Sounder window a right click pop up menu appears onscreen and from this menu you can easily access Sounder Options change your split screen settings etc Drop Mar
179. e grouped in folders containing similar items Wis Routes IQA Tracks D9 Other Data l o CGS Curent Stations Click the check box to select which items display OA Geo Locations To change settings for an entire folder click the LG Marine on gt check box in front of the folder name 4 b These commands change the settings for all objects in the folder Folders Nav Objects z Save new objects in Search jo Default Database X cd Create Show All Hide All Done Help Use the Folders section to manage object data storage oN l S a A z WA Figure 4 6 Chart Table and Objects Tab WA D S a Aw A lt a i 20 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Install Use the Install Tab to install Nobeltec Passport charts supplemental data Plus Packs and other supplemental features as well as 3rd party charts compatible with Nobeltec Navigation Software see Chapter 2 Installation for more information Uninstall You may use the chart table to uninstall charts supplemental data and plus packs if you need to free up disc space on your computer Permit codes for Passport World Charts are retained to reinstall the regions if when necessary Chart Quilting Quilting is the seamless connection of one chart to another unnoticeable onscreen e g the charts are quilted together Nobeltec defaults to quilting charts of the same resolution and quality whenever
180. e longer than light in terms of wavelength the radar horizon is farther away than the optical horizon by about 6 and from the physical horizon by about 15 The radar horizon changes according to your radar transceiver height and target height Radar Horizon and Natural Anomalies As temperature and humidity change in the air the refractive index of radar radio waves change consequently causing the detectable range of the radar to vary This gives us a variation of detectable range due to a change in ambient conditions Sub refraction N Cold Air Warm Air Radar Antenna ki Radar horizon is shortened Figure 21 28 Sub Refraction When cold air flows over the warm surface the radar waves are curved upwards This phenomenon is called sub refraction As a result the detectable range of the radar is reduced This occurs in polar regions or in warm currents where cold air from the polar regions flow into the sea Super refraction Warm Aif Cole Air Radar Antenna i Radar horizon is lengthened Figure 21 29 Super Refraction When the air being warmed up inland flows in the cold sea radio waves are curved downward This is called super refraction In this case the range of the radar increases This phenomenon is produced in the warm coastal regions and becomes noticeable as the temperature difference becomes larger Chapter 21 Radar Usage 157 Ducting pe E Cold Air Warm Ai
181. e of your Nobeltec program to effectively completea Waypoint at a later time repeat the step above but select Locking Unlock three day trip from Miami to the Bahamas and then back to Miami through Route and Marks Fort Lauderdale You can use this section to practice using your program or just read through it to gain a general understanding of trip planning using Nobeltec Navigation Software Check the Weather Make sure there are no weather conditions that will negatively affect the trip for a 10 day window Start Nobeltec and purchase a single gold level ten day forecast You could also select to order a subscription and have the weather data sent to you each day When you have finished downloading the file review the weather data It is wise to also check other sources of weather information such as NOAA ives te is W 208 5M MolB R 20s 282ft 23M Figure 17 2 Route Line for Sample Trip Calculate Your ETA After you have planned the route the ETA calculator will automatically open Unless you have disabled the automatic ETA calculator for each Route Use the ETA Calculator to automatically attach the current stations Next enter the fuel burn rates into the Estimate Fuel Usage window Since this particular route will be used over several days at this time use the ETA calculator to estimate fuel burn only Click Best Departure Time and enter a vessel speed For the purposes of this example enter a speed of 12 0 Kts The ETA
182. e reflection Shadow and dead angle False Echoes Caused by Side Lobes Radar Horizon Radar Horizon and Natural Anomalies Sub refraction Super refraction Ducting Minimum Detectable Range Height of Transceiver Transmission Pulse Width Range Resolution Bearing Resolution Radar Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Direct Connections Test the Connection without the Radar Wizard Troubleshooting Network Connections Test the Connection without the Radar Wizard 146 147 147 148 148 148 149 149 149 151 151 151 152 152 153 153 153 154 155 155 155 156 156 156 156 156 156 157 157 157 157 157 157 158 158 158 158 158 158 159 159 Table of Contents Frequently Asked Questions 22 Sounder Usage Starting the InSight Sounder Understanding the Sounder Display Sounder ToolBars The Right Click Menu The Sounder Menu Operation Modes Adjusting the Sounder Image Gain Clutter Signal Level Noise Colors Additional Color Options Key Sounder Features Changing Frequencies Adjusting the Range Auto Range Adjusting the Shift Split Views Bottom Zoom Custom Zoom Bottom Lock Sea Floor Discrimination Dual Frequency Shallow Water Alarm Advanced Sounder Features Temperature and Temperature Graph Speed Through Water Display Dropping A Mark or an Event Mark Instant Waypoint Ghost Cursor Night and Twilight Mode Demo Mode Record and Playback Configuring the InSight Sounder Configuration Options Sound
183. e specified Alarm setting Track Line With Tracking on 3D Navigator will represent the active track line in 3D form Predictor Line Displays where the boat will be at a future time When the Predictor Line is displayed on the 2D chart it also appears in the 3D Navigator window 3D Vessel The 3D boat icon is a central part of the 3D Navigator window All of the visible objects and tools in the 3D window are associated with it You can change the boat style from Tools Options 3D Bathy Keel Marker The Keel Marker helps to display the vessel s location on the 3D surface The vessel icon can change size but the Keel Marker provides a true representation of the bottom of the vessel and a visual cue as to the bottom depth The top of the Keel Marker is the actual keel depth The bottom of the marker is the alarm zone area Keel Marker settings can be adjusted from Tools Options 3D Bathy Depth Indicator A line from the vessel to the ocean floor providing a visual identification for depth It can be turned on using the Depth Marker button on the 3D ToolBar Changing the 3D Landscape Terrain Sky and Water To change how the 3D chart appears right click in the 3D window and select Appearance Terrain Sky Water Use the available settings to change the appearance of the 3D window pane AN we Nobeltec Navigation Software can overlay Passport charts or aerial imagery over terrain in the 3D window creating a valuable and
184. e transducer converts returning sound waves into electrical pulses that can be converted into a visual image of that column beneath your boat The Nobeltec InSight Sounder converts the electrical pulse returned by the transducer into digital data that can be displayed on your computer screen which provides you with a running display of the water objects and sea floor beneath your boat The strength of that reflected sound wave is also visible Stronger returns which may represent large fish or hard surfaces can be represented in one set of colors while weak returns from debris small schools of fish and soft sea floor can be represented with other colors Frequency of Sound Waves The frequency of the sound waves created by the transducer impacts the type of reflected returns Higher frequency sound waves such as 200 kHz do not penetrate the water deeply but they return greater detail from the items they contact For this reason the InSight Sounder in 200 kHz frequency is great for fish detection However transducers are rarely able to penetrate deeper than 600 feet in 200 kHz mode Lower frequency sound waves behave in the opposite way They offer much deeper depth penetration but provide less detail from objects they contact All transducers offered by Jeppesen Marine are dual frequency 50 kHz 200 kHz The Information On Your Screen Figure 22 17 displays a sample image from a sounder fishfinder that calls out the most notable
185. e using the Route Wizard 1 Click Tools Route Wizard or use the Route Wizard ToolBar button 2 When the Route Wizard is displayed click Next Miimii ltt ERGEL n yaa ER Fret ian SA a E Place your cursor here to learn more about the parameter settings Enter a waypoint prefix here Click here to restore the default settings Figure 7 1 Route Wizard Parameters 3 Set the Route Parameters For information on each Parameter roll your mouse over the Information Icon Figure 7 1 Click Next 4 Seta location for the starting waypoint in one of three ways a Click on the chart at the starting location b Enter a latitude amp longitude c Click the drop down menu and select a waypoint from the list After selecting the starting waypoint click Next Set the location for the ending waypoint see Step 4 When finished click Next 7 The Route Wizard will now attempt to find a pathway from the starting to ending waypoints If it cannot find a pathway the Route Wizard will prompt you to retry 8 When a pathway has been established the Route Wizard will then 9 optimize the Route This may take several minutes When the Route wizard is finished you will see a list of the waypoints You must review the route and click OK to finish 8 Properties amp Options Properties Menus allow you to edit settings for nearly all of the objects in the software Most Properties Menus operate similarly and are divided b
186. eate and save a number of different types of User Interfaces Ul for different tasks For example you may want to create one UI that you use when fishing and another for a long voyage Whenever you save a User Interface that you have created all of the buttons and console panels will be saved If anything changes on the UI you can revert to the saved User Interface by using the Load UI command To Save a User Interface that you have created 1 Add or delete any ToolBars that you want to use or remove from the program ToolBar and Console 2 When the ToolBar and Console are set up to your preference select File User Interface Save User Interface from the Main Menu 3 A Save As browser window will open Browse to the location you wish to store your UI Files are saved with extension vui 4 Name your UI and click OK 5 Repeat Steps 1 5 for any Ul layouts you want to save To Load a User Interface that you have previously saved 1 Select File User Interface Load User Interface from the Main Menu 2 An Open browser window will open Browse to the location you stored the saved UI file vui select the correct file and click Open 3 Nobeltec Navigation Software will change in appearance to conform to the saved UI layout Any changes you make to that layout will not save unless you again Save the UI e SN l N S N S 108 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide gt a S I
187. eated whenever Nobeltec Navigation Software is started Default is Yes Histogram Speed Speed at which the sounder returns are scrolled across the screen Default value is 1 1 Display A Scope Default is Yes Display Depth Scale Indicates whether or not depth numbers appear down the right side of the Sounder Display Default is Yes Display Bottom Line Default is Yes Display Depth Text Default is Medium Display Boat Speed Text When enabled the speed of the vessel is displayed in the bottom left corner of the Sounder Display Default is Medium Display Temperature Text Default is Medium Display Temperature Graph When enabled a moving indication of water temperature appears on the Sounder Display Default is No Display Tuning Indicators When enabled Auto Gain Auto Clutter and Auto Range indicators are drawn on the bottom of the screen Default is yes Show Ghost Cursor When the mouse cursor is moved over a Sounder window the location of Sounder returns are indicated by crosshairs in any chart windows that are visible Default is Yes Open Close Sounder ToolBars with Sounder Window When enabled Sounder ToolBars open close when the Sounder Display is opened closed Default is No Display Shallow Water Alarm Indicator Default is Yes Transducer Offset This field indicates the vertical distance from the surface of the water to the transducer s installed location which is then use
188. ec radar on your vessel and three computers at different locations all ona network All three computers would be able to display the radar information on their screen Security Dongle When you purchase Admiral 8 0 or later versions you will be provided with a hardware security Dongle There are two ways to secure your software with a Dongle or without When Admiral is installed with a Dongle all features are available When installed without a Dongle the program can be used for planning monitoring but all COM ports and advanced networking features are limited When used without a Dongle the program can receive NMEA e ke l S m Xa gt gt 1 le m 122 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide input from the network but cannot send data to an autopilot or other NMEA device This type of installation provides the power of networking without an increase in cost NOTE Only one copy of Admiral without a Dongle is permitted to listen to shared NMEA data on the network Installing Admiral Without A Dongle To install Nobeltec Admiral without a Dongle install the program When prompted input the serial number provided to you or printed on the Dongle tag to generate a SiteKey which secures the installation see Page 3 Configurations of GlassBridge Networking The section below is devoted to two typical networking examples Example 1 Example 1 is a typical installation that includ
189. ect the Remove from Route s command from the pop up menu The mark will be removed from all routes which passed through it Numbered waypoints will be renumbered accordingly AN ie If removing a mark leaves a route with only one waypoint the route will be deleted and the remaining waypoint will also be deleted unless its properties are set to Permanent Deleting Routes and Waypoints You can delete individual waypoints and entire routes To prevent accidental data loss you will be asked to confirm each deletion This feature can be disabled on the Misc Tab from Tools Options Nobeltec Navigation Software does not have an Undo command Deletions are immediate and permanent To delete a route 1 Select the route by clicking on any segment of the route between two waypoints A route is selected when a gray box surrounds it 2 Right click on the route and choose the Delete command from the pop up menu or click lt Delete gt To delete a waypoint 1 Right click on the waypoint and choose the Delete command from the pop up menu or click lt Delete gt Make sure to select only the waypoint NOT the entire route Adding New Waypoints to a Route There are two methods for adding new waypoints to existing routes 1 Appending to a route will add waypoints to the beginning or end 2 Inserting will add waypoints to the middle of a route To add new waypoints access the Route menu by right clicking on a Route make sure to cl
190. ed b Click on each object you wish to export and click Add to Export List Files are added to the export file once you click OK 6 To export all objects within a folder click on each object type and then click Add to Export List i NOTE If you click on Add All to Export List all objects in every folder will be exported 7 Click OK when finished Data you exported is then saved to the csv or txt file you specified in Step 4 Le l V a i Co Q Q N 74 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide S Qa I ox 10 Printing Print Wizard Nobeltec Navigation Software uses a Print Wizard to help you produce several different types of printouts You can print sections of nautical charts to use as a visual reference or as part of a float plan There are several options for printing charts They are e Single Chart This printing option provides you with an options menu as seen in Figure 10 1 before printing Using the options menu you can select the layers you would like to have printed with the chart e Small Scale to Large Scale One Chart Per Page This prints several chart images that zoom in on the center of the chart window e Small Scale to Large Scale Two Charts Per Page Same as above except that there are two chart images per page NOTE For both Small Scale to Large Scale options you may specify a scale range to start with and how many charts above that scale to print e Char
191. ed in the chart window e al rea UST SES WEST CAAT a ARA E T een A Faa dkar re ULF 12a dbn in Bie pi iee foot Backer me yee Te NAL OBO GE TEIE ape eh eE a Icons ra Figure 11 1 Tide amp Current Icons of the Chart Chapter 11 Tides amp Currents 77 Interpreting Tide Bars The tide bar icons on the chart display a quick indication of tide height based on the present system time on your PC The blue section of the bar indicates tide height The more blue that is visible the higher the tide height will be If you have the Display Screen Tips on Charts option turned on you can place the cursor on any station to see the name of the station and its associated value height The Display Screen Tips on Charts option is on by default when the program is installed but if you have turned it off it can be turned on through the Options menu under the Misc Tab WARNING Tide amp Current stations are shown in the exact location NOAA s data specifies Lat Lon coordinates of the stations rounded to the nearest minute As a result some stations may appear on land Displaying Current Arrows Displaying current arrows functions in the same manner as displaying A tide bars To display current arrows on top of your electronic chart click on the Current Arrows tool on your program ToolBar the lt Shift C gt Hot Key or right click on any chart and select Tides and Currents Current Arrows from the pop up menu
192. ed on the conditions of the oceans and the atmosphere NOAA supplies navigation chart information for the coastal U S and the Great Lakes region Pan To move the view window over the chart Also called Scrolling Panel An individual movable display of specific information Passport World Deluxe Data Kits CDs or DVDs that contain Raster Photo 3 D Bathymetric and additional data Once vector charts are installed use these discs to install additional data A S S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 194 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Photo Chart A raster chart containing photographic chart imagery PlanBook A text based route planning and creation tool included in Nobeltec Navigation Software Polyconic Projection The polyconic projection involves projecting the surface of the Earth onto a series of cones situated with their apexes over the poles Port Port designates the left side of a boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Port side is indicated with a red light Predictor A line displayed in front of the vessel showing where the boat will be after a specified period of time assuming no intervening heading or speed changes Prime Meridian The meridian of longitude which passes through the original site of the Royal Observatory in Greenwich and used as the origin of Longitude Also known as the Greenwich Meridian Processed NMEA Sharing The Nobeltec
193. ed the Product Voucher that came with Passport Deluxe before loading new Chart Permits Whenever you purchase new Chart Permits or Unlock Codes use the following steps to release the related charts data features Open your Nobeltec Navigation Software Click File Chart Table and select the Install Tab From the drop down menu select Permits and Unlock Codes Click the Install button Input the 20 digit Chart Permit or Unlock Code s and then click Finish Close Nobeltec Navigation Software and relaunch Products and Charts that you release using the Install Tab are immediately available upon relaunch of the software Step 3 GPS Port Setup Wizard The first time you launch Nobeltec Navigation Software a dialog box will display asking if you d like to start the GPS Port Setup Wizard a Ee we NY Connect all of the NMEA peripherals to the computer including GPS compass and autopilot These devices use Serial and or USB ports If your computer does not have Serial ports Nobeltec recommends that you use SeaLevel Serial to USB port adapters available from a Nobeltec retailer to connect to the external devices Make sure the GPS is installed powered on and connected to the network or PC before commencing setup Use Windows HyperTerminal to verify that the GPS is sending data to your PC For more information about connecting your GPS and wiring peripheral devices see Chapter 3 GPS Setup Using the GPS Port Setup Wizard A
194. eed CPA and TCPA Radar Settings Gain I Rain Sea Clutter Tune IR rejection Expand Targets Figure 21 19 Full Screen Radar Console NavView ToolBars Radar ToolBars in NavView are similar to the ToolBars in the PlanView However Admiral provides some additional features Each button on the NavView ToolBars function identically to the corresponding PlanView button If you are using the 2kW Dome model please note that the Auto Sea Auto Gain Double Speed and Pulse Length tools are not available and the ToolBar buttons for those tools will be grayed out when you use that specific model No l q S S WS ae 150 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide 20 00 1s lt 3 000 m gt Fet UNITED STATES dae ox Pulse LP Split Screen InSight Radar Window Pane a with Chart Overlay View pp aana in NavView MEt baw Ea Pace I 4 ae T T i Ee eS E ee S gt Aa S S S ce l T N ti ai aw a Ee i A ME Other Marki WA Active Mark NA so solay Ts N A m N A ss NJA re eA Snes i N A E N A N A repaint E aig WoSELre Charts i Other Full Screen InSight Radar in NavView with the Radar Console on the e Other Mark N A Active Mark N A XTEPetmsman Disola Left side i 1G xti Ne Active m Tr N A m N A ome N A Wanat Aradr INOBELTEC aT N A ata N A N A Figure 21 20 Radar Onscreen Rada
195. efault theme and six customizable contour themes The Contour button drop down menu on the ToolBar will also contain custom contour information Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Custom Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Video Theme 1 v Reset to Defaults Rename Type Min L click to add R click to change color Gradual Filled Step Max None ot 2 srt 2 sor 3 i a mY ee See ee ee Ae ae Sea v 0 Ft a SFt 150 Ft Al Ei I E T E u m b l 4 eb s haso Sea v 300Ft 50 00r vey boo 1 1 lego ledo 1boobo Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 16 Tools Options Custom Contours Tab Customized contour themes give you the ability to have clearly differentiated contours that are quickly visible on screen at a glance for many more subtle depths and heights than the standard contours option provides This feature is especially useful if there are multiple depths that you are fishing along but wish to avoid cluttering your screen by displaying all of them at once To begin customizing contour colors Select one of the Themes 1 6 from the Theme drop down menu Select a Type from the Type drop down menu Set your Minimum Land or Sea height Set the distance or Step you wish between contours Set the Maximum depth for this contour In the Color Strip se
196. eft hand corner of the view window When these are displayed there are warning or status messages to read in the System Messages or Target panels Warning Indicators flash to indicate a pending message To view messages double click on the Warning Indicator icon View Manager The View Manager controls the content of the NavView display layout also called View Each View can contain a single content type or be divided into multiple window panes each containing a different content type Use the View Manager templates to edit up to six Views The lt F6 gt Hot Key toggles through each View you have created To create your own NavView screen layouts 1 Click on the View button located on the Menu Bar 2 Click the View Manager button KE View Manager Se SEY itor C ak ENN Cake nitor tomadi ake ue A Enabled Enabled x sss cos oe ae Ae Cancel Tone E AS SAS ENSS EAEN H ABS a Figure 18 7 View Manager Multiple Monitors 3 If multiple monitors are connected to the PC you will see the dialog shown in Figure 18 7 If you are using multiple monitors select to enable disable monitors and then click on the monitor for which you would like to create a new layout 4 Ifyou have one monitor the first screen you will see is Figure 18 8 Chapter 18 NavView 117 window panes see Figure 18 9 Click on the graphic that contains the number of panes to use in your new layout 7 Select the chart type to
197. elements Stronger returns are represented with darker colors and weaker returns in lighter colors Clutter Surface Noise School of Fish Figure 22 17 Sounder Sample Chapter 22 Sounder 171 Impact of Beam Angle Troubleshooting Sounder Transducers can produce the sound waves in differing cone shapes A wide beam up to 45 degrees is useful in shallow water because it allows for No Sounder Echoes Appear On Your Screen a wider area of coverage though with decreased clarity A narrow beam approximately 5 to 16 degrees is appropriate for deep water applications In both cases there are opportunities for dead zones that block out coverage Nobeltec Navigation Goto www nobeltec com support to download the Software is not 7 1 latest Service Pack or contact Jeppesen Marine to or later obtain an update CD Go to www nobeltec com services voucher to Sounder unlock enter your voucher number and receive your Wide Cone code has not been unlock code Once you have the unlock code follow Angle j entered the instructions for entering your unlock code in S Narrow Cone Chapter 2 of this guide NS ongi The SeaLevel USB 3 RS 422 adapter is Use the accompanying CD to reinstall SeaLevel a Dead not installed properly drivers Follow this guide for instructions on Q rane in the device installing sea level devices Targets manager Not Seen Check the fuses and the circuit breakers Check Figur
198. ength e GPS drop down list This list contains all GPS units that are currently broadcasting strength of signal information and the COM Ports to which they are connected The box is grayed out if no GPS signal strength information is available A l S wa o a A x wa WA S D T a ww A lt a l 18 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide o Lat Your vessel s latitude location e Lon Your vessel s longitude location e GPS Status This will show the status of received GPS information Options are No GPS GPS OK and WAAS OK e Accuracy Range 0 0 9 9 A lower number means greater accuracy This data comes from transmitted Horizontal Dilution of Precision HDOP values GSA NMEA sentence e Resolution Also called the 1 Sigma This is the calculated accuracy of your precise location as provided by your GPS This data comes from transmitted Horizontal Dilution of Precision HDOP values provided by satellites A greater number of available satellites transmitting data means a higher degree of resolution Odometer This is the total distance travelled while the Nobeltec Navigation Software has been running Trip Number drop down list This drop down list contains Trip 1 and Trip 2 so you can track readings for each route e Reset Click this button to reset all of the selected trip s fields to zero Time Set The date and time that the selected Trip started e Duration Hours minu
199. enu options are Zoom in Zoom Out View History View Newer Data Previous View Next View and View Manager monitor configuration window e Vessel Sub menu options are Auto Scroll Boat Predictor Max Ahead None Chart Orientation Course Up Leg Up North Up Tracking Range Circle Boat Properties e Charts Sub menu options are Chart Table Outlines Quilting Tides displays the tide stations Currents e Other Sub menu options are GPS Transfer Options Tools Options menu Colors Day Twilight or Night and Nav Objects Import Export Save All e Exit Return to PlanView or close Nobeltec Navigation Software MOB Sets Man Overboard mark at the vessel e Info Reveals or hides information ToolBar at the bottom of NavView o Tool Shows ToolBar buttons similar to default ToolBar in PlanView e Menu Reveals or hides right hand menu e Right click Next action on screen is a right mouse click rather than left mouse click Used to reveal Right Mouse Menus NavView ToolBar The NavView ToolBar at the bottom right corner of the screen contains six blue buttons This ToolBar is designed to change settings unavailable from the NavView menu Click Tool to see available ToolBar options If you have additional Nobeltec products such as an InSight Radar 2 click Next to display additional ToolBar icons NavView InfoBar The InfoBar is located along the bottom of the NavView screen You can hide the InfoBar by clickin
200. enu to instantly launch OCENS WeatherNet with the region for download already configured Uu l a Ro S T D S O25 S 5 l A 90 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide XM WxWorx Weather Data Plus Pack In order to use XM as your weather provider you must have an XM compatible satellite receiver connected to your computer and have purchased the XM WxWorx Plus Pack from Jeppesen Marine XM WXWorx provides a continuous weather feed over the robust XM satellite radio network enabling customers to download high resolution real time weather data using the XMLink application to overlay that data on top of your Nobeltec Navigation Software and navigation charts Getting XM Weather Data XM weather data can be accessed only if you have connected your XM compatible satellite receiver and purchased the XM WxWorx Plus Pack 1 Open XMLink 2 Weather files are automatically downloaded and stored Nobeltec Navigation Software automatically recognizes XM WxWorx files and will overlay them on your charts as long as XmLink is running XM WxWorx Weather Layers Once you have downloaded weather data from XM WxWorx you can control what available Weather data is displayed onscreen using the XM Weather Layers interface 1 Open the NavBar Weather tab 2 Click Layers to open the XM Weather Layers window 3 Select the Layers you wish to display on your charts XM Weather Layers contain the fol
201. er to close the Tides amp Currents program window Printer ho Lasenet 4200 PCL 6 on Printer in Portrait mode Report Type Format h Bar Graph r Cancel Preview Locations to Print 1 location selected Currents Annapolis 6 2005 Move Up Move Down 10 Printing Report Date Report Options f Use window date i Cra Repart Fonts Start f 82005 End 7 gois Fage Setup Printer Setup UE T Print reports in color color printers only ainia Help Figure 10 2 Tides amp Currents Print Options Dialog Box 11 Tides amp Currents Tides amp Currents is a stand alone application that provides tide and current prediction data to Nobeltec Navigation Software using ToolBar buttons or a pop up menu Tide and current predictions can be overlaid on top of your navigation system or used independently of VNS and Admiral to create detailed reports and research tide and current information for all the NOAA and CHS primary and secondary stations in the US and Canada Displaying Tide Bars To display tide bars on top of your electronic chart click Tide Bars on your program ToolBar the lt Shift T gt Hot Key or right click on any chart and select Tides and Currents Tides Bars from the pop up menu If you do not see any tide bar icons there may not be any tidal stations in the area covered inside your chart window If this is the case Zoom out until you are able to see the stations display
202. er 14 Autopilot 95 Click the Configure Autopilot button This will display the Configure Autopilot Settings shown in Figure 14 2 Configure Autopilot Settings C True Update interval seconds Cancel Bearings output as Magnetic E Use Leading Zeros with Bearings Precision Bearings Send bearing from boat to waypoint in place of bearing from origin to destination Select the NMEA strings to send to the autopilot JAAM Waypoint Arrival Alarm JAFA Autopilot Sentence A JAFE Autopilot Sentence B BEC Bearing amp Distance to Waypoint Dead Reckoning IBOD Bearing Origin ta Destination EFI Bearing and Distance to Point of Interest EWC Bearing and Distance to waypoint Great Circlel Talker identification to send to autopilot Figure 14 2 Configure Autopilot Settings Dialog Box In the Update Interval field specify how often control data should be sent to the autopilot Choose Magnetic or True for the bearings output and all other fields required for your autopilot see your autopilot manual Set the precision for the Bearing Range and XTE NOTE Most autopilots use APB BWC VTG WPL and XTE see Page 12 6 Below the option labeled Talker Identification to Send to Autopilot select how you want your program to identify itself to your autopilot Click OK to save the settings Test your autopilot and change the settings as needed Once setup is complete doc
203. er NMEA Data NMEA Data Input xi 160 161 161 161 162 162 162 162 162 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 163 164 164 164 165 165 165 166 166 166 166 166 166 167 167 167 168 168 168 168 168 169 169 169 xii Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide NMEA Data Output Sounder in NavView Admiral Only ToolBar in NavView Sounder and Fishfinder Basics How It Works Frequency of Sound Waves The Information On Your Screen Impact of Beam Angle Strength of Electrical Pulse Troubleshooting Sounder 23 Bathy Recorder Charts and Data Passport 3D Bathymetric Charts North America only ChartGridding Unlocking Bathy Recorder Upon Install The Benefits of Bathy Recorder Transducer Offset Settings Using a Sounder or Depth Finder Bathy Recorder Indicator Locating Deleting and Saving Bathy Files Compressing Bathy Recorder Files Tools Bathy Recorder Tools Options 3D Bathy Custom Contours 24 Sailing Plus Pack Terminology Unlocking Sailing Plus Pack The Polar Display To Open an Existing Polar Polar Display Settings Display Settings Tab Polar Values Tab Managing Polar Files Editing a Polar File Creating a New Polar File 169 170 170 170 170 170 170 171 171 171 173 173 173 173 173 173 174 174 174 175 175 175 176 176 176 177 177 177 177 177 178 178 179 180 180 180 Saving the Polar File Lay Lines and On Screen Indicato
204. es a weather feed over the XM network enabling marine customers to see weather data in a WxWorx application overlaid inside NNS XTE See Cross Track Error Zoom To change the apparent scale of a chart in the view window A S S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 198 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Index Symbols 3D 3D Navigator 25 Center on Boat Mode 85 Data Resolution 84 Explore Mode 85 Terrain Exaggeration 83 Vessel 84 A AIS 131 AIS Broadcasts 132 AIS Symbols 131 Incoming Data Display 50 128 Target Filtering 130 Annotation 100 130 ARPA 127 131 MARPA Symbology 152 Automatic Dead Reckoning 46 Autopilot 95 96 109 Active Route 96 Arrival Circle 96 configure 95 Leading Zeros 96 Sentence Selection 96 Talker ID 96 Test 109 Autoscroll 35 Follow Boat 100 Follow Predictor 100 Look Ahead 100 None 100 B Bathy Recorder 173 177 185 Transducer Offset Settings 174 Bookmark 36 Boundaries 39 Boundary Circles 39 C Cascade 100 107 Center On Boat 100 Center on Boat 35 Chart Quilting 33 Charts 31 33 Aerial Imagery 31 Chart Management 18 Chart Type Controls 31 ECDIS 32 NOAA 32 Opening 33 Scales 31 Types of Charts 31 Uninstall 33 Chart Color Scheme Tool 101 Chart Outlines 101 Chart Table 32 101 Chart Objects 18 Chart Quilting 20 33 Managing the Chart Table 18 Chart Up or Chart Down 101 Checksums 50 Circle Boundary 101 Circle Boundary Tool 101 Clear
205. es two semi redundant computers One computer includes Admiral and a Dongle and the other includes Admiral without a Dongle This particular configuration is easy to setup and use see Figure 19 1 below CAT 5 or Wireless Network aE PC2 Pa Admiral w Dongle Admiral w o Dongle Figure 19 1 GlassBridge Configuration Example 1 All NMEA devices are connected to PC1 The second computer without the Dongle serves as a backup computer If the primary computer should fail for any reason the secondary computer can replace the primary The secondary computer can also share NMEA data and serve as a monitoring software station or planning station In this example the incoming NMEA data is shared You can also share U S Passport charts although not via the network Charts must be loaded onto each computer which is possible because they both share the same serial number If you purchased Nobeltec s Passport Deluxe regions etc These can be installed onto both computers as well Example 2 Example 2 is a more sophisticated network configuration than was shown in Example 1 In Example 2 the network includes three computers that are fully redundant Each computer includes a copy of Nobeltec Admiral and each PC also has its own Dongle see Figure 19 2 In Example 2 each computer shares charts over the network including U S and International Passport charts Raster and photo charts must be installed on each compu
206. esen Marine or from your local authorized Nobeltec product dealer Passport Deluxe North America Hawaii Only Passport Deluxe is Jeppesen Marine s comprehensive supplemental nautical data solution for North America It includes Passport World Charts photo charts raster charts and 3D bathymetric charts as well as an additional data pack containing Coast Pilot place name marks local info marks light and buoy data geographic location marks and world port index information Like World Charts each Passport Deluxe region is unlocked with a Chart Permit sold separately Passport Deluxe Chart Permits include World Charts NOTE Not every chart region includes all of the listed data types Refer to your Nobeltec product distributor for complete details mod z SZ A Sn i S S S S l 2 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Using a GPS Receiver A GPS Receiver uses information from GPS satellite signals to calculate your position Position information along with speed and direction is transmitted to the computer where charting software translates that signal into a graphic display of your location on a digital nautical chart The Limits of GPS Based Electronic Navigation Seasoned navigators know not to rely on a single method of navigation when determining their position Two or more methods should be used to guard against errors placing you or your vessel in a dangerous situation GP
207. ess optimal such as environments where strong echoes are returned from land or nearby buildings Unlike Auto Sea Clutter mode Harbor Sea Clutter does not dynamically adjust the Sea Clutter but applies a static clutter value based on the Harbor Sea Clutter preset Auto Sea Clutter applies to all ranges However Sea Clutter is applied based on the STC Curve profile which generally has greater benefit in the areas closest to the vessel To adjust the Auto Sea Clutter Preset 1 Set the radar range to 12nm and click Auto Sea to turn on that function 2 Right click on the Radar window pane and select Adjust Radar Presets from the pop up window or select Radar Adjust Radar Presets Set the Auto Sea preset to 10 Set the STC Curve preset to 4 4 Click OK Manually adjust the gain until you get secondary echoes throughout the image make sure your radar color selection allows you discern between strong and weak echoes Re open the Adjust Radar Presets window Adjust the Auto Sea preset value up until most of the weak echoes for an 8nm radius are eliminated Click OK Adjust the radar range to 1 5nm and verify that strong echoes from nearby vessels or land are not eliminated If land or vessel echoes are small or have been eliminated follow the previous steps to decrease the Sea Clutter preset To adjust the Harbor Sea Clutter Preset 1 Set the radar range to 1nm and click Auto Sea to turn on that function 2 Right click on the Rada
208. establish settings specific to your selected weather provider Tools Options Weather Tools Options Weather is where you configure how weather graphics will appear when overlaid on the charts Before using this tool you must select a Weather Provider GRIB XM WxWorx SkyMate or Nobeltec 1S l a Ro S eg D rS S O35 S l A T 88 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide The following options are available from the Weather Tab WARNING Not all of these options are available from all weather providers e Weather Provider With Nobeltec s weather partnerships you can receive weather updates from Nobeltec SkyMate GRIB or XM WxWorx NOTE When you change Weather Providers it may take a few minutes before data from the new Weather Provider displays on screen e Pressure Barometric pressure can be displayed as contour lines with labels or as a color gradient Options are Filled or Line e Frequency This refers to the number of barometric pressure contours that you want to show The options are 2 Mb or 4 Mb e Radar Opacity Radar weather overlay can be made more or less transparent with this setting Options are 25 50 75 or 100 e Satellite Opacity Satellite cloud cover overlay can be made more or less transparent with this setting Options are 25 50 75 or 100 e Wind Wind can be displayed as arrows or as wind barbs Wind barbs are meteorologically correct
209. esthetically pleasing but can mask changes in depth outside the transducer cone and therefore should be used with caution Bathy Recorder Show Raw Points on Chart Window This option allows you to have Bathy Recorder data always rendered in black rather than the color dictated by the Shaded Relief color scheme in the chart window Yes turns on the display black only bathymetric data points on your chart window No defaults to the shaded relief color scheme No is the default setting This feature permits you to see where you have and have not captured data There is no harm in adding additional data to an area and in fact can improve your overall sea floor map of any area over time e Bathy Recorder Duplicate Data This setting controls how Nobeltec Navigation Software handles overlapping Bathy Recorder samples Options are Average Data Points or Use Newest Data Point Average Data Points is the default setting and causes all overlapping data to impact the final depth value Use Newest Data Point causes data from only the latest Bathy Recorder file to be used Data from within the same file is always averaged Depth Tab If you are using Passport Charts Nobeltec Navigation Software allows you to change the color of depth soundings on Passport vector charts based on a user defined range Depths have been grouped into six 6 depth ranges This feature has several uses For example you may choose to mark all soundings 10 feet and fe
210. etes a day or range of days yesterday or prior at a time see Figure 23 7 Recorded bathymetric files can also be copied and shared with other users as you would share any other data file You also have the option of deleting the Bathy Recorder data within any Circle or Closed Boundary on the Chart window pane To delete data within a boundary object right click on the boundary object and select Delete BR data in this boundary object from the pop up menu This will delete all Bathy Recorder data in all Bathy Recorder files for the area enclosed by this boundary Delete Bathy Recorder Data x Select the prior number of days of Bathy l 1 yesterd 1 yesterday eid Figure 23 7 Delete Bathy Recorder Data Compressing Bathy Recorder Files Bathy Recorder files are typically large A large number of uncompressed Bathy files can result in poor system performance of Nobeltec Navigation Software Whenever you have 300 or more Bathy Recorder files stored the Bathy Recorder engine will automatically compress and merge your Bathy Recorder files upon program shutdown No Wu i 2 S lt eo n S J u S S D 7 ce S oa I N 176 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Tools Bathy Recorder There is a Tools Bathy Recorder menu created when you unlock Bathy Recorder with the following options e Capture Bathy Recorder Data This option starts the recording process of b
211. ets Tab not the Status Messages panel Active Mark Tab This tab displays all the pertinent information about the active Mark or Waypoint in a route that your vessel is currently steering toward Fields available include Range and Bearing to Mark SOG COG TTG VMG Wpt XTE ETA HDG CTS and the Time to Go TTG to other Marks in the Route NOTE You must have an active Mark or Route to display data in this tab T amp C Tides amp Currents Tab The T amp C Tab displays information that comes from the Tides amp Currents stand alone program Tidal and current information that relates to your vessel such as tide location and time present tidal information daily high and low current location current information at boat and daily ebb and flood data are available Chapter 4 Basic Screens 17 Targets Tab Use the Targets Tab on the PlanView NavBar to view additional information about a specific tracked target Select from available Targets using the drop down menu next to the Target name display Find an available Target Filter AIS Targets from being displayed and Show or Hide Targets from displaying Fields available include CPA TCPA RNG BRG COG SOG LAT and LON Search Tab You can search for any object using the text based search field in the Search Tab of the NavBar The ability to search text allows you to plot courses with greater ease You can quickly locate points of interest using Nobeltec Navigation Softwa
212. etwork computers are currently doing and what navigation inputs are directly physically connected to the computer This is the default setting Send Processed NMEA Requires Admiral to send Processed Data to the network Listen for Processed NMEA Explicitly listens to Processed Data None Select this option and no Processed Data is sent or retrieved Raw NMEA Data Sharing Raw NMEA Data Sharing is used to send Raw Data to the network so that each computer on the network can receive all inputs Raw Data Send NMEA Data If there is an NMEA data source connected to the computer through a properly configured input COM port this option will send data over the network allowing other computers to access that data Listen to NMEA Data Use this option to receive Raw NMEA Data from all other networked computers NOTE Nobeltec recommends using the processed NMEA data sharing In cases where both Processed and Raw data is received by Admiral Processed Data takes priority It is more efficient and also reduces configuration issues If you would like to share NMEA data that is not vessel related such as AIS target information or external Radar targets send raw NMEA data should be enabled Creating a Routes amp Marks Home Prior to sharing importing and exporting navigation objects routes marks boundaries etc between computers on the GlassBridge Network one computer must be designated the Routes and Marks Home To setup
213. f Admiral that was running on Windows XP the Vista Windows Firewall message some feature of this program may be blocked appears Click OK to continue Share Radar Targets After acquiring MARPA Radar targets using Nobeltec Admiral it is helpful to share these targets with the other computers on the GlassBridge Network e Routes and Marks Home location for all Nav Objects Prior to sharing navigation objects routes marks boundaries etc between computers on the GlassBridge Network one computer must be designated the Routes and Marks Home To make this computer the Home computer for Routes and Marks place a check mark in this check box and select whether you will accept Nav Objects created by other computers from the Accept Nav Objects from Other Stations drop down menu To copy objects to and from the Marks and Routes Home 1 Click File Navigation Objects Import or Export Nav Objects 2 At the top of the dialog click to choose the Marks and Routes Home in Import From Export To drop down list box 3 Select the objects that you would like to transfer or select Import All or Export All 4 When finished click OK co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa WA SZ 2 S x kar 2a a S aL l co 62 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Data Sharing Tab This Tab is used to determine how data NMEA Ockam or B amp G is shared between computers connected to a network using an Etherne
214. facturer To set fuel rates for a route 1 Click on PlanBook or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu 2 Click the Set Fuel Rates button 3 The ETA Calculator Set Fuel Use dialog box see Figure 9 3 will appear Click on the New button 4 Another dialog box will appear Enter as many estimated SOGs and their relative fuel rates for your vessel as you have available and click Add Entry after entering each set of values When finished click OK which will return you to the ETA Calculator Set Fuel Use dialog box Click OK to return to the PlanBook 5 From the Route Tab in the PlanBook select a route that you would like to view the Fuel Usage Rate for and click on the Update button next to ke Il V a i Co Q Q N lt x Q a l SO 70 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide the Route Summary pane The Route Summary should appear and give you your Estimate Fuel Usage for the route you selected ETA Calculator Set Fuel Use 4 xi Estimate Fuel Use E IA K gt Using the information from the table below ETA Calculator EF Calculator can help predict how much fuel you ll use on your trip Enter the average amount of fuel required for various speeds over water Make sure to add entries over the range of speeds you typically travel Fuel Use T able 0 entries OK Cancel Help Figure 9 3 ETA Calculator Set Fuel Use Dialog Box The Marks Tab Using the Marks Tab of the
215. fault is 0 5 NM If a target enters into the area specified by this setting it is considered a threat e Time to Closest Point of Approach TCPA Sets a threshold amount of time until the Closest Point of Approach DSC Directory The DSC directory is where you can input the MMSI Number and a description or name of vessels polled with your DSC radio The description you input will appear on your charts instead of the MMSI Number These settings can be saved for future use AIS Target Filtering AIS targets can be filtered for type distance moorage state etc The Targets NavBar NavView Target ToolBar and Tools Options Targets all contain a link to open the AIS Filtering window e Display AIS Targets Controls whether any AIS targets are displayed in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar When unchecked all subsequent options in this window are disabled e Hide Targets Beyond This option allows you to select a maximum distance range for detected AIS targets to display Targets whose distance exceeds the selected setting will not display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Options are Do not hide 5 10 20 40 60 or 80 units of measurement Default is Do not Hide e Only display targets in an AIS TXT file When selected only targets whose MMSI numbers are listed in the AIS TXT file located in C Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series are displayed This setting enables you to track specific known targets while ignoring un
216. fer to your GPS User s Guide to determine which wires to use Ground Ground GPS Transmit Transmit PC Receive gt lt Receive Computer COM Port This wire is only required for Upload Download Figure 3 1 Standard GPS to PC Connection Ground Ground GPS Transmit Transmit PC Receive Receive Computer COM Port Ground Autopilot Transmit Receive Figure 3 2 GPS and Autopilot Integration GPS Settings Many GPS devices must be specifically configured to output data Check your GPS User s Guide to determine if your GPS is outputting data or not and follow the instructions to turn NMEA output on i NOTE These settings assume that the GPS will output information in the WGS84 Datum Wu i S fae wa S S iw 5 A 2 S gt l wn 10 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Connecting the Wires After you have identified the wires you can connect them The Data Out NMEA Out wire from your GPS should be connected to the Data In wire in your computer cable The Data In NMEA In wire from your GPS should be connected to the Data Out wire in your computer cable The Ground or Data or Return wire from your GPS should be connected to the Ground wire in the computer cable Connecting the Nobeltec Cable to Your Computer Jeppesen Marine provides a standard 9 pin D connector DB9 when you purchase VNS or Admiral After this cable has been wired to your GPS plug it into an available
217. fill each pane To fill the active pane highlighted with a yellow border make a selection from Vector Raster Photo Topographic 3D Radar Sounder Video Navinfo 1 4 Nobeltec Connect or PlanBook see Figure 18 10 Repeat until all panes have been assigned a chart type Edit Delete NOTE Certain types of data are only available to display in specific configurations For example PlanBook can only display in half screen horizontal or full screen layout Edit Delete Cancel RELA Sw Figure 18 8 View Manager Select and Configure Layout Ei vac ee l D Radar The Select and Configure Layout screen Figure 18 8 allows you to configure each window pane layout for content type To select a pre existing layout click on the large white box containing a graphic To edit or create a new layout click the Edit button eS Naviniol Admiral View Manager Figure 18 10 View Manager Window Pane Types 8 When finished click Done 9 To view the layout you just created click the View button then View Manager and click on the graphic that contains your new layout The NavView screen will change to display your layout Navinfo Lie C ack A cancel A Figure 18 10 displays the content available for the window panes in eS a NavView NavInfo presents the most important system data such as Course Figure 18 9 View Manager Creating and Editing a Layout Over Ground COG Speed Over Gr
218. fits Select SkyMate During Installation Once SkyMate is installed you still have the choice to switch to other weather providers available Select which weather provider to use from the Tools Options Weather Tab When SkyMate Weather is selected the Weather menu bar will display SkyMate information Refer to the SkyMate hardware installation documentation for connecting the SkyMate communicator to your PC and for using SkyMate weather options inside of the Nobeltec Connect window Getting SkyMate Weather Data 1 Open the NavBar Weather tab 2 Click SkyMate Connect to open a SkyMate Connect window 3 Follow the on screen instructions to download SkyMate Weather or use other features provided by SkyMate Chapter 13 Wind amp Weather 9 Nobeltec Weather Data Provided as a daily up to the minute download packaged in different levels Bronze no cost option Silver and Gold levels which are both sold separately by Jeppesen Marine The differences for each level can be seen in Table 13 1 ree ee 3 Day forecast 5 Day forecast Weather Overlay Surface Pressure 10 Day forecast Wind 3 Day forecast 5 Day forecast 3 Day forecast 5 Day forecast 3 Day forecast 10 Day forecast Ocean Currents 10 Day forecast High Low Movement and Speed 3 Day forecast Sea State 5 Day forecast 10 Day forecast sweden ste st stems P ty erano Dowes stort aserne tty fy ee a o o Table 13 1 Weather Servi
219. fits your needs Click Next 5 Review the service level and region that you are about to download Click Next to continue 6 Ifyou are purchasing a one time subscription input your payment information and click Next Nobeltec will verify your information Internet connection and download and install your new weather file 7 Click Done once the file has been successfully installed Method 2 Use the Nobeltec Store Use the Nobeltec Website to purchase Silver and Gold WeatherMail files daily or place an order for a WeatherMail subscription WeatherMail is a daily email subscription that can be paid for monthly Your daily email contains a weather file attachment lt 70 Kb that you download to your PC To purchase a WeatherMail subscription using the Nobeltec Store Visit the Nobeltec website www nobeltec com store Input your 20 digit NNS Serial Number in the space provided Click Enter Click Weather from the left hand menu To download the free Bronze data click Daily Downloads To order an monthly subscription click Subscription Service ot ge oe Se 6 Follow the onscreen instructions Once you complete your purchase an email containing a WeatherMail file will be sent to your email address Save the attachment to your PC Locate and double click on the attachment icon to open the weather file Once the file has installed the weather data will be ready for use Step 2 View Weather Data To view weather predict
220. formation about GlassBridge Networks GBN Raw and Processed Data setup on the Data Sharing Tab help you configure GBN NMEA sharing e Network Identity The network ID will default to the name of the computer If you would like to change the name click in the dialog and enter a new name e Enable Advanced Networking Place a check mark in this check box to turn on the GlassBridge Network features e Accept Active Waypoints from other Computers When navigating it is very useful to see the active waypoint on all computers on the GlassBridge Network When you place a check mark in this check box whenever another computer creates or moves an active waypoint this computer will update accordingly e Chart Sharing enables you to share charts with other computers on your GlassBridge Network Choose from one of the three available Chart Sharing options Ask Yes or No Selecting Ask will prompt the user each time the computer is started whether or not to share charts Yes will share all Passport Charts each time the program opens and No turns Chart Sharing off e Radar Sharing If you are using an InSight Radar in order to share radar data on the network select Yes from the Radar Sharing drop down menu However if you purchased a Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 IR2 or an InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB and it is connected to your system Radar data is shared on the network automatically No additional GlassBridge Network config
221. g The direction the ship is oriented Helmsman Display Also known as a highway or horizon display It graphically shows the user where the active leg and XTE limits are in relation to their position High Water HW The maximum height reached by a rising tide Higher High Water HHW The highest of the high water or single high water of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Mood and the Sun Higher Low Water HLW The highest of the low water of any specified tidal day do to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun Hub Any waypoint that serves as a juncture for two or more routes HyperTerminal A program included in Windows which tests COM ports International Hydrographic Organization IHO An organization that provides the specifications for what qualifies as an ECDIS Knot Kt A speed unit of one international nautical mile 18520 0 meters or 6 076 11549 international feet per hour Latitude The designation for angles measuring how far North or how far South a position is Value range is from 90 S to 0 at the equator to 90 N Latitude values are represented by the Greek letter lambda A A A S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 192 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Lat Lon Any object s position expressed in Latitude and Longitude Leg The segment of a route between two waypoints Local Notice to Mariner LNM A means for dis
222. g is a setting that when configured incorrectly can cause a donut shaped ring to appear in the center of the radar image Trigger delay should be initially set to reduce the size of the ring Refinement of the Transmit Trigger is best viewed using radar overlay on the Chart window pane In most cases Transmit Trigger settings remain between 125 and 160 Y P E Inadequate Tx Trig Excessive Tx Trig Figure 21 6 Transmit Trigger Delay Settings Appearance Changes Good Tx Trig Transmit Trigger Delay can also affect the radar image of a linear object such as a breakwater or riverfront These can appear deformed due to excessive or inadequate trigger delay Properly setting the delay may require on the water tuning when looking at a straight object Trigger delay adjustment removes deformations in the radar return as shown in Figure 21 6 N e l q S S Ka a gt S gt Aa S S S ce l T N 140 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide To adjust the Transmit Trigger Delay setting 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation Software and open a Radar window pane 2 Select Radar Radar Initial Setup 3 Radar image rotation and trigger delay initial settings should be Transmit Trigger Delay 0 Radar Heading Line Rotation 90 Adjust these settings until you achieve a stable trigger delay setting Radar Initial Setup x Transmit Trigger Delay n25 it Min blas Radar Heading J40 C ll Line Rotat
223. g Managed Mode continue with Steps 6 10 6 Place a check mark next to the correct Output Autopilot COM Port 7 Click Configure All Output Autopilot Ports 8 In the Select the NMEA strings to send to the output autopilot field place a check mark next to Tender Tracker Managed Mode 9 Choose EC Electronic Chart Display as the Talker identification 10 Click OK to close the Configure Output Autopilot Settings window 11 Click OK to close the Tools Options Ports Configure window N Ww I D a M a A D Z S Z 2a c 1 LA N 186 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Configuring the Tender Directory Each STU has a unique ID Number that identifies it to the SBU The STU can also have a designated channel that transmits data to the SBU if the SBU is in Managed Mode Use the Tender Directory to provide a description for each STU based on ID Number If you are using Managed Mode use the Tender Directory to instruct the SBU to listen to each STU s designated channel for a specific period of time To set up the Tender Directory 1 Open Tools Options Targets 2 Click Tender Directory 3 Skip this step for Autonomous Mode If you are using Managed Mode from the Tender Directory window place a check mark in the Managed Mode check box AN REMEMBER SBU hardware must also be set to Managed Mode Tender Directory x Tender Tracking instructions are available in the User s Guide
224. g box select Transit Time from the three available options then click Next Input Start and End date and time Click Compute The ETA Calculator will now compute the speed needed in order to arrive at the end of your route at the specified date and time see Figure 11 7 Me y Compute Speed E IA _ The average speed over ground is computed indicating any AS benefit or hinderance based on computed and entered set Calculator and dift Date Time Start Time E 1 2008 5 46 18 PM End Time 3 1 2008 5 46 18 PM am Speed Over Water Press Compute Button Speed Over Ground Press Compute Button Duration Press Compute Button Fuel Estimate n a Compute Required Speed lt Back Cancel Help Figure 11 6 ETA Calculator Transit Time Figure 11 7 ETA Calculator Speed i Q Ro a gt Ow 82 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide 2 S WW a WA ic aS l 12 3D Navigator Passport 3D Bathymetric Charts Passport 3D Bathymetric Charts are high resolution sea floor elevation data Spaced at regular intervals and based on a thirty meter grid These charts are part of the Passport Deluxe chart packages for North America and Hawaii Data points contain latitude longitude and elevation Nobeltec Navigation Software interprets this data and renders it into a 3D image combining charts with a 3D view of the ocean floor and land ChartGridding S
225. g the Info button in the NavView ToolBar The InfoBar provides information about your vessel s current location including Vessel Position Screen Cursor position Mark data System Time status of peripheral devices Tides amp Currents Targets Status Messages and if you have the sensors connected GPS Water Temperature and Depth Click Next or Back to scroll through the available InfoBars LAT 25 46 037 N EEES RNG 0 3 nm BRG 112 T Figure 4 18 InfoBar and ToolBar To Use NavView 1 Use the NavView menu buttons to navigate through menu options 2 Some menu buttons will lead to secondary menu buttons 3 Click Back from any sub menu to return to the main menu To Return to PlanView Click Back from any sub menu then click Exit To PlanView Press lt F9 gt View Manager View Manager features are covered in greater detail in Chapter 18 NavView View Manager controls the how NavView content is displayed Each monitor connected to Admiral can display a single type of content or be divided into window panes View Manager can help you create new screen layouts containing multiple window panes For example if you have a single monitor and wish to see the 3D Navigator Radar and a Chart on a single screen View Manager helps you to set your view to this configuration Save multiple layouts for each monitor and quickly progress through them by clicking lt F6 gt or reverse toggle by clicking lt Shift F6 gt
226. ge is displaying select Radar Initial Radar Setup from the main menu to open the Radar Initial Setup window 3 Use the Radar Heading Line Rotation up and down arrows or slider bar to line up the image 4 Radar image rotation and trigger delay initial settings should be Transmit Trigger Delay 0 Radar Heading Line Rotation 90 Adjust these settings until you achieve a stable Heading Line Rotation setting A REMEMBER Radar Heading Line Rotation is a one time setup Heading line rotation should only be offset by 10 degrees maximum Once this setting is correct it should not require adjustment Alignment issues while underway are typically a function of compass deviation challenges Compass Settings Getting the radar to properly align with the electronic chart requires two key software settings Compass Master Heading Correction In certain cases it is not possible to install the digital compass exactly parallel with the vessel center line This software setting allows an offset to be entered into Nobeltec Navigation Software to compensate for this occurrence Compass Deviation Magnetic compasses can give incorrect readings for many reasons The most typical is magnetic interference on the boat The engine block a large anchor or chain and even electronics can create magnetic interference Nobeltec Navigation Software allows you to make entries in a deviation table that tells the software how to adjust the incoming heading dat
227. grate third party bathymetric chart data into your Jeppesen Marine charts using the Chart Quilting function see Page 16 Bathymetric chart data can be saved onto your PC and converted into Nobeltec compatible data for seamless integration with your existing charts 1 Insert the third party chart CD into your CD ROM drive or download third party chart files into a specific folder on your PC Click File Chart Table and click on the Install Tab From the Install Type drop down menu select the appropriate data type Browse to the bathymetric chart file location CD ROM drive or download folder Nobeltec Navigation Software will scan the available data types if it recognizes the chart format it will automatically list the charts available Select the individual charts you wish to install or click Select All Click Install to complete installation Click Yes to overwrite files If you have several chart CDs repeat steps 1 5 for each CD or folder AN vr You can choose to insert the CD ROM during each use or to copy the charts to your hard drive for permanent storage Saving them to your hard drive improves operation speed but requires more storage memory Bathy Recorder The Nobeltec Bathy Recorder sold as a Plus Pack to Visual Navigation Suite VNS and Nobeltec Admiral enables you to record sea floor topographic information using your Sounder Depth Finder device and to incorporate that data into your 3D display When you use th
228. have no Internet connection at this time select Contact Nobeltec by Phone and click Next Call Nobeltec 800 732 2800 for a Site Key Proceed to Step 7 6 For Step 5 b above only Once you have access to a computer with an Internet connection go to www nobeltec com sitekey Input the Site Code and your Serial in the provided fields to generate a Site Key Input the Site Key in order to open the navigation software It is highly advised to Register Your Product at this time see Page iii The Software License Agreement AN artentiow You may not use this product unless you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement When you first launch Nobeltec Navigation Software a digital copy of the Software License Agreement will display By clicking the radio button labeled Agree you and all users of your copy of Nobeltec Navigation Software agree to be bound by the terms of the Software License Agreement and to release and hold Jeppesen Marine harmless from and against any and all claims obligations and liabilities with respect to the product except those specifically reserved in the License Agreement If you do not agree with the terms of the Software License Agreement click the button labeled I Do Not Agree and the program will close If you choose this option you may return the program to the original place of purchase within thirty 30 days of the purchase date Passport Charts and data once unlocked are not returnable
229. he lt R gt Hot Key to toggle Range Circles on or off Weather Tab The Weather Tab provides non editable weather information for the location of a mark or waypoint based on data from the selected Weather Provider For more information on Weather and weather providers please see Chapter 13 Weather and Wind Route Properties Menu The Route Properties Menu is nearly identical to the Mark Properties Menu but only includes the General Description and Range Circle Tabs To open the Route Properties Menu click on any route leg and select Properties Be sure to right click on the route not the waypoint clicking on a waypoint opens the properties menu for that waypoint Boat Properties Menu The Boat Properties Menu allows you to adjust various aspects of your vessel and how it is displayed on the chart Click on the Boat Properties ToolBar button right click on the vessel icon and select Properties from the pop up menu or select Edit Boat Properties from the Main Menu Boat x General Log G R Track Alarms Stats Display Range Circle Latitude 43 42 714 N Name 55 Nobeltec W Lock W Display Line to Active Mark Longitude O07 25 950 E Beanngs True C Magnetic blag Var 0 72 E Deviation Display Predictor Line minfa into future Figure 8 2 Boat Properties Menu Co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa A SZ 2 S O ae SS J Aa a aL l co 46 No
230. he other indicates which side will receive ToolBar or menu commands 2 44 gaCam a fa eh an to e ad Figure 22 8 Split View Bottom Zoom With the Bottom Zoom selected the Sounder Display is divided in half The left side contains a Bottom Zoom display while the right side continues to display the regular sounder data Bottom Zoom causes the bottom when it is found to be drawn larger You can select various ranges to display using the Range controls The ability to shift the view is disabled because this is done automatically to maintain the sea floor on screen as the depth of the bottom changes When in a Zoom Mode a Zoom Bar will appear that indicates the portion of the regular view that is being enlarged Use this split view to keep a close eye on the bottom Chapter 22 Sounder 165 Ne UGaG08 2 4X S50E ba Lapa eh oi 1S Fee aa mu all Figure ry 9 Bottom Tom Custom Zoom A Custom Zoom split view is much like a Bottom Zoom the Sounder Display is divided in half and the left side shows a magnified version of the sounder echoes However with a Custom Zoom you are free to adjust both the Range and Shift of the zoomed view The Zoom Bar is displayed on the A Scope indicating the portion of the regular view that is being enlarged In Custom Zoom mode this zoom bar can be grabbed with the mouse and can be dragged up or down causing the Custom Zoom shift to be adjusted A Custom Zoom is ideal when you wo
231. he 3D window and chart window screens will have the bathymetric chart data refreshed Options are once second every 5 seconds every 10 seconds every 15 seconds every 30 seconds every 60 seconds and at Startup only Default is every 5 seconds In cases where the computer system is already taxed the frequency of screen refresh should be at longer intervals to prevent pauses in the system Bathy Recorder Transducer Cone Angle 50 kHz or 200 kHz These options should be set to reflect the actual sonar transducer cone angle that is being used to provide the software with depth information based on the frequency of your Transducer This information transmits on a point by point basis the influence range of each recorded depth Influence range is also a function of the depth For example in 100 m 328 feet of water a 45 cone angle will result in a range of influence of about 40 m 131 feet around the collected sample whereas a 6 cone angle would only have a 5 m 16 feet range of influence The minimum influence range is 1 m 3 feet which means that in shallow water a narrow cone angle may produce a wider impact than expected For example in 10 m 33 feet of water a 6 cone angle should have an influence range of 0 52 m 1 7 feet but is rounded up to 1 m 3 feet Jeppesen Marine highly recommends checking the documentation that came with your sounder depth finder transducer to determine the correct transducer cone angle setting
232. he Objects Tab Chart Table x on Open Objects Intl Unita Citing l Chart List 2 Inthe left menu expand the folder for the data type you wish to change ae ee renee the view settings for see Figure 5 6 Place a check mark next to the i ima uierco arises dee EAT H item type or select All Visible to make data of that type visible None 3 Eee Te Visible makes all data of that type invisible on the chart Ro U501 WEST COAST OF NORTH AMERICA MEXICAN BORDER Lieb A Ei S eee Details 3 Click Done S a gt Paper Chatissue Date 0301 2005 n WARNING Be careful not to press Delete or the highlighted object will be kij iano Fa erased If you delete an object there is no way to restore it Search Previous Next V Single Chart V Maximized M MV NothUp CourseUp M The Install Tab Done Use the Install Tab to install multiple data types Permits amp Unlock codes Extra Nav data BSB5 perspective photos Raster and Photo Charts USGS Topographic maps and to integrate the interactive features from other Nobeltec products such as the InSight Sounder IR2 Radars GPS etc See Figure 5 5 Open Tab of the Chart Table The Objects Tab Page 3 for Chart and Supplemental Data installation The Objects Tab of the Chart Table allows you to select and open a chart according to the position of an object To locate an object The Uninstall Tab 1 Click File Chart Table and select the Objects Tab Uninstalling a chart deletes
233. he Power of Nobeltec Passport 31 Hide Range Bearing Information 39 Passport Options ToolBar 31 Changing a Waypoint Icon 39 The Chart Table 32 Changing the Color of a Route 39 vi Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Locking Objects Locking Objects With Multiple Points Locking Single Point Objects 7 Advanced Routes Routes and Waypoints Activating a Route Activating a Waypoint Waypoint Arrival Setting a Waypoint Arrival Alarm Splitting a Route Joining Two Routes Great Circle Route Builder Creating a Route From a Track Remove From Route s Deleting Routes and Waypoints Adding New Waypoints to a Route Appending Waypoints to a Route Inserting Waypoints Using Existing Marks During Route Creation Sharing Waypoints Reversing a Route Route Wizard 8 Properties amp Options Mark Properties Menu General Tab Description Tab Icon Tab Range Circle Tab Weather Tab Route Properties Menu Boat Properties Menu General Tab Deviation Table and Master Heading Log Tab Automatic Logging Manual Logging Viewing Logfiles Dead Reckoning Tab Calculating Speed and Heading for Dead Reckoning Calculating Set and Drift for Dead Reckoning Calculating SOG and COG for Dead Reckoning Track Tab Enable Boat Track Recording Enable Wake Alarm Tab Waypoint Arrival Alarm Boundary Alarm s Shallow Water Alarm Cross Track Error XTE Tender Alarms Admiral Only Stats Tab Display Tab Range Circle Tab Tools Options Menu Por
234. he movement of tidal current up the shore or up a tidal river or estuary Geo reference To establish the relationship between page coordinates on a planar map and real world coordinates GlassBridge Network GBN A group of computers that are combined together to share data between the computers This feature is only available in Nobeltec Admiral Global Positioning System GPS modified A worldwide radio navigation system developed by the US Department of Defense In addition to military purposes it is widely used in marine terrestrial navigation and location based services Uses stationary satellites or a surface signal to locate the ship with a very high degree of accuracy The term GPS is frequently used to refer to GPS receivers GPS See Global Positioning System Great Circle A Great Circle is the shortest distance between two points on a spheroid A great circle is formed at the edge of a plane crossing through the center of a sphere Unlike Rhumb Lines great circles generally do not have constant bearing the equator and the meridians are prominent exceptions Greenwich Meridian See Prime Meridian Glossary amp Index 191 GRIB GRidded Binary A general purpose bit oriented data exchange format GRIB is an efficient vehicle for transmitting large volumes of gridded data over high speed telecommunication lines using modern protocols GRIB weather communicates large weather data files efficiently Headin
235. hen enabled a temperature scale will appear along with a moving graph line indicating the temperature and trending information Use this option to track subtle changes in temperature Chapter 22 Sounder 167 42 A a Gir et Sete le ieee eis mrss Spo SE e Temperature i MC UESOG9 2 RX OROO HAE Spams Graph al os Bn 8 SAE aea E Event Mark ToolBar Button lt Scale AC x Cn a porns ay d ek iN ft B 40 l E i if A a rg Ce a i se Ie I No 4 2 mph gt wa O p 40 6 SN e nperature and Speed S 36 as Text a Figure 22 14 Marks and Event Marks duce ETEA You can also drop a Mark onchart A Mark can be placed on any object displayed in the Sounder Window In other words a Mark is independent of Speed Through Water Display the vessel s position To place a Mark select Mark from the program ToolBar and then click on the targeted object in the Sounder window A Mark will appear onchart in the location you specified If your transducer is configured with a speed sensor or another speed sensor is installed and configured to transmit SOW information using NMEA 0183 sentences this value can be viewed on the Sounder display as well Instant Waypoint Dropping A Mark or an Event Mark NOTE Similar to the Event Mark an Instant Waypoint cannot be added When GPS data is available each Sounder echo is automatically associated to the Sounder Display unless GPS information is being
236. his button toggles you through available selections Annotation Tool Create Annotation marks on your charts x gt Autoscroll Follow Boat Tool When a GPS is connected and the vessel icon is moving in the chart window this feature automatically scrolls the chart while keeping the vessel icon in the center of the screen x Autoscroll Follow Predictor Tool While underway with a GPS connected this feature automatically scrolls the chart while keeping the vessels Predictor Line in the center of the screen Predictor Line must be turned on in the Boat Properties menu E Autoscroll Look Ahead Tool When a GPS is connected and the vessel icon is moving in the chart window this feature automatically scrolls the chart while keeping the vessel icon at the lowermost point of the screen Autoscroll None Tool Disables any active Autoscroll mode Boat Properties Tool Opens the Boat Properties dialog Cascade Windows Tool Cascades the open chart windows A P 4 x Center On Boat Tool Centers the chart view on the boat position 4 uss Change 3D Exaggeration Tool Used to enhance the 3D image by over or under exaggerating 3D data Minor changes in elevation become visible in areas that might otherwise appear completely flat or vice versa Ea Change 3D Mode Tool Enables you to toggle between Center on Boat Mode and Explorer Mode while using the 3D Navigator B Chart Color Scheme Tool This to
237. ices Rhumb Line A Rhumb Line is a line of constant bearing Unlike great circles rhumb lines are usually not the shortest path between two points on a sphere Part of the utility of rhumb lines is that they can be drawn as straight lines on Mercator projections Rhumb lines have the advantage of being easy to navigate because they follow a constant bearing The parallels of the earth are examples of rhumb lines Rhumb lines are undefined values at the poles A rhumb line of sufficient length will usually tend to spiral around the earth towards a pole forming a loxodrome Such spiraling rhumb lines will form a logarithmic spiral on a polar stereographic projection ROT See Rate Of Turn Route Desired path of travel created on a chart or grid and consisting of starting ending and any number of interim waypoints Nobeltec Navigation Software can instruct a properly connected autopilot to steer along the path of a Route Scroll To move different parts of a long list into view using the arrow buttons or scroll bar Also scroll is often used as a synonym for pan Serial Number North America only Software identification number that also serves as a customer s Nobeltec ID Made up of 20 digits laid out in the following convention 1234 123456 1234 123456 Set The cumulative effect of wind and current on the direction of a ship Site Code North America only Eight letter code ABCD EFGH provided during initial software instal
238. ick on the route leg not the waypoint Appending Waypoints to a Route Appending to a route means adding new waypoints to its beginning or end The first waypoint of a route is automatically numbered 001 New waypoints are added by default to the highest numbered waypoint which is typically at the end of a route To add a new waypoint to the beginning of a route you must first use the Reverse command from the Route menu to reorder the waypoints Reverse is also used when navigating with active routes To add waypoints to the End of a route 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints be sure to right click on the route not the waypoint 2 Choose Append New Mark from the pop up menu 3 The cursor will change into the Route tool To insert new waypoints at the Beginning of a route 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints be sure to right click on the route not the waypoint 2 Choose Reverse from the pop up menu Waypoint numbers will reverse order Choose Append New Mark from the pop up menu 3 4 The cursor will change into the Route tool 5 Adda waypoint to the Route 6 When done reverse the route again to restore it to its original order Inserting Waypoints The Insert New Mark command is used to add new waypoints to the middle of a route To add a waypoint to the middle of a route 1 Right click on the segment of the route between two waypoints where you want
239. igation Software User s Guide 3 Physically connect all computers to the network Start with PC1 Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network The network ID will default to the name of the computer If you would like to change the name click in the dialog and enter a new name Click Enable Advanced Networking Select Advanced Networking Options To use these features see the section called Advanced Networking Settings later in this chapter 7 Click Radar Sharing if appropriate This setting must be selected on each Admiral installation that will share data 8 Click Sounder Sharing if appropriate This setting must be selected on each Admiral installation that will share data 9 Click Routes and Marks Home to select a PC that will be the Server for the other computers on the network See the section entitled Routes and Marks Home later in this chapter for more information 10 Click Accept Nav Objects From Other Stations and choose either Prompt or Accept All See later in this section for more information 11 Click OK when finished 12 Repeat steps 4 11 to configure each computer 13 Options will take effect the next time the program is started Behavior of Example 2 This type of installation provides a redundant system that is powerful in a number of ways As noted earlier radar images are available on both computers if connected Charts are automatically copied at each computer and navigational objects are easily shared betwee
240. ighlight Color is used to outline the Text color allowing the text to stand out better against all other colors in the sounder histogram e Themes can be selected to have all Sounder settings display in e Temperature Color is used to paint the temperature graph complementary colors Sailing Tab Plus Pack If you have purchased and installed the Nobeltec Sailing Plus Pack for Visual Navigation Suite and Admiral an additional tab is displayed for adjusting Sailing settings For a complete description of the Sailing Plus Pack please The Use Sea Floor Color option can be set to Yes or No If itis set to refer to Chapter 25 Sailing Plus Pack Yes the Sea Floor color is used when drawing any returns beneath the bottom line If it is set to No the regular sounder return colors are used e The Bottom Line represents the calculated depth of the sea floor e The Shallow Water Indicator is represented by a solid line across the Sounder Display at the level where the Shallow Water Depth Alarm is set Tools Options Sailing provides you with options that determine which sailing information appears in the Chart window pane e Display Apparent Wind Indicator Options for this field include No Small Medium and Large Large is twice the size of Medium and twice as far away This indicator is updated every second The indicator is a filled circle with the label A and an arrow pointing from the direction of the wind to the boat The leng
241. ight marker off the strip to remove it e To change a Land contour color right click on the color strip at the co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa A SZ S x ks 2a a a l co 58 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide location where you want to change the color A standard Color window opens from which you may select a color for the range you selected in the color strip e Use the Gradual or Filled check boxes to make the color behavior gradient to completely fill the contour with a single color or both Water Contour Options Water Contour Options can be used to set up to two separate contours at specified depths This tool gives you a sense of changing water depth as you navigate shallow waters To set basic Water Contours 1 In the Water Contours Options field set the depth for the First Contour line 5 10 or 15 feet 2 Set the depth for the Second Contour line 15 20 or 25 feet 3 Use the Gradual or Filled check boxes to make the color behavior gradient to completely fill the contour with a single color or both 4 Click OK to close the Options window Click the down arrow next to the Depth Contours tool on the ToolBar and select Show Custom Contours to see your changes onscreen Custom Contours Tab Bathy Recorder Only When the Bathy Recorder product is installed Custom Contours become available The Contours Tab is renamed Custom Contours and now contains one d
242. ile until you click Stop WARNING Recording radar files consumes large amounts of hard drive space in short periods You may want to delete radar files or back them up once they are no longer needed Decluttering the Radar Declutter Hot Key In the InSight Radar window pane or a chart window with Radar Overlay press and hold down the space bar to clear the windows of any radar objects other than the radar return itself This gives you a radar image free of all objects including the range rings the Variable Range Marker etc When finished let up on the space bar and your radar image will return to normal Standard InSight Radar With Decluttering Figure 21 16 Decluttering Comparison Resizing the Radar Image The InSight Radar window pane can be resized like any standard Window In addition the size of the radar image can be adjusted to fit the window pane or maximized so that the radar takes up more of the window space Right click on the Radar window pane and choose either Fit or Clip a be Fit Mode Clip Mode Figure 21 17 Fit or Clip Comparison Using Radar in Admiral Advanced Features Nobeltec s Admiral product is designed specifically for the nautical market and is laid out onscreen in a look and feel called NavView Although it is designed for low light and other navigation specific conditions NavView can also function using touchscreen monitors Buttons and menu entries are oversized and easy to read
243. iling Set and Drift Effect on Lay Lines Currents can greatly impact a boat s ability to reach a Mark Polar calculations only take into account Speed Over Water given wind angle and speed but current information can play an equally crucial part in determining optimal lay lines Figure 24 7 shows how a following a suggested Lay line might place you off course over time if you do not account for currents True Windy AO DI ugo pA Lo Using wind only lay lines PA h Ne 7 ka this boat would find itself Current S p o N out of position and 7 N fighting the current to r N Ps N N make the mark 7 p Pad N N va VY f oe a N N 4 AN gt A Pi N 7 r N f F ri wW Jy N 7 N Faf d Figure 24 7 Lay Lines and the Impact of Set and Drift Adding Set and Drift calculations Tools Options Sailing Use Set amp Drift in Sailing Calculations can improve your overall Lay line calculation and increase your accuracy see Figure 24 8 True Wind A Current Laylines are adjusted so that the boat does not run off course Figure 24 8 Lay Lines Adjusted to Account for Set and Drift Additional Features Ockam and B amp G Instrument Support Sailing Plus Pack includes limited support for Ockam and B amp G instruments NOTE A full list of Ockam and B amp G Protocol sentences are listed in Chapter 3 Hardware Setup Listening for Ockam or B amp G Protocols 1 Open Tools Opt
244. in 1 or 2 degrees of the route heading N I 3 fas fav 110 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Create a Route This trip requires you to create one big route or several smaller ones You could create one big route that loops all the way around or individual routes that go from Miami to Bimini Bimini to Freeport Freeport to Fort Lauderdale and Fort Lauderdale to Miami The vessel heading HDG route heading and course over ground aa v z I N COG should match For the purpose of this example create a single route Draw the route using the Route tool When finished name the route something appropriate like Miami to Bahamas May 2006 You can also name individual waypoints in Es the route These could be named for key events such as snorkeling and diving an ae spots or favorite fishing locations In addition name key waypoints along the Figure 17 1 Heading Sensor Test way that mark stops in your trip such as Bimini Freeport and Fort Lauderdale After finishing the route lock the route and waypoint s so that you don t i accidentally delete or move any key route information To lock the entire Putting It All Together route including all waypoints right click on any route leg and select The following section describes in general how you would use all of the Locking Lock Route and Marks If you decide to edit the route or a features and tools insid
245. ince Passport 3D Bathymetric charts are only available in North America and Hawaii you can use the ChartGridding feature to create 3D sea floor topographic data from 2D vector charts in areas where those high resolution sea floor charts are unavailable ChartGridding can also be used to supplement existing vector data even in places where the high resolution 3D sea floor topographic data is available E Hobettec U18005 1 736 560 8 140 205 nm gt Feet UNITED STATES WEST COAST CAPE BLANCO TO CAPE FLATTERY si x Be Edt yew Toots Raily Sounder Saing Window teb PPEAKRJGOAA AVX OMSCBAVONAA Val Pn ew eS DBA BECO GBA ka h ew U1 8003 1 736 540 ets 140 283 ams 1 UFeeth Nobeinec ji Lat 46 13 646N on 123 50 893 W j ji il p LHdgUps N A LUNGS N A E N A Leewsy N A Oii MCR Wester f Status Messages Dive mri Jac O Tages Dserh AJPS Tmp Selected Object Last Clicked Location 46 70 856 N 125 23 387 W 65 476 om MIT JO Depth 7106 ft Deso Tooltip 6 20 193 N 123 20 592 W 71 901 ren O79 30 Chev 2020 ft Cursor Poution Figure 12 1 3D Navigator Window Tiled with Vector Chapter 12 3D Navigator 83 Opening the 3D Navigator Window The 3D Navigator allows you to view the ocean floor and land ina graphic three dimensional window Use this window to gain a new perspective on fishing spots navigation channels harbor entrances and other interesting sea floor terrain To open
246. include GPS Strength Opens the GPS Strength window which contains a Figure 18 4 NavView InfoBar diagram of a relative sky with the location of available satellites e Trip Information Data related to this Trip displays in the subsequent dynamic fields of this tab Fields and buttons include ee l S D G h Target A26 Unknown Pa 1 2 Km eno 4 8 Km soa 8 2 kts AT 48 12 699 N t a 18m 09s mc 72 T cos 267 T won 12 59 826 W The following list describes information available on the InfoBar e Vessel Position Speed and Heading Provides Vessel Lat Lon Speed Over Ground SOG Course Over Ground COG and Heading HDG Trip Displays your trip number Trip 1 or Trip 2 Course to Steer CTS Heading HDG Water Temperature WTR and Distance Total distance in units travelled during this Trip Depth DPT e Time Set The date and time that the selected Trip started e Screen Cursor Displays Lat Lon of cursor and Range and Bearing from e Duration Hours minutes and seconds the selected Trip has lasted vessel to cursor e Avg Speed Average speed of your boat during the selected Trip e Active Mark 1 Displays Range RNG Bearing BRG Estimated Time of Arrival ETA and Time to Go TTG for the active mark By right clicking on a waypoint and selecting Use for ETA TTG Calculations you can display TTG ETA for a waypoint other
247. ind Indicator Recent True Wind Angles Lay Lines and Widest Lay Lines Seen Apparent Wind Indicator is drawn on top of all other options The average Lay line is based on the last 10 minutes of true wind speed and direction To Configure Wind Indicators and Lay Lines 1 Select Options from the Sailing menu to open Tools Options Sailing Chapter 24 Sailing 181 2 From the available options select the settings you want for wind Polar Display Denetnau 42 FE ENR JF ota ninpiay lt Gutissar 50 indicator fields lay line fields colors line widths Time To Go and so on eT ii Tor Wd woeada to duplar Disk P Pe al Lod Edt J i Chak pd 3 Click OK to save your selections Van Elton Actual wi sowed ae paa T Shen Actual wd Speed NOTE See Chapter 8 Properties and Options for a full description of all fields in Tools Options Sailing The following are the onscreen indicators and colors for Sailing options Onscreen Indicator Apparent Wind Default Color Black The Letter A Indicator Color True Wind Default Color Black The letter T Indicator Color Recent True Wind Default Color Black Line color Angles Figure 24 4 Polar Example 1 Figure 24 5 Polar Example 2 Sailing Plus Pack Lay lines are calculated from the polar angles of your boat Boat Lay Lines Default Color Gray Line color Color and drawn from the mark Lay lines are also drawn from the boat to indicate Average Lay Default Color Navy
248. individual Tools 1 Select Tools ToolBars from the Main Menu to open the ToolBar Options menu Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Navigation Software 99 2 Place a check mark next to the name of the Tool or ToolBar that you want to display Remove the check mark to turn the Tool or ToolBar off The list is alphabetical The top 1 4 of the list contains ToolBars the bottom 3 4 of the list are individual Tools The two types are divided by a horizontal black line see Figure 16 1 3 Click OK to complete your changes Changing ToolBar Button Size 1 Select Tools ToolBars from the Main Menu to open the ToolBar Options menu 2 On the right hand side of the ToolBar Options menu you will see a section labeled ToolBar Button Size as shown in Figure 16 1 and three radio buttons with options for Small Medium and Large Click the radio button that corresponds to the size you want to use default setting is Medium 3 Click OK All the Tools and ToolBars that are currently docked or floating above your charts will switch to the new size Because of the change in size you may want to click and drag some of your tools to tighten up the spacing of the Tools and ToolBars Moving Tools and ToolBars ToolBars can be placed or docked on any of the four sides of the program window They can be dragged into a floating position over the main window To move your Tools and ToolBars to a new position or to make them float over the main
249. ine the desired setting for the STC curve profile and click OK i NOTE If the STC curve profile is not set correctly adjusting the sea clutter manual or automatic may not have the desired impact If you notice that increasing the sea clutter control has no impact on the image your STC curve profile is too low On the other hand if you notice that echoes disappear too quickly your STC profile may be too high Range IR2 Radars only i NOTE The following applies only to users of an IR2 Radar Range buttons change the zoom for IR2 BB transmissions but not actual range Range buttons determine the size of the area represented in your InSight Radar window pane from IR2 transmissions Range settings also determine the number and distance of the range rings Click on the Range Up or Range Down buttons to increase or decrease the range of the radar Maximum range depends upon which radar model you own The Range setting is shown in the upper left hand corner of the InSight Radar window pane When you change the range it may take 1 2 seconds to update the radar display N l q S S Ka D 144 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide meem njala rm a ale Ring Interval No of Ri Range Up and Down Range nm Prso g J 2 16 24 36 a a 72 96 The Range Levels buttons are designed to give you the ability to range out or in to a given level with a single click Depending on your radar type these No of Ri Rang
250. information Priority is Surface data temp and pressure Waves height period direction Visibility Tropical and Radar Weather All weather data available through Nobeltec Navigation Software is produced by third parties and compiled using several reliable national and international sources Weather Provider options are GRIB Weather XM WxWorx Weather Plus Pack SkyMate Weather Nobeltec Weather SkyMate and XM WXWorx Weather both require that you have purchased and installed the appropriate satellite hardware When you change Weather Providers it may take a few minutes before data from the new Weather Provider displays on screen i NOTE Weather data does not display over 3D charts To display weather data in Nobeltec Navigation Software 1 Choose the weather provider you wish to use 2 Download weather data onto your computer via Web satellite radio access cell phone or email attachment 3 Configure and display the weather data i NOTE SkyMate and XM WxWorx Weather require you to have the appropriate hardware to view that data For Admiral users OCENS WeatherNet ships with your software ready for easy installation and use To use the WeatherNet GRIB download service for weather overlay you must subscribe to the OCENS weather data service Once you have selected a Weather Provider and installed any appropriate hardware and software pertinent to that provider use the Tools Options Weather Tab to
251. ing Chart Centering Double click while pointing at a location on the chart to center the chart at that position Arrow Keys If your keyboard has combined number pad arrow keys make sure that lt NumLock gt is off Hold down lt Ctrl lt t gt arrow keys to pan the chart a very small amount or lt lt T gt to pan a greater distance Center on Boat Command Quickly centers view on the boat position Multiple Chart Windows Use the Copy Window command to display more than one chart window at a time Click Window Copy Window to copy the existing chart window From the main menu click on Window Tile Vertically or Window Tile Horizontally to automatically fit multiple chart windows into the workspace Zooming Overzooming Use the following methods to zoom in or out e lt gt and lt gt keys on your keyboard or ToolBar Click your mouse scroll button once and then scroll up or down with the mouse scroll button to zoom in or out Right click on the chart window and select Other Charts from the pop up menu to select a chart scale e Drag Zoom Drag and drop the mouse diagonally across the screen to create a zoom in field WARNING Nobeltec contains a safety feature called Overzoom Notification If a chart is displayed on the screen at a resolution greater than its source scale the user will be visually notified by the word OVERZOOM in the title bar and diagonal lines across the chart see Figur
252. ing Network Charts 126 Closed Boundary Closed Boundary Tool 101 Computer Clock 98 Connections 95 Autopilot 95 Settings 95 Wiring 95 Console Docked 105 Helmsman Display 106 Panels 105 Context Sensitive Help 101 Copy Window 107 Course Up 36 101 Course Up Tool 101 Crossing the perpendicular 96 Cross Track Error 48 187 CrystalView 101 CrystalView Tool 101 Current Arrows Tool 101 Customizing Nobeltec 99 D Data 31 Data Backup 97 Dead Reckoning 46 Deviation Table 46 Dongle 3 121 Download 97 DSC Enabled Marine Radio DSC Directory 129 E Estimating Arrival Time 68 ETA Calculator 23 Exporting 73 F Fishfinder See Sounder Fuel Consumption 69 G Ghost Cursor Ghost Cursor Tool 101 Glossary amp Index GlassBridgeTM Network Advanced Networking Settings 125 Benefits 121 Clearing Network Charts 126 Configuring 123 Data Sharing 121 124 Listen to NMEA Data 124 Overview 121 Radar Sharing 121 Raw NMEA Sharing 124 Routes amp Marks Home 125 Security Dongle 121 Send NMEAData 124 Setting up 123 Tools Options Data Sharing 62 GPS 109 Electrical Connection 9 GPS Port Setup Wizard 6 GPS Hardware Setup 9 Manual GPS Settings 10 NMEA Support 11 H Hand Panning 35 Heading Sensor 109 Helmsman Display 191 Help Tips 106 InSight Radar 2 IR2 135 InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB 135 137 IR2 BB 137 Installation Installing Charts 4 Installing New Chart Permits and Product Unlock Codes 6
253. ings x Display Settings Polar Values Active Polar Active polar file name NO POLAR SELECTED Polar Name Load Polar File Save Polar Save Polar As Save YMG Targets Edit polar data Wind speed Polar Values True Wind Angle Boat Speed be ol Add Wind Delete Wind Add Row Delete Selected Row For a selected wind speed you can add or edit True Wind Angles and the associated target or known boat speed Changes will be immediately updated in the Polar Display Figure 8 26 Polar Display Settings Polar Values tab Save Polar Click to save any changes that have been made A message will ask Do you want to save this polar Once saved changes made cannot be undone Click Yes to save changes or No to return to the main Polar Display Settings window without saving changes Save Polar As Click to save the changes to a new polar file name A Save As dialog opens with the My Polars folder as the default folder You can however browse to any other location Save VMG Targets Click this button to save the best upwind and downwind angles to a tab delimited text file You can import this file into Excel or another program or print it to use as a reference on deck Edit Polar Data You can select any wind speed that is stored in the polar file By default the lowest wind speed in the Polar File appears Use the Add Wind and Delete Wind buttons to manage your polar data There is no limit to
254. ints are shown in green and red Layover waypoints are shown in blue Layover waypoints are used in the Layover Time column to account for stop over time To calculate input the number of hours until planned departure Marks Use the Marks Tab to make calculations between the boat and a single point Tracks This Tab displays current plotting and previous tracks Use the Goto function to find old tracks or convert tracks into routes The Tracks Tab is also where you can delete or edit tracks from previous voyages Boundaries Use this Tab to view a list of boundary objects You can delete and import or export from this Tab as well Chapter 4 Basic Screens 21 The PlanBook displays the details about specific sets of data Displays a summary of the route Click here to open the It makes calculations based on user defined criteria Input selected from the list ETA Calculator departure time and speed for a route and it will display arrival times for each waypoint Select the Routes Marks Tracks or Boundaries Tabs PlanBook 5 x to edit these data types Routes Marks Tracks Boundaries PlanBogk Route Options are Route Options Route Summary shown here Sa Departure Date Time 1272972006 1239 55 PM Waypoints 2 i Distance Starting to Ending WP 22 266 nm SS Nobeltec 7l Distance Origin to Ending WP 90 025 nm ETA Secondary Tab displays Origin 55 Nobeltec abcd ETA to Ending WP 01 406 00 42 Calculator
255. ion jao 4 E i 180 0 180 Deviation Defaults Figure 21 7 Radar Initial Setup Adjusting the Radar Heading Line Rotation It is not always possible to install a radar so that the front of the radar is exactly parallel with the boat s keel or center line The Radar Heading Line adjustment can compensate for this discrepancy This process allows you to align the radar transceiver with the center line of the boat and only needs to be set once This is a different function than aligning your heading sensor so please verify that you are adjusting the radar s physical heading line to match the center line of your boat A REMEMBER You must have a heading sensor connected to your computer Without a heading sensor Nobeltec Navigation Software cannot align the image correctly onto the chart for radar overlay To quickly verify Heading data add Heading Sensor data to the console by using the Tools Options Console feature Although you may attempt to make the Radar Heading Line Rotation alignment using visual verification it is far more reliable to perform this function using the radar overlay feature If charted land does not appear to line up correctly with the radar output for the same land mass use the rotate scroll bar to adjust the rotation angle until the overlaid image aligns correctly To adjust Radar Heading Line Rotation 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation Software and open a Radar window pane 2 Once a radar ima
256. ions Ports Configure 2 Inthe Input Ports column place a check mark next to the COM Port the Ockam or B amp G hardware is connected to 3 Click Configure This Input Port 4 Inthe COM n Input Configuration field select B amp G or Ockam from the Protocol drop down list then click OK NOTE To set your COM Port to read NMEA this is the default follow the same steps but select NMEA 0183 from the Protocol drop down list AY WARNING Support for Ockam and B amp G protocols has been tested on a limited basis Use these options with caution and be prepared to rollback to NMEA if you are not receiving proper values using these protocols Adding a Polar Diagram to NavView You can add a polar diagram to NavView using the View Manager To Add a Polar Diagram to a NavView 1 Enter NavView by clicking the NavView button on the main ToolBar by selecting Window NavView or by pressing lt F9 gt Select View Select View Manager Edit a view as you normally would see Chapter 18 NavView View Manager for instructions selecting Polar as one of the view options in the Edit the Layout window NOTE If you import a polar file from another program Jeppesen Marine highly advises that you make a backup of that file first Chapter 24 Sailing 183 No A l wa 9 o S 184 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide 25 Tender Tracker Admiral What is Tender Tracker The Nobeltec Tender Tracker Plus
257. ions on top of your navigation system 1 Open any chart located inside of the weather region you purchased Weather overlay is most useful when viewed zoomed out to look at large geographic areas When zoomed in you can get an incorrect perception of the overall weather system 2 Click on the Weather tab of the NavBar 3 From the Weather Region section of the Weather Tab select the region of weather to display on top of your charts Nobeltec Weather Region Once you have downloaded weather data select the weather region you are using If multiple regions are installed use the drop down menu to toggle between them Nobeltec Weather Date Use the Back Today and Next buttons under the Weather Date section of the Weather Tab The extent of how far you can view future or past files depends on the number of days available at your service level Nobeltec Weather Options The following are Nobeltec weather overlay options If an option field is grayed out that type of overlay is not available in the file you loaded Barometric Pressure e Wind e Ocean Currents e Sea State e Swell e Weather Systems and Fronts e Tropical Storm Information e Sea Surface Temperature Nobeltec Base and Valid Times Nobeltec weather data is produced by a third party who gathers worldwide weather data observations from a variety of sources and combines them into a single weather prediction source Chapter 13 Wind amp Weather 93 Var
258. ious types of data are shown using traditional weather symbols The Key values are display types can be changed through Tools Options Weather Weather ToolBar Button shown as text der Sailing Window Help la x Daar ORDA i Uv I a Ro gt S 3 XTE N A Rng N A Brg N A SOG N A COG N A VMG WND N A wr N A AWA N A AWS N A UJ Weather region and subscription level shown here Qinfo PME weather A Status Messages Active Mark jf TAC Targets YJSearch GPS Trip x ather Region _ Weather Date Weather Overlays _ Conditions at Cursor Pressure 1023 3 mb North F cific Bronze v Mon 8 14 2006 NM Pressure D well P Current 0 3 kts SSW Wind T Fome m a Forecast M Curen P Sone Click here to ee Ks Back Toda Next M S a tT tec Notas download the N weather from the Nobeltec Website Use these controls to change the date The overlays available for each subscription and time of the Valid Date This is the date to displayed weather ae here Click to display each Value at cursor for which the weather forecast selected layers are applies shown here Figure 13 3 Additional Weather Tools Nobeltec Weather Provider D S O35 S 5 l A 94 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Due to the time it takes to gather the data each day the completed wea
259. is Yes Transducer Offset Use this field to indicate the vertical distance from the surface of the water to the transducer s installed location This distance is then used to calculate actual bottom depth and for monitoring the shallow water alarm Transducer offset is required for use with DBT and DPT NMEA sentences only Temperature amp Speed Calibration Both temperature and speed values may need calibration Should you be suspicious that the temperature reported is off by a degree or two or that the indicated Chapter 8 Properties amp Options Sounder Colors Select a Sounder Color Theme Deep Blue Reset Theme to Defaults Sounder Returns Select Single Solid or Gradient to choose a palette effect Weakest Strongest C Singe Solid Gradient Option Setting Bottom Line Shallow Water Indicator Use Sea Floor Color Sea Floor Text Background Close 63 speed is too fast or slow use these controls to adjust the end values 50 kHz and 200 kHz Gain Calibration Both of these controls are used to adjust the gain applied to each frequency If you feel that one frequency or the other doesn t have the appropriate level of gain use these controls to calibrate accordingly Colors From the Tools Options Sounder tab you can access the Sounder Colors dialog box Figure 8 23 Sounder Colors e The Background Color is used to paint the background of the Sounder Display e The H
260. isplay data sent from Admiral as it receives it both locally and across the network allowing you to determine if the problem is related to the software or the hardware Troubleshooting Chart Sharing To share Passport Charts between computers on the GlassBridge Network each copy of Admiral must have its own security Dongle in place From the GlassBridge Network Tab in the Tools Options menu be sure that the Enable Advanced Networking option is checked and that the Chart Sharing option is set to Yes or Ask When each copy of Admiral starts up it will attempt to join the GlassBridge Network As long as Chart Sharing is enabled Passport vector chart sharing is automatic Messages indicating that charts are sent or received will appear in the Status Messages Tab of the NavBar If Chart Sharing is not working properly please contact technical support Clearing Network Charts If you have selected Chart Sharing Admiral will check the other computers on the Glass Bridge Network for charts not currently installed on your computer It will install them locally if they are on another computer If you are not connected to the other computers on the GlassBridge Network the charts are not permitted to be displayed If at some later time you wish to uninstall the network charts because the computer containing the permits will not be available or to refresh the collection of shared charts across the Glass Bridge Network then use the following pr
261. it from your hard drive but does not delete the 2 In the left menu place a check mark next to the data type you wish to permit code for Passport World Charts so you can reinstall without requiring view such as Routes The right window will display a list of all objects new permit codes of that data type currently saved in the program To Uninstall Charts 3 Click ona specific object such as Route 12 in the right window to 1 Click File Chart Table and select the Uninstall Tab locate Right click on the object and select Locate This from the pop up 2 Select Charts from the drop d box menu The object will display in the center of the chart ee ee nr eerie 3 Select one or more charts to uninstall Selected charts are then highlighted in blue 4 Click Uninstall Chast Table x pen Obci inate United Guiting E ne s aeaa naani E Close the dialog by clicking Done Bs a Y Click on a folder to view The Quilting Tab Oe moe objects of that type eet aa Bs aa seen The Quilting Tab of the Chart Table can be used to add or remove charts palaai Ti S from the quilt This may be necessary because of chart projection chart skew Eai a e angle or personal preference For instance if notes from one chart cover Hous OSI on Pinte navigable water on another chart Use the lt Q gt Hot Key to toggle Quilting on mae and off Figure 5 6 Objects Tab of the Chart Table
262. it to the amount of wind speeds that can be stored in the polar file e Polar Values Grid Use this grid to add update or delete polar values If all polar values are deleted the corresponding wind speed will also be deleted To add individual values tab to the end of the row and a new row will appear To delete an entry select the row and press the lt Delete gt Hot Key or select the row and click Delete Selected Row Polar Display Settings x Display Settings Polar Values Active Polar Active polar file name NO POLAR SELECTED Polar Name Load Polar File Save Polar Save Polar As Save VMG Targets Edit polar data Wind speed Polar Values True Wind Angle Boat Speed Yv Add Wind Delete Wind Add Row Delete Selected Row For a selected wind speed you can add or edit True Wind Angles and the associated target or known boat speed Changes will be immediately updated in the Polar Display Cancel Apply Help Figure 24 3 Polar Display Settings Polar Values tab Managing Polar Files Editing a Polar File AM TIP In order to enter Editing mode when using your mouse you must select a single polar speed and unlock the polar file by ensuring the Lock Edit check box on the Polar Display is clear There are several ways to edit a polar file e Keyboard lIn the Polar Display Settings window Polar Values tab add or delete wind speeds and polar values using the controls in the
263. ith Raster charts enabling CrystalView will improve the print quality when not printing in Proof mode Printing Tides and Currents Information Nobeltec Navigation Software can print information about any of the tide or current stations displayed on a chart When you want to print this information the printing is actually done through the Tides amp Currents program which is a separate program from Nobeltec Navigation Software To print tides or currents data 1 Activate tide and current overlays by clicking on the Tide Bar button or Current Arrow button on the ToolBar You can also turn these on by right clicking on the chart and selecting Display Current Arrows or Display Tide Bars from the pop up menu 2 Right click on the tide bar or current arrow for which you would like to print a report 3 Click the View in Tides amp Currents This opens Tides amp Currents and displays the tide or current station in a graphical format i S 76 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide 4 From the Tides amp Currents program click File Print or click on the Print button for more printing options To print the window as it appears click File Quick Print or click on the Quick Print button 5 Using the Tides amp Currents print options dialog box see Figure 10 2 select how you would like your tide or current printout to appear 6 When finished click the X button in the upper most right hand corn
264. k Instant Waypoint Split b Frequency b Options Shallow Water Alarm Enable Shallow Waker Alarm w Live Mode Demo Mode Record Playback Mode Figure 22 3 Sounder Right Click Menu The Sounder Menu The Sounder Menu can be accessed from the main program menu see Figure 22 1 From the Sounder Menu you can access features that are not included on the ToolBars In addition the Sounder Menu also allows you to display features such as the A Scope Bottom Line and Depth Scale Operation Modes The InSight Sounder has three modes of operation Cruising Fishing and Manual The first time your Sounder is activated it will automatically start in Cruising Mode e Cruising Mode An automatic mode designed to detect the bottom efficiently without user interaction Less emphasis is given to fish detection in this mode and Gain and Clutter levels are also handled automatically If you leave Sounder in this mode it will search for the bottom indefinitely displaying depth imagery in the display histogram e Fishing Mode Gain and clutter is automatically handled and tailored for fish detection under various conditions Use this mode to search for big fish as well as bait fish with minimal interaction needed e Manual Mode For advanced users Manual Mode provides complete control over all aspects of the depth sounder You are free to modify Gain Clutter Signal Level and Noise filters to adjust the image Adjusti
265. known targets e Only display targets that are not anchored moored or aground Removes any targets from display whose reported status is anchored moored or aground Default setting for this option is Off e Show Specific Target Types Select from the displayed list which Target types you wish to display in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar Targets whose type is not checked in this field will not display Tender Tracker The Tender Directory manages all tenders wave runners jet skis etc that are transmitting data to Nobeltec Navigation Software via the data connection The Tender Directory will display the Tender ID Tender description channel and duration of the tender signal Up to 99 Tenders may be tracked at a given time e Managed Mode Place a check mark in this check box to configure channel and duration settings NOTE Tender Tracker has two modes Autonomous and Managed Channel and Duration only function in Managed Mode e Tender ID Input the numeric value for the Tender you wish to track e Description Input a description of the Tender tracked on this channel The description you input will appear on your charts if you select to display Target Names e Channel Managed Mode only Select the channel this Tender is using to transmit data 1 17 Default is Channel 1 e Duration Managed Mode only Select a duration for this Tender s signal from the drop down menu 0 30 Default is 5 seconds Tools Optio
266. lation Used when contacting Nobeltec website or phone Based on your unique Site Code Nobeltec will generate and provide a Site Key also known as Activation Key Code or Unlock Code Not to be confused with the Site Key Site Key Activation Key North America only Eight letter key ABCD EFGH provided by Nobeltec generated based on your unique Site Code and required to activate Nobeltec Navigation Software during initial installation You have thirty 30 days to use the software before the Site Key is required Not to be confused with the Site Code Slack Water Slack The state of a tidal current when its speed is hear zero especially the moment when a current changes direction and its speed is zero SOG See Speed Over Ground Sonar SOund Navigation And Ranging The usage of ultrasonic pulses to detect submersed objects by their reflection Glossary amp Index 195 Sounder also known as Fish Finder or Depth Sounder A Sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect the distance to the sea floor calculating the time interval between signal transmission and the detected reflected signal SOW See Speed Over Water Speed Over Ground SOG SOG is the actual fixed geographic speed of a ship over the earth s surface It is essentially the Soeed Over Water SOW plus the cumulative effect of wind and current Speed Over Water SOW Sometimes called Speed Through Water STW SOW is the relative speed of the vessel over
267. lay is not required to be visible As long as your Radar and IR2 BB when applicable is powered on and connected radar data will continue to transmit even if you are not currently viewing it onscreen If the guard zone is enabled alarms will still be triggered and targets will continue to be tracked by the radar even without an onscreen display N l q S S Ka D S Aa S S S ce l A N 138 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Ghost Cursor When in Multiple paned window mode one way to compare the electronic chart and the radar is to use a function called Ghost Cursor Ghost Cursor is enabled by selecting Yes from Tools Options Radar Show Ghost Cursor To show the Ghost Cursor move your cursor over the Radar or Chart window pane A mimic cursor will follow the primary cursor s movements in the other window pane in the same relative position Ghost Cursor is particularly useful when trying to understand more about certain radar targets By hovering your cursor over the radar target in question you can see its exact location on the chart Radar Chart Overlay Ke J Overlay Radar Image on Chart You can overlay the Radar image A directly on top of the Chart window pane aligning the Radar with the chart until all targets are displayed on the chart in their exact location Radar overlay helps you navigate the chart better and the chart brings context to what can often be a confusing displa
268. le forward through all configured views lt Shift F6 gt toggles in the reverse direction Making Changes in NavView Admiral supports nearly all of the settings that are found in the PlanView display version of the software You do not have to switch to PlanView mode in order to make detailed changes The program options are accessible from NavView Most program options are configured using the following methods The Tools Options Dialog The Tools Options dialog is covered in detail in Chapter 8 Properties amp Options To access this menu 1 Click the Other button on the main NavView menu 2 Click the Options button and the Tools Options dialog will appear 3 When finished using the Tools Options dialog click OK Menus You can change the look of NavView by turning items such as the Menu Buttons and the InfoBar on and off When these items are hidden the entire screen is dedicated to just the chart providing you with a full screen view of your surroundings To hide and display these items use the following steps 1 Click the Menu button in the lower right corner to hide and redisplay the Menu buttons 2 Click the Info button and the InfoBar will be shown or hidden 3 Click the Tool button to hide or show the Tool Bar Right Mouse Menus The Right Mouse Menus still appear in NavView just as they would if you were operating in PlanView If you are using a touchscreen monitor you can use the Right click
269. libration settings can be shared across the network Any networked computer can alter the Sounder controls Sounder controls available to be manipulated by any computer attached to the GlassBridge Network include Split type Fish Cruise Manual demo live range auto range shift frequency gain clutter signal level and noise All systems attached to the GlassBridge Network will see all data sent on the network by the InSight Sounder Any Sounder window open on any PC will mirror the Sounder window on all other PCs on the network e ke l y S m Xa gt 3 1 S m 126 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide In Live and Demo mode all pings are shared across the network In Playback mode pings are not shared InSight Sounder users not connected to Sounder via an RS 422 cable will need to run the GPS Port Setup Wizard on each computer that needs to view Sounder data Refer to the InSight Sounder User s Guide for further instructions on using the GPS Port Setup Wizard Sharing Active Routes Marks and Waypoints When navigating it is very useful to see the active waypoint on all computers on the GlassBridge Network To share this information between computers click Tools Options and then select the GlassBridge Network Tab Once the GlassBridge Network Tab options are on your screen click Accept Active Waypoints from other Computers Whenever another station creates or moves an active
270. lick Next Radar Setup Wizard Searching For Radars Listening for radar connections The Radar Setup Wizard is listening to all available ports on your system Please turn the radar unit ON at this time and the Radar Setup Wizard will detect the port to which the radar is connected Checking Checking Got Data Radar Found Radar Found Click Next to Proceed lt Back Cancel Figure 2 4 Radar Setup Wizard Searching for Radars You may need to wait up to 30 seconds while the radar warms up Once the radar is warmed up and transmitting data the Radar Setup Wizard will show you a small view of what your radar output will look like Click Adjust to open a Radar Control window Use this window to modify your radar settings and improve radar viewing onscreen a It may take a few minutes for the changes to be applied before you can verify changes made to your radar output in the small view b Continue making incremental adjustments until you are satisfied with the radar output No A S S A S S vka WA S i N 7 8 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Radar Setup Wizard Adjust Radar Image Radar Image Adjustment Use the Adjust button below to adjust the radar image The Gain STC FTC and other settings can be adjusted Click on Next when done PC to radar Radar to PC lt Back Next gt Cancel Figure 2 5 Radar Setup Wizard A
271. licked Once you ve identified a target the Nobeltec Navigation Software will process radar data for a few revolutions before displaying the tracked target MARPA Symbology Nobeltec uses the IMO approved MARPA symbology Attempting to acquire target Dashed box Tracking target Vector shows course and speed Target is a threat because it is inside the alarm setting Showing course and speed through the vector Red Triangle with Vector flashes red and yellow Typically takes up to 7 full Green Circle rotations with Vector gt NV Lost target Attempting to re acquire Yellow Diamond Downward pointing Target is within Guard Zone Triangle Table 21 3 MARPA Symbols The predictor line extending from the target symbol gives an estimate of target course and speed The end of the predictor line shows the position where barring changes the target will be in a designated amount of time AN rr If the MARPA target is lost another feature of the Point and Click Radar is to use your mouse to drag the symbol back over the radar echo to help it re acquire You can also delete targets with the right click When a target is lost color flashes between red and purple Once a target has been acquired you can see it in the Radar Console as we saw earlier in the chapter or on the Targets tab of the NavBar as shown here ane moe wearer sau mean Bacia mark GUTS O Targets serch ACH PENOR
272. list The Tracks Tab The Tracks Tab of the PlanBook see Figure 9 5 lists all the tracks you have created and allows you to edit each track by name and visibility settings To edit track properties 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Tracks Tab 2 Double click on the track you wish to edit to open the Track properties dialog box 3 You can edit the name of the track or add a description Click the small X in the upper right corner of the Properties dialog box to close it Deleting Tracks When there are large volumes of tracks and individual track points within each track your PC may begin to perform noticeably slower than normal To Chapter 9 PlanBook 71 avoid this delete or export your tracks on a regular basis You may want to backup your tracks prior to deleting them with the Import Export function 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu Click on the Tracks Tab 2 Click on the track that you would like to delete and then click the Delete Track button A PlanBook o x Routes Marks Tracks Boundaries PlanBook Name Show Marks Length Start Ti End Tim Duration VESSELTRAC X 2 D ft 8 30 20C 8 30 20C 0 hrs 0 min 1 sec VESSELTRAC X 2 D ft 8 30 20C 8 30 20C 0 hrs 0 min 3 sec 0 222 nm 8 30 20C 8 30 20C 0 hrs 1 min 26 sec VESSELTRAC X 2 Create Route From Track Export
273. ll be provided by the GPS and you can enter values for set and drift Calculating Set and Drift for Dead Reckoning If the GPS is connected but boat heading and speed instrumentation are not COG and SOG will be displayed in their respective panels If there is GPS failure and Automatic Simulation is selected previous values for SOG and COG will show in those fields Input speed and heading into the text boxes to generate values for set and drift Calculating SOG and COG for Dead Reckoning Calculations for Speed Over Ground and Course Over Ground are important if you have no GPS or if it is not working If your GPS fails the software may be set up to simulate boat movement according to the last recovered SOG and COG values If you have no GPS follow the instructions for enabling Dead Reckoning entering values for speed heading drift and set into the appropriate text boxes Track Tab Tracks are a graphical representation of the historical path s of your vessel They are made up of a series of track points connected by line segments whose length depends on the frequency of track point recording You can configure the frequency of those track points using the Track Tab Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 47 Before you can make edits to items in the Track Tab turn on the tracking feature by placing a check mark in the check box next to Enable Boat Track Recording or by clicking on the Tracking button on the ToolBar Enable
274. lowing e None No base layer e Radar Radar data from XM is overlaid on the chart A tooltip will display the dBZ of the echo if gt 10 dBZ e Surface Shows surface pressure as contour lines and water temperature as a color graph wind speed as arrows or barbs depending on Tools Options Weather selection e Waves Wave period displays as contour lines The wave height is displayed as a color graph wave direction as arrows e Visibility Displays as contour lines e Fronts Icons for high and low pressure centers with lines for fronts e Satellite Satellite view clouds are overlaid on the chart e Radar Fronts Combines radar and fronts display e Radar Satellite Combines radar and satellite display e Fronts Satellite Combines fronts and satellite display e Radar Fronts Satellite Combines radar fronts and satellite display XM Weather Layers Base Weather Layer Additional Weather Layers None Lightning Strikes C Radar Tropical Surface Radar Coverage C Waves Buoy Reports Visibility Storm Cells C Fronts City Forecast Satellite C Radar Fronts C Radar Satellite C Fronts Satellite C Radar Fronts Satellite Figure 13 2 XM Weather Layers The following additional layers can be combined with any of the previous e Lightning Strikes Displays as an icon at the Lat Lon of the strike e Tropical Tropical storms overlaid on the chart e Radar Coverage Semi t
275. lso have the appropriate hardware for any hardware related panels For example if you choose to display the Water Temperature panel you must have an NMEA compatible water temperature sensor connected to the PC Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy V Show Console Display on Console Set Fonts for ALL Panels Docked Panel Border Course Over Ground C Raised Velocity Made Good Waypoint E E Sues Cross Track Error a Range to Active Waypoint e Flat Bearing to Active Waypoint I IGPS or DR Indicator 13D Depth Elevation Under Cursor Set Edit Value Font mee Drift pE ETT Default Configuration Boat Speed zi Edit Label Font C No Border Figure 8 11 Tools Options Console Tab Cancel Apply e To configure the fonts for all panels use the Set Fonts for ALL Panels buttons To configure the font for an individual panel right click on that panel in the Console Display not Tools Options Console and choose Change Font e You may also configure the Docked Panel Border which controls how panel borders will appear onscreen Raised Sunken Flat or No Border e The Default Configuration button resets all panels to the default settings e Changes you make will take effect once you click either OK o
276. lt value 0 5 NM by typing or using the up or down arrow keys 4 Close the Properties dialog box Changing the Default Arrival Distance To change the default Arrival Distance value for any new marks or waypoints that you create 1 Select Tools Options from the Main Menu or click the Options button on your ToolBar Then select the Misc Tab 2 Click on Set Default Waypoint Arrival Distance A small dialog box will open allowing you to set a new Arrival Distance value Input a value then click OK 4 Click OK on the Options dialog box when you are finished 15 Upload Download Special Notice Regarding Data Backup Nobeltec makes a copy of your daily user created data It saves the last five copies 1 5 5 is always the oldest file and stores them in the Backup directory which is by default C Program Files Nobeltec Software Name Database Backup 1 txt If you accidentally delete data that was created in a previous Nobeltec session you can reload it from one of these backup files Admiral or Visual Navigation Suite How to Restore an Archived Backup NOTE You cannot retrieve data older than 5 sessions without expert help 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation Software 2 Click on File Navigation Objects Import from Text File 3 Click Browse and browse to C Program Files Nobeltec Software Name Database Backup 4 Select 1 txt the most recent file and click Open 5 Verify the data by clicking the list of
277. m Tools Options Units To create a Tender Guard Zone 1 Open the Boat Properties Alarms dialog box using Edit Boat Properties or right click on the Boat select Properties from the pop up menu then select the Alarms tab 2 Place a check mark in the Tender Alarm check box 3 Click the pd button to open the Tender Alarm Settings window Input a distance from the boat that you do not wish the Tender to exceed This is a 360 radius around the vessel 5 Select how you wish the alarm to function if the Tender crosses the Guard Zone No Sound Sound Once or Sound Continuous 6 Click OK to close the Tender Alarm Settings window Tender Alarm Settings x Trigger alarm when Tender leaves 0 0500 nm of vessel Cancel Sound C No Sound f Sound Once C Sound Continuous Figure 25 3 Tender Alarm Settings gt lt S a wa S 188 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Glossary Activation Key See Site Key Active route mark etc An active route or mark is that from which various data such as ETA range and bearing are calculated with respect to the vessel If autopilot is enabled it will steer toward an active mark and will proceed along an active route Aft Means towards the stern of the boat Aids to Navigation Usually pertains to buoys ranges and the like Air Draft The maximum height of a ship Als See Automatic Identification System ARPA See Automatic
278. maintain a range that allows the sea floor to be viewed Enable Auto Range by clicking the Auto Range button on the Sounder ToolBar which also enables the Increase Range and Decrease Range buttons Click Auto Range again to turn off the automatic mode and enable the manual range buttons Sounder ToolBar eS BT R Ey Ev E Auto Range Adjusting the Shift TV Ukdee4 2 45 era be JES 75 F Gee TA i TH UA IGO4 2 WE eet Be Lh dak Bt ee Ds 3 sy ra im ee 4 Figure 22 6 No Shift Applied Figure 22 7 Same Screen with Shift Applied When the sea floor depth exceeds a practical maximum setting expanding Range causes Sounder returns to become too small to view clearly The Shift function narrows return to only a portion of Sounder data To adjust the Shift use the Shift Up and Shift Down buttons Sounder ToolBar B L WE R W N S Shift Up Shift Down Split Views The Split View function allows you to display multiple frequencies Select a Split View from the Open Sounder Window button or from the Sounder menu Available selections are Bottom Zoom Custom Zoom Bottom Lock Sea Floor Discrimination and Dual Frequency No Split returns the Sounder Display to a single frequency view without a split When a Split View is selected any range or shift adjustment to the Sounder Display is applied to the side that has the focus The focus represented by a yellow box drawn around the outside of the one side of the Split View or t
279. make constant changes to your travel plans and may need to make edits to your route and waypoint Although this section is intended to provide you with an example of how to use the program for voyaging purposes there are many more features that are not covered in this example As you continue to use the program you will find that there are several ways to perform the same task Your primary concern is to enjoy yourself and the ease of using Nobeltec Navigation Software and hardware We hope that you continue to explore all the features that Nobeltec solutions offer 18 NavView Admiral Only NavView is an alternative user interface offering nearly all of the same features found in PlanView In addition to providing a maximum viewable area on the screen NavView can operate in a multiple monitor environment and is ideal for touchscreens and rough water To enter NavView press lt F9 gt click Window Enter NavView or the Enter NavView button on the ToolBar To return to PlanView press lt F9 gt or Exit s 19 0 kts cm N A wm NJA i 19 41 912 W con 4 T pa 194 T cer N A Figure 18 1 NavView User Interface Mode Menu Buttons The list below describes the Menu Buttons that appear on the right hand side of the NavView window Some buttons also have sub menus Click Back at any time to exit a sub menu The main NavView Menu Buttons are Center on Boat Centers active chart window on the vessel icon e Instant Waypoint
280. me you open the Nobeltec program You can disable this feature by selecting Help Tips from the Main Menu and clicking the check box in the lower left corner of the Tips dialog Star Navigator The Star Navigator is a celestial sight reduction tool This feature is available from the main menu by selecting Tools Other Tools Star Navigator See Star Navigator s online help for more information Managing Windows Because you can open as many chart windows as you like Nobeltec includes tools to help you manage how they are arranged on the screen To close all open window panes click lt Ctrl Shift F4 gt Window List Each time you open a new chart window that chart is added to a list that appears on the bottom of the Window option on the Main Menu To view a particular chart that is obscured by another chart click on Window on the Main Menu and then on the name of the chart Copy Window This command opens an additional chart window identical in scale and position to the active chart window Tile Vertically Horizontally These commands evenly divide the workspace and arrange the chart windows into vertically or horizontally oriented rectangles Cascade Cascade resizes and positions the chart windows so that all title bars are visible SS e Figure 16 3 Tile Vertically Tile Horizontally and Cascade Chapter 16 Customizing Nobeltec Navigation Software 107 Save and Load User Interface Commands You can cr
281. menu NNS will begin to gather information about this target and generate speed course CPA and TCPA information displayed on the Chart window pane in the same way as other target information Radar ToolBars There are three primary radar ToolBars and a number of secondary ToolBars organized in smaller subsets ToolBars may appear horizontally or vertically by default but can be manipulated onscreen to suit your personal layout configuration requirements NOTE To open non default ToolBars select Tools ToolBars and place a check mark next to any ToolBar you wish to see Click Apply to retain changes The Radar Control ToolBar Auto Sea Clutter Auto Gain Auto Range Radar Tools ToolBar Radar IR Range Transmit Overla Rejection EBL Rings Radar Tools Z eT gt ae VV ABROO EEEREN Open Target VRM Guard Pulse Radar Expansion Zone Length Display Rain Up and Down Chapter 21 Radar Usage 139 Radar Advanced ToolBar Admiral Only Acquire Target Radar Rotation Speed NOTE If you are using the IR2 2kW Dome model the Advanced ToolBar is not available and will appear grayed out Initial Radar Setup Setting the Trigger Delay After successfully installing the radar transmit trigger delay should be reviewed and adjusted in order to compensate for cable transmission delays Longer cables generally require a higher trigger delay setting Setting the Transmit Trigger Delay The transmit trigger delay TxTri
282. mmunications facilities for search and rescue missions USCG maintains a network of aids to navigation including lighthouses buoys icebreakers and radio devices Universal Transverse Mercator Projection UTM UTM is similar to the Mercator projection except the projecting cylinder is mapped transverse to the meridians and the Mercator projection used is a secant variation where the map scale to nominal scale is 0 9996 The UTM segments the earth into 60 six degrees of longitude wide zones where the cylinder is oriented along the central meridian of a zone The zones extend from 84 N to 80 S The sixty zones start 180 degrees east and proceed eastward The usage of zones allows the UTM projection to be used over the entirety of the Earth while minimizing distortion towards the poles Unlock Code See Chart Permit Variable Range Marker VRM Term describing a circle around the boat When enabled the VRM can be manually manipulated to change the radius Variation Also known as Magnetic Variation and Declination The angular difference in direction between true North and magnetic North Vector Chart A chart where chart information is stored in terms of points lines and polygons NCX and TX 97 charts are vector chart formats Velocity Made Good VMG The speed at which the boat is moving towards its intended destination regardless of the ship s direction Vertical Datum For marine applications a base elevation used as
283. move according to last known values e Automatically Activate Next WP Upon WP Arrival Automatically activates the next waypoint as you move within range e Bring Nobeltec on Top When an Alarm is Triggered This option will make Nobeltec the active window whenever an alarm event occurs e Display Screen Tips on Charts Turns on mouse hover Tool Tips e Automatically Install All Detected Charts Tells the software to look for and install uninstalled charts from the DVD If you want to run the charts from the hard drive you must install them manually e Vector Chart Symbol Format Use this option to switch between ECDIS Electronic Chart and Display System styled marks or NOAA e Confirm Hiding Object Enables a prompt before hiding an object e Show Cross Hair When Creating Route Displays extension lines while creating routes e Show Direction Arrows on New Objects New routes that you create will have direction arrow on the route leg e Show Lat Lon as Default Mark Name Displays Lat Lon as Mark Name if Yes is selected e GoTo Lat Lon Adds a Mark Automatically creates a mark at Lat Lon if Yes is selected e Use Near Far Distancing Changes short distances 9 meters or less to display as meters or yards based on Distance Unit selected e Use Transfer Wizard for GPS Transfers Allows you to choose between GPS Port Setup Wizard and upload download tool for older GPS e Enable Virtual Keyboard Virtual Keyboard will ap
284. mputer Over the past decades little has changed with the way a radar antenna sends and receives radar microwaves However there have been significant advancements in the display and utility of the resulting image Until now boaters wanting to take advantage of these technological advancements had to replace their entire radar system even though the antenna was virtually unchanged With the IR2 BB and Nobeltec Navigation Software you can avoid the cost of a complete radar retro fit and still get the significant advantages of combining radar data with your electronic charts How Does the IR2 BB Work The IR2 BB essentially repeats radar data from your traditional radar display to the personal computer Depending on your radar make and model tuning or other adjustments may be required to get the best radar image An advantage to using Nobeltec Navigation Software radar display is that you can continue to use your existing radar display or plotter device for redundancy comparison and safety AY warina The radar image on your plotter device may look slightly different than the image shown by Nobeltec Navigation Software Installed Radar J Jg F lt c E T RIBE USE Gable Heading Sensor Computer Figure 21 4 Wiring of the IR2 BB Chapter 21 Radar Usage 137 The InSight Radar Window Pane n The InSight Radar window pane see Figure 21 3 is used to view r e radar images within Nobeltec Navigatio
285. mputer GPS through your computer s Ethernet port Figure 21 1 Diagram of IR2 Setup or A Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB The IR2 BB is The IR2 Digital Radar connects to a personal computer through a standard a specially designed hardware component that converts the analog Ethernet or network port In most cases it can also be connected to a output from most existing industry standard radars into a digital network hub or router For Network connections consult your Nobeltec IR2 stream that can be used by Nobeltec Navigation Software The benefit Installation Guide of this option is that it does not require a complete retrofit of your radar system Connecting this device to your computer is accomplished Important Notice Regarding 2kW Dome Models through a standard USB port The Nobeltec IR2 2D20 2kW Dome varies slightly from other IR2 models Both of these options are described in full in this Radar Usage chapter Although it is still a digital radar it connects to the computer differently and does not have some of the same features as the other IR2 radars see Figure The InSig ht Radar 2 IR2 21 2 If the feature being described in this chapter is not available for the IR2 2D20 the term 4kW and Higher will be listed next to that feature What are the Benefits of Using an IR2 The Nobeltec IR2 is a complete radar solution that sends radar output directly to one or more personal computers in a digital format Most
286. n Software This window pane can be resized and moved in PlanView mode and laid out in various configurations using the View Manager in NavView The InSight Radar window pane contains a broad array of radar specific features and controls Opening the Radar Window Pane 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation Software 2 Select Radar Radar Display or a Click on the InSight Radar Window Pane ToolBar button If your radar unit and IR2 BB if applicable is turned on and properly connected to the computer the InSight Radar window pane automatically displays a radar image similar to that in Figure 21 3 Transmit Standby Once your digital radar hardware is properly installed and powered GA on you can view radar image onscreen by opening an InSight Radar window pane Click Radar Transmit Standby to begin or stop radar transmission NOTE Placing the radar in Standby mode does not power off the radar but does stop the transmission of radar data Once the radar is fully powered Nobeltec Navigation Software automatically displays incoming radar data and provides you with a range of tuning and control options Radar Right Click and Radar Menu PlanView The InSight Radar window pane can minimized maximized and can share the screen with other window panes such as a Chart window pane You can close the InSight Radar window pane while the radar is still in operation If you are overlaying the radar image on an electronic chart the dedicated radar disp
287. n arrow to reveal more options Chart Coloring Used to change the colors of the Passport charts to match the conditions under which they are being used To change chart colors open any Passport Chart and click on the Chart Color tool Shaded Relief On Off if bathymetric data is loaded Click the down arrow for additional options The lt Ctrl R gt Hot Key toggles Shaded Relief on and off The Chart Table The Chart Table is a chart storage repository it is also where you manually install and uninstall individual charts and locate navigation objects To open Click the Chart Table button on the ToolBar or Select File Chart Table from the main menu MEA TIP If you have enabled automatic chart installation manually installing charts is not necessary See Chapter 3 Installation for Chart Installation The Open Tab The Open Tab is divided into two main sections e Chart List Pane which displays all folders containing installed charts Typically there are two folders Charts at Vessels Position and All Charts Click on the symbol to expand the folder e Chart Details Pane Displays location technical details boundaries and edition dates for any chart highlighted in the Chart List Pane Chapter 5 Charts and Data 33 To open a chart highlight it and double click or click Open To change the View Settings for Objects in the Chart Table 1 Click File Chart Table and select t
288. n better short range detection however it also shortens the detectable range N l q S S Ka D 158 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Transmission Pulse Width Radar Troubleshooting g In most radar systems including the Nobeltec Digital Radar the radar S transmission pulse width is automatically selected to short or long Troubleshooting Direct Connections gt depending on the range scale At a short range a short pulse width is Testte Connection withoutthenadariWizad S used to improve the close target detection as well as picture definition At long ranges a longer pulse width is used to achieve good long range If the Radar wizard is unable to see the IR2 try to locate the radar in another e performance manner N 1 Power the radar on and wait 1 2 full minutes for the radar to default to Range Resolution the correct IP address Whan the arti banaman uaga Wap AA me n TUTE wll Of thre ranunirana pulte bengtte li Pu i fii m TX pulte lencth pa 2 Reboot your computer f Once the software and radar are functioning select START Run P 4 Inthe field provided type the following Ping 192 168 0 1 t Wim w Gheetariew Derw Or a shear ley Then 4 I TTT en _ a half af the trarsmnring puka langt 0 Pd 7 Kam gt WU Run Ka TX pulse length p E x Type the name of a program folder document or Fig ure 21 32 Range Resolution J Internet
289. n computers If you use an A B switch on the autopilot a second computer can serve as the primary navigation station with ease NOTE For safety reasons Admiral does not send autopilot sentences across the network You must connect the autopilot directly via a COM port This connection must be made from the computer that has the active route More Information About Data Sharing Data sharing is configured on the Tools Options Data Sharing Tab The two types of data that can be shared are Processed and Raw Data Raw Data comes into the computer from any NMEA device Processed Data is produced in the Admiral program GPS position is an example of Raw NMEA Data In a situation where you have more than one GPS connected to one of the computers on the network typically port priorities are used to prefer one GPS over another This official type of information about the vessel is referred to as Processed NMEA Data or the Nobeltec Packet By default Admiral will share Processed Data on the GlassBridge Network By setting up Admiral in this way you do not have to set a priority for position on each of the other computers on the network Processed NMEA Data There are four options for configuring how Admiral handles Processed Data Auto Detect Mode Auto Detect Mode automatically listens to the GlassBridge Network at startup to determine whether to send Processed NMEA Data to other computers or to listen This decision is based on what n
290. n into two vertical windows A navigation photo appears on one side and the chart that was open prior to this tool being pressed will be open in the other When the photo opens it will match the zoom level and scale of the vector or raster chart on the opposite side of the window G Open Polar Display Window Sailing Plus Pack only Used to open and display the Polar Display Window S Open Polar Display Settings Sailing Plus Pack only Used to open and isplay the Polar Display Settings Window Q Options Tool Used to open and display the Tools Options menu 3 E Other Features Display Tool This activates data layers contained on the Passport Charts These data layers included features such as chart notes and place names 3 Passport Data Layers Display Tool Turns on display of Port Data on the Passport Charts iG Photo Charts Display Tool This changes the active chart type shown in the chart window to a navigation photo It also allows you to blend photos with Passport vector charts p Ep Place Name Search Directs window and cursor focus to the Search Tab of the NavBar where you can quickly locate objects and points of interest using Nobeltec s efficient search engine PlanBook Tool This button opens the PlanBook which allows you to manually edit Routes Marks Boundaries and Tracks Pointer Tool Restores the mouse cursor to the Pointer Tool which is used to select items for further operations
291. n open Chart window pane right click on the Tender 2 Select Tender Color from the pop up menu 3 Select a color for this target from the color selector 4 Click OK to complete these changes Using the DSC Directory The DSC directory in Tools Options Targets is where you input the MMSI Number and a description or name of vessels polled with your DSC radio The names you input will appear on your charts instead of the MMSI Number These settings can be saved for future use Using the Tender Directory The Tender directory is where you input the Tender ID Description Channel the Tender is broadcasting on and the duration for the Seetrac Base Unit to listen to that Channel The description you input will appear on your charts These settings can be saved for future use NOTE Tender Tracker has two modes Autonomous and Managed Channel and Description function only in Managed Mode Chapter 20 Target Tracking 129 Targets NavBar and Targets InfoBar Use the Targets Tab on the PlanView NavBar Figure 20 4 or the Targets InfoBar in Admiral s NavView Figure 20 5 to view additional information about a specific tracked target Select from available Targets using the drop down menu next to the Target name display Find an available Target Filter AIS Targets and Show All or Hide All Targets in NavView yee Sweater 1 Statue Meagas Geactive Mark yf TEC Locating a Target Onscreen To locate an activ
292. n the keyboard moves your forward and the Down Arrow moves you back in the opposite direction Use the lt gt and lt gt keys or tools on the ToolBar to zoom in and out Left and Right Arrows on the keyboard rotate the image around the vertical axis Figure 12 3 3D Controls in the Explore Boat Mode No I Ww a S 3 S A A l N 86 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide NOTE You can also use your mouse cursor to move over and pan the chart as well BottomLock When enabled BottomLock centers the 3D view Center on Boat or Explore closer to the ocean floor When in Explore Mode with BottomLock engaged your Explore vessel will become a submarine allowing you to explore the nooks and depths of the ocean in greater detail Select BottomLock by clicking on the Mode button on the 3D ToolBar or BottomLock from the right click menu in the 3D window pane Adjusting BottomLock Height Use BottomLock Height option on the right click menu to set the depth at which to view the ocean floor This option is limited by sea floor depth Favorite Boat Explore Views Use this feature to save and retrieve custom 3D view settings To save a favorite view right click on the 3D window and select Favorite Boat Views and then click on Add Current View Enter a name so that you can retrieve it at a later time Importing Non Nobeltec Bathymetric Data You can inte
293. n the Chart or Radar window pane and choosing Acquire This Target from the pop up menu ARPA Radar Connection Admiral Only Nobeltec Admiral has the capability to display ARPA targets detected by any industry standard external radar using an InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB to convert that analog output into digital NMEA sentences Likewise a Nobeltec IR2 Radar can transmit ARPA NMEA sentences directly to Admiral 1 Connect a Heading Sensor and GPS to your computer via serial ports 2 Connect the output cable from your IR2 radar to your PC through an Ethernet port or connect your external radar to an IR2 BB and connect the IR2 BB to your computer via an available USB port 3 Place a check mark in the Input Ports on the Ports check box Configure Tab Options for the applicable COM port Admiral will display target data once the cables are correctly connected to the PC Target speed and direction will also be displayed on the Chart window pane NOTE Connect both a radar and a heading sensor to your PC Without a heading sensor any ARPA data displayed in NNS may be inaccurate Nobeltec Radar Overlay and MARPA If you are using a Nobeltec Radar with Nobeltec Navigation Software targets shown onscreen can be internally generated How It Works If you are using the Radar Chart overlay feature and see a potential target on the Radar or Chart window pane right click the object and choose Acquire This Target from the pop up
294. nBook 73 open the Import dialog box Choose a data type Routes Marks Tracks or Boundaries to import 3 Browse to the location of the stored navigation object data file and select the file you wish to import Data from that file will appear in the navigation window 4 Toimport all navigation object data from the selected txt file click Import All a Toimport specific navigation objects click the sign to the left of the folder that contains the data you wish to import b Click on the individual item to import and then click the Import button This must be repeated for each item Click OK to close this window 6 Data you imported should be immediately available to view in the corresponding PlanBook tabs To export navigation object data 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu 2 From any of the four Tabs in the PlanBook click Export to open the Export dialog box 3 Inthe right hand Export File As drop down list choose to export your file as a CSV or ONF file 4 Browse to the location where you wish to export your data and name the data file ONF files will be saved with a txt extension 5 To export all of your data click on Add All to Export List a To export a specific data type first highlight the respective folder Marks Routes Tracks Boundaries or Range Bearing Lines for that type Then click the sign to the left of the folder you highlight
295. navigation objects 6 Ifthe data is correct it can now be imported next to any category and viewing the Sproad MOWN JaA Basic Terms Upload This is the term that refers to sending information to the GPS from Nobeltec Navigation Software Most GPS units support the transfer of routes waypoints or marks and tracks Download This is the term that refers to receiving route waypoint or mark and track information from the GPS This should not be confused with the transfer of data such as Lat Lon position or speed e GPS Transfer Wizard This refers to the tool used to upload and download information between your GPS and the Nobeltec Navigation Software Each GPS uses its own protocol for sending this information Nobeltec supports most popular GPS units i NOTE During Upload Download you must turn off the GPS for realtime navigation Only one software application can access a COM port at a time Chapter 15 Upload Download 97 Wiring Your GPS For Upload Download If you have not yet connected your GPS to your PC please refer to Chapter 3 GPS Setup before continuing any further in this chapter In addition make sure that all three NMEA wires coming out of your GPS are connected to the three NMEA wires on the Nobeltec serial data cable Proprietary Protocols Some GPS units require you to use their proprietary protocol to upload and download data If you see a time out error when trying to connect to your GPS unit in
296. navigator is responsible for using all means of threat detection including visual observations Target Tracking Terms and Acronyms Acronym FullName Meaning CPA is the closest distance that will be achieved between your vessel and the tracked target based on your collective speed and direction Closest Point of Approach Time to Closest Point of Approach Rng Target Range The tracked target s range from your vessel Target The bearing of the target in True or Bearing Magnetic The tracked target s course Target Speed The tracked target s speed Table 21 4 Acronyms The time it takes to reach the CPA Time is expressed in minutes Radar Configuration Options Tools Options Targets If you have compatible ARPA MARPA radar s or AIS device s connected to your PC via an NMEA connection any target detected by these devices can be displayed on your Passport vector charts with their pertinent information Additionally if a DSC radio is connected to your PC you can track other vessels similarly equipped Display ARPA Targets Yes displays ARPA targets coming from an external radar in standard NMEA format ARPA Targets based on magnetic Yes recognizes an external ARPA source as magnetic bearing data rather than true bearing data Display DSC Targets DSC equipped marine radios provide vessel tracking for both DSC polling and distress calls When you poll another boater who is also equipped with DSC techn
297. nd other data are stored As long as the other computers on your vessel are connected to the network they can grab any data that is contained on the PC identified as the Server NMEA Data Sharing In a networked configuration NMEA data such as a GPS signal can easily be shared between computers One computer might receive GPS and heading data while another is wired to receive depth or wind information Regardless of where the instruments are located this data can be shared across the network Nobeltec Navigation Software receives NMEA data information into the COM port on an installation with a Dongle and can broadcast it onto the network Sharing NMEA data requires the use of a security Dongle which is covered in greater detail on Page 3 Sounder Sharing GlassBridge Network Only If you have purchased and installed a Nobeltec InSight Sounder you can share Sounder data to any computer connected to the GlassBridge Network Click Tools Options GlassBridge Network Tab to setup Sounder Sharing All systems attached to the GlassBridge Network will see all data sent on the network by the InSight Sounder Any Sounder window open on any networked PC will mirror the Sounder window on any other networked PC Radar Sharing If you have purchased and installed a Nobeltec branded radar or radars you can connect them to the network and all the computers connected can use a single radar image that you select For example you might have a Nobelt
298. ndows Desktop appears your mouse cursor will begin to bounce all over the screen To avoid this problem connect your GPS to the PC but leave the GPS powered off until boot up is complete This prevents the wayward mouse problem in most cases If you follow these steps and still see the mouse jumping on the screen contact Nobeltec Technical Support GPS Test Boot up your computer and start your Nobeltec Navigation program Once the program is open turn on your GPS and make sure that the program recognizes it as a GPS Once the software recognizes the GPS signal the Chapter 17 On the Water 109 vessel icon should be on a chart at your boat s Lat Lon position and the GPS panel on the Console should read GPS OK When you are certain that you are getting a signal let the GPS and your program run for ten or fifteen minutes at the dock to ensure that there are no interruptions to the GPS signal Autopilot Test Autopilots are complex systems Differences in settings and installation discrepancies can alter system performance Rudder size autopilot gain and heading sensor calibration and sensitivity all contribute to these differences Once your autopilot is setup and configured properly find a safe vessel free area to perform this test Create a route in your Nobeltec Navigation Software that consists of several route legs Activate the route and accelerate the vessel to a safe but effective speed for completing the test Initiall
299. ne perpendicular to the reference ship The minimum horizontal distance between two craft during a close proximity encounter COG See Course Over Ground COM Port The interface through which Nobeltec Navigation Software and your PC can communicate with peripherals Visual series support 32 COM Ports Compass Rose An image overlaid on the chart which displays both magnetic and true compass directions Console A collection of optionally selected and configured panels which display various vital information This information is continually updated Course The direction a boat is being steered Course Over Ground COG Is the track of the ship over the ground and is based on position changes Course To Steer CTS Real time calculation of the ideal bearing the navigator should steer the boat towards to reach the next active waypoint A S S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 190 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide CPA See Closest Point of Approach Cross Track Error XTE The distance of a perpendicular line drawn from the ship to an active route leg Determines how much the ship is straying from the course of a Route Current The flow of water characterized by direction and speed Current speed and direction may change with the tide See also Ebb Current and Flood Current Data Sentence The unit of information sent between peripherals and Visual Series conforming to the NMEA 0
300. nected to NMEA producing devices GPS heading sensor etc receive raw NMEA data This data conforms to the NMEA 0183 3 01 specification See also NMEA 0183 and NMEA 2000 Native Scale The original scale of a paper chart from which an electronic chart is derived Also known as Source Scale Glossary amp Index 193 Neap Tides Neap tides are especially weak tides with a decreased range They occur when the gravitational forces of the Moon and the Sun are perpendicular to one another with respect to the Earth Neap tides occur during quarter moons See Tidal Currents Network Identity The name of the network to which the computer is currently connected NMEA See National Marine Electronics Association NMEA 0183 NMEA 0183 defines the electrical interface and data protocol for communications between marine instrumentation Many times referred to as NMEA in the context of marine instrumentation communications NMEA 2000 This standard contains the requirements for a serial data communications network to inter connect marine electronic equipment on ships It is multi master and self configuring and there is no central network controller Equipment designed to this standard will have the ability to share data including commands and status with other compatible equipment over a single channel source http www nmea org pub 2000 NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration NOAA is a federal agency focus
301. ng the Sounder Image Complete control of the display is a hallmark of Jeppesen Marine solutions This section describes the most important methods for adjusting the way the sounder echoes are represented on screen With the Nobeltec InSight Sounder you are free to fine tune the behavior of the black box and transducer in a number of ways to produce an image you find satisfying Automatic operation modes are provided for ease of use and limit which adjustments can be made However in Manual Mode you can adjust the Sounder image in a number of ways using the Sounder Tuning ToolBar If the Sounder Tuning ToolBar is not visible inside your software enable it from the Sounder Menu To load the Sounder Tuning ToolBar click on Sounder Display Sounder ToolBars The Sounder Tuning ToolBar will be added to your view Gain The Gain Up and Gain Down buttons adjust the gain Gain settings control the sensitivity of the transducer and black box when receiving Sounder returns High gain settings add more detail and feedback to the Sounder display while a low gain setting will only display the stronger returns i NOTE To manually control Gain settings you must be in Manual Mode Clutter Clutter onscreen may be caused by debris in the water small schools of fish or other hard to pinpoint causes Occasionally this information cannot be removed by lowering your gain setting The Clutter filter will allow you to display only stronger returns and
302. ngle Port Adapter RS232 RALXX00013 Single Port Adapter RS422 RALXX00012 2 Port Adapter RALXX00010 4 Port Adapter RALXX00009 Additional product information inside back cover gt Welcome Thank you for purchasing Jeppesen Marine s Nobeltec Navigation Software This User s Guide is written for an audience assumed to have a mid level pre existing knowledge of computer usage and the principles of marine navigation Do not use this document and software to replace actual navigation training and experience but as a valuable navigational aid AY warnine Nautical navigation is a serious undertaking and should only be engaged in by persons trained and experienced in such navigation 2007 Jeppesen Marine Inc All rights reserved How to Contact Jeppesen Marine Jeppesen Marine Jeppesen Marine GMBH 15160 NW Laidlaw Road Suite 100 Frankfurter Str 233 Portland or 97229 USA 63263 Neu Isenburg Germany Customer Support Phone Numbers USA 800 732 2800 6 AM 7 PM MT Europe 49 6102 50 8171 8 AM 5 PM CET All Other Locations 1 303 328 6983 6 AM 7 PM MT Sales Phone Numbers USA 800 946 2877 8 AM 5 PM PT All Other Locations 1 503 579 1414 8 AM 5 PM PT Fax 1 503 579 1304 North America 49 6102 50 8189 Europe Email sales jeppesenmarine com Sales support jeppesenmarine com Support Website www jeppesenmarine com Do You Have Everything Before installing the software make sure you have received the following N
303. north differs from the true north This data is available from the Compass Rose on a chart Man Overboard MOB Mark that can be placed on a digital chart to indicate emergency location NNS will track that location to aid in returning the boat to MOB coordinates Maritime Mobile Service Identity MMSI MMSI Numbers are a series of nine digits transmitted over a DSC radio path in order to uniquely identify ship stations ship earth stations coast stations coast earth stations and group calls These identities can be used by telephone and telex subscribers connected to the general telecommunications network principally to call ships automatically Mark In general any created object on a chart routes and boundaries are composed of marks Specifically marks are objects created using the Mark tool and can be displayed as a number of different icons A mark may have a name annotative information and an icon MARPA See Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid Mean High Water MHW A tidal datum The average of the higher high water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Higher High Water MHHW A tidal datum The average of all the high water heights of each tidal day observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Low Water MLW A tidal datum The average of all the low water heights observed over the National Tidal Datum Epoch Mean Lower Low Water MLLW A tidal datum The average of the lower low w
304. ns Radar Tools Options Radar provides you with per Radar or radars for Admiral users settings options Use the Radar Selection field in the upper left hand corner to highlight the name of the Radar you wish to configure then use the option settings configure each Radar Radar settings include Auto Range Links With Auto Range keeps the InSight Radar window pane and chart window synchronized As you zoom in or out on one of the display windows the other matches the changes in range All Chart Windows This option keeps all chart windows zoomed at the same range level Chart w Radar Overlay Only Changes the zoom or scale only of chart windows that have the radar overlay turned on matching the radar range Keep Range Setting When checked this feature remembers the tuning settings for Gain Sea Clutter etc for each range As you adjust the range the InSight radar will revert to your last used tuning settings Suppress Echoes Around Boat Resolves what is commonly referred to as Main Bang Suppression This feature turns off all radar echoes around the boat within a certain radius of pixels JN warnine Use caution when using this feature as it could remove real radar echoes that could be collision threats Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D
305. ns the Navinfo Customize Subpanel window where you can adjust the Display Settings determine the Update Frequency and select the Data Types for the subpanel e Zoom In This option is active only in the strip chart of a nav panel and zooms in on the time line e Zoom Out This option is active only in the strip chart of a nav panel and zooms out on the time line e View History This option is active only in the strip chart of a nav panel and opens a display of the older data e View Newer Data This option is active only in the strip chart of a nav panel and opens a display of the older data e Show in this pane a This option changes the current NavView display to the selected option from the below list e Chart Window Chart window contains the following sub menu items Vector Chart Window Raster Chart Window Photo Chart Window USGPS Topographic Window or 3D Window Radar Window Sounder Window Navinfo Panel 1 Navinfo Panel 2 Navinfo Panel 3 Navinfo Panel 4 Video Window Polar Window a Lec EE at Cursor Positien Figure 18 11 NavInfo Window Pane with Polar Display To Customize the Navinfo Window 1 Create a View configuration using View Manager that displays a NavInfo window NavView can display up to four Navinfo windows 2 Right click on one of the Navinfo windows and select Customize Layout from the pop up menu Choose a vertical or horizontal orientation fe Select the layout configu
306. nu select the amount of time that your time zone is ahead or behind UTC GMT Click Finish 16 Customizing Nobeltec Nobeltec Navigation Software s ToolBars and Console can be completely configured to your own preferences If there are Tools that you don t use or that prohibit your ability to see more of the chart you can turn them off The Difference Between a Tool and a ToolBar e Tool a single button located on the Nobeltec screen e ToolBar a group of tools that have similar focus For example all of the buttons that operate Passport Charts are located on one ToolBar called the Passport Options ToolBar ToolBar Options ToolB ars to Display ToolBar Button Size O Radar Range ToolBar O Radar Tools C Small O Sounder ToolBar go Sounder Tuning O Tide and Current Time ToolBar Medium Q Fi Tides and Currents ToolBar O Window Handling ToolBar O Zoom ToolBar P GR O 30 Charts Display Tool Annotation Tool Autoscroll Follow Boat Tool FI Aviesersll Falana Pradintar Tanl F eset ToolB ale to Default Load User Interface Save User Interface Cancel Figure 16 1 ToolBar Options Menu Customizing the ToolBar When you start your Nobeltec program for the first time several default ToolBars are displayed If your computer has a smaller screen you may want to hide some of these or convert them into floating ToolBars to provide a wider area for the chart to be displayed To show or hide ToolBars or
307. o WeatherNet Click Help from the WeatherNet program for in depth instructions At the time of setup you will need to determine how you wish to receive data via Internet or e mail WeatherNet is a separate program that runs on your desktop and downloads GRIB data Chapter 13 Wind amp Weather 89 efficiently to your PC Set GRIB as your provider in NNS using Tools Options Weather Open the NavBar Weather tab Click on the OCENS link to open WeatherNet Determine the region and data type you wish to download using WeatherNet oY ae iS i NOTE See your WeatherNet Help file for more information about how to use WeatherNet 5 Click Download to download the GRIB file to your hard drive 6 Open the NavBar Weather tab 7 Click Browse to open a browser window and browse to the location you stored your WeatherNet GRIB grb file s Click on the GRIB file you wish to display Click Open 10 Weather data from that file will be immediately available to display on your charts GRIB Weather Options The following are GRIB weather overlay options If a field is grayed out that type of overlay is not available in the file you loaded e Barometric Pressure e Wind e Ocean Currents e Precipitation e Wave e Sea Surface Temperature GRIB Weather at Route OCENS WeatherNet Admiral only When GRIB is your selected weather provider you may right click on a route and choose Download GRIB Weather from the pop up m
308. o a predictor line the Display Wakes option allows you to see a historical track of where the target has been AIS ARPA Target Timeouts ARPA targets normally transmit reports every few seconds Select how long an ARPA or AIS target will remain on your screen between reports If the software does not receive a report during this set amount of time it will be removed from the display DSC Target Timeouts DSC targets only transmit data when requested by another DSC equipped marine radio Select how long a DSC target will remain on your screen between reports If the software does not receive a report during this set amount of time that target will be removed from display Target Threat Settings Use this button to detect potential threats based on information received from ARPA MARPA and AIS targets If a target meets N l q S S S D S gt Aa S S S ce l T N 154 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide criteria for this setting the target will render in red and a warning message will be shown e Detect Threats Check this box to look for threats as determined by your CPA and TCPA settings When there is no check mark in this check box the Alarm CPA and TCPA options are disabled e Audible Alarm When Threat Detected Check this box to receive an audible alarm when CPA or TCPA meet safety zone criteria e Closest Point of Approach CPA Used to determine the safety zone area around your vessel de
309. o the Nobeltec program 6 1 Select File Upload Download to GPS to open the GPS Transfer Wizard 2 Click Change to open a list of GPS brand and model names Select the brand model that is connected to your computer Necessary the first time you use the GPS Transfer Wizard or if you have multiple GPS units attached to the PC Click Next 3 Review connection information Most units connect at 4800 baud Check that the correct COM port is selected Click Next 4 Choose one of the two function options that start with the word Get because you are getting information from the GPS After making your selection click Next 5 Follow the onscreen instructions to download specific objects or click Next to dSownload all objects and continue 6 Depending on what you selected to download the next screen options satellite contains its own atomic clock To set the computer clock using the GPS Transfer Wizard 1 On the Main Menu select File Upload Download to GPS This will open the GPS Transfer Wizard Click Change to open a list of GPS brand and model names Select the brand model that is connected to your computer Necessary the first time you use the GPS Transfer Wizard or if you have multiple GPS units attached to the PC Click Next Review connection information Most units connect at 4800 baud Check that the correct COM port is selected Click Next Select Update System Time from GPS and click Next Using the drop down me
310. o view the DHCP table to obtain all the devices on the network Using this tool for your Router locate the IP address of the IR2 Radar It will be in the list as RadarSensor as shown in Figures 21 36 7 F Status Microsoft Internet Ixplorer zle Ede yew Favarites Tonks Hap Q ook x a A P Sen Jy avertes A vedia amp 3 m Address ktp L92 60 1 ta us Lan asp zearen for v P nob sccrea 3 fiot Fla 8 Linksys A Division cf Cisco Systeme Inc Wireless G Rroadband Router Status Access Appheations c Restrictions 8 Gaming Wircles3 Adminisiration Locali Notwork MAC Ackrsss 06 00 25 07 57 40 IP Address 192 168 1 1 Evbnet Malc 255 255 255 CHOP Server Fnahleri Etat P accrssx 192 168 1 199 Por F Anrnress 197 168 1 149 DI ICF lieta Tah e Cisco SYSTEMS Figure 21 36 RadarSensor With this particular Linksys router type the IP address of the router into the Internet Explorer address field to get to its diagnostic pages Clicking on the Status tab displays the image The DHCP Clients table button shows the entire list of devices on the network N l S S GS Lae S Aa S S S ce l A N 160 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide WEHE derve IP Table hierin internet Esplorer DHCP Active IF Table Lo gF seve Pedras THAek i1 Vico Hasi Haim IP Arhi AAi Sel ees Pup mi geile O01 13 Bs aT ECEE DIO 2 HA E 132 1685 193
311. obeltec Software DVD Passport World Folio DVD User s Guide this book Serial Number North America Dongle Admiral International only e Serial Cable full package only NOTE DO NOT DISCARD older generation World Folio Chart CDs they can be used with newer versions of Nobeltec Navigation Software Please fill out the My Nobeltec Program and Chart Information table located inside the back cover with your serial and or Dongle number Welcome iii System Requirements Minimum System Requirements higher system requirements may be appropriate if multiple advanced features are used concurrently Microsoft Windows 2000 XP Home Professional latest Service Pack may be required for Technical Support troubleshooting Pentium IV 3 0 GHz processing power or equivalent Dual Core Processor is supported 512 MB of RAM 160 MB available disc space 2 4 GB space required to store charts 16 MB Video Card with 32 bit color VGA compatible display minimum 1024x768 resolution settings 12x or higher CD ROM drive DVD drive Monitor settings 1024x768 32 bit color video Available Serial or USB COM port USB requires an adapter International Passport World Charts require a USB port for Dongle Recommended Windows 2000 XP Pro 2 GB RAM Pentium D 930 3 0 Ghz 64 MB 3D video graphics card w OpenGL Product Support If you have a question about your Nobeltec Navigation Software please first review this User s Guid
312. ocedure 1 Start Admiral and click Tools Options and then click on the Glass Bridge Network Tab 2 Click Clear Network Charts 3 Click OK 20 Target Tracking Nobeltec Navigation Software tracks five types of targets e ARPA Automatic Radar Plotting Aid and MARPA Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid targets transmitted by your Radar Admiral only e AIS Automatic Identification System target tracking from a dedicated AIS receiver e Digital Selective Calling DSC radio input DSC transmissions display vessels similarly equipped with DSC radios in the immediate 20 mile radius vicinity e Seetrac Tender Tracking This Plus Pack Admiral only provides up to the minute target data about smaller affiliate watercraft called Tenders including smaller boats jet skis wave runners or even passengers carrying a wireless Seetrac Tender Unit STU This chapter is primarily devoted to AIS and DSC target tracking See Chapter 21 Radar for more in depth ARPA MARPA target tracking information and Chapter 25 Tender Tracker for more information about Tenders im frat DTT aT ET ee a er AID te pe fee ete Quer Ube ex ge BO ERBGOQQYKLORCAMAED CAE OFh 8 ASO 8 MENS Figure 20 1 Targets as they TTN in the PlanView Chart Window Pane Chapter 20 Target Tracking 127 Targets Onscreen Target details can be displayed in the Targets tab of the PlanView NavBar or NavView InfoBar When your Radar AIS DSC and
313. oftware the startup splash screen will now display Bathy Recorder as one of the supplemental installed features NOBELTEC Nobeltec Admiral Copyright 1993 2006 Jeppesen Marine Inc All Rights Reserved Portions Copyright nuPerspective Including InSight Radar Bathy Recorder InSight Sounder Fleet Manager SkyMate Support Tender Tracker XM Weather Sailing PlusPack Loading Tides Data 99 Figure 23 1 Startup Splash Screen with Bathy Recorder No Wu i 2 S lt eo n S E u x S cB cc gt S aa i A N 174 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide The Benefits of Bathy Recorder Terrain rendered using Bathy Recorder provides you with an awareness of depth terrain values and possible hazards that standard high resolution 3D cannot provide Without Bathy Recorder standard 3D chart terrain may not reveal significant sea floor detail Figure 23 2 High Resolution Passport Deluxe 3D Bathy Data Using Bathy Recorder data to supplement the Passport 3D bathymetric data terrain samples gain a crispness and specific clarity with which other 3D charts cannot compete Figure 23 3 Passport Deluxe 3D Bathy Data Enhanced by Bathy Reorder Transducer Offset Settings When using the Bathy Recorder the Transducer Offset settings must be configured before any recordings can be made with the tool Transducer Offset can be accessed using the Shallow Water Alarm
314. oftware is designed to look for threats using a combination of CPA and TCPA as output by the GPS For example a vessel 1 NM away is not a threat if your threat CPA threshold is set to 0 05 NM However if you set threat TCPA to 3 00 minutes and the approaching vessel will be within 0 05 NM in that time window Nobeltec Navigation Software will alert you to this threat Active State Target Indicating Active State True Scale Outline Active State Target Indicating Turn Active State Incomplete Data Active State Past Track Lost State Target Symbols Vessel appears as a triangle or diamond oriented by heading or COG if heading is missing If heading is available heading line will be visible as a Solid line COG appears as a dashed line Dash and space one minute Vessel appears as a triangle with a flag of fixed length indicating turning path At high zoom the triangle may be replaced by a true scale outline of target vessel relative to your vessel s reference position oriented along your ship s heading The cross hair indicates the AIS antenna position Vessel appears as a triangle with a curved dashed line indicating intended turning path Each dash and space one minute The vessel appears as a broken triangle oriented by heading or COG if heading is missing If heading is available heading line will be visible as a solid line Past track or path is indicated by a series of dots Fla
315. oints will be renumbered sequentially Great Circle Route Builder A Great Circle Route is the shortest navigable distance between two points Flat map projections warp the curved surface of the earth which means that you cannot always perceive the shortest route to draw on your chart Nobeltec Navigation Software contains a tool that can automatically generate a Great Circle Route between two user specified points using one of three possible methods specified number of waypoints specified degrees of arc between waypoints or specified degrees of longitude between waypoints 1 Select Edit New Great Circle Route from the main menu 2 Select the first and last waypoints to be used 3 Select the method for calculating the waypoints 4 Click Create Routes created with the Great Circle Route generator can be named and edited just like any other route Creating a Route From a Track You can use previous trips to create new routes 1 Right click on a track to display the Track pop up menu 2 Select Create Route from Track 3 Specify the track distance to use and click OK to create a new route TIP Even though the new route is created directly on top of the track the track is still there it is just covered up by the route Remove From Route s Use this feature to remove a mark or waypoint from a route without deleting the mark itself To remove a mark from a route 1 Right click on a mark you wish to remove 2 Sel
316. ol produces a dialogue where you an change the chart colors A F Chart Down Tool This button allows you to quickly select and open a larger scale more detailed chart at the vessels current Lat Lon position In Quilting mode this button does not function TO i Chart Outlines Tool This button controls whether or not chart outlines are displayed on the chart This feature is enabled by default Chart Table Tool Opens the Chart Table dialog The Chart Table dialog is used to open install and uninstall charts locate charts and geographic reference points Chart Up Tool This button allows you to quickly select and open a smaller scale less detailed chart at the vessels current Lat Lon position In Quilting mode this button does not function Circle Boundary Tool Used to create Boundary Circles A Boundary Circle consists of series of marks enclosing an area A Boundary Circle is used to mark a region and an alarm will play if you enter or leave the region Boundary Circles can be used to mark a dangerous area for example around a rock In this case the alarm will be set off if you enter the boundaried area Circle boundary areas are displayed as a hatched out field onscreen Closed Boundary Tool Used to select the Closed Boundary Tool which is used to create a Polygonal Boundary on your chart Boundaries are used together with alarms to warn you about potential dangers while navigating Closed boundary areas ar
317. ology for their position Nobeltec Navigation Software will display their returned position information on the navigation Chapter 21 Radar Usage 153 chart alerting you to their location Yes displays DSC targets and No disables Target Name Settings Determines how the software will display AIS target names when overlaid on the chart Options are None Short or Full Display targets on radar display Yes displays targets No disables Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network DataSharing Sounder Sailing Video Option Setting Display ARPA Targets Yes ARPA targets based on magnetic No Display DSC Targets Yes Target Name Settings Full v iV Display Predictors 6 Minutes Target Threat Settings J AE inet eee 5 Minutes DSC Directory AIS amp ARPA Target Timeouts 30 24 Seconds Enhanced AIS Filtering DSC Target Timeouts 30 Minutes Tender Directory Cancel Help Figure 21 23 Tools Options Targets Tab Target Threat Criteria Check the Detect Threats box to enable threat criteria Once checked set the CPA and TCPA limits You can also turn the audible alarm on off Display Predictors When selected this option will display a course predictor line in minutes for all detected targets Display Wakes Similar t
318. olor palette From the color palette select a color Click Apply to save all changes or OK to save and close this window Audio Tab Audio Reports provide periodic verbal reports about any of the data types selected in this Tab In order for Audio Reports to work your PC must be equipped with a sound card and speakers Additionally devices that provide data such as a depth sounder must be installed correctly before you can hear data reports for that object Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy V Enable Audio Reports Time Interval 160 seconds Time Format 12Hou 24Hour Report iv Time Pasition Course Over Ground Speed Over Ground SOG Heading Boat Speed C Cross Track Error Velocity Made Good Waypoint C Time To Go Range to Active Waypoint Bearing to Active Waypoint ia Test All Voice LH Michelle v Cancel Apply Help Figure 8 12 Tools Options Audio Tab To configure an Audio Report 1 Check the Enable Audio Reports box 2 3 4 5 the speed slider bar 6 7 3D Bathy Tab Input the time interval in seconds requested between report Select a Time Format for the Audio report 12 or 24 Hour Clock Place a check mark next to each report type you would like to re
319. omer assumes the entire risk when using it 14 Autopilot Interfacing autopilot with Nobeltec Navigation Software provides you with a number of time saving and ease of use benefits including easier route planning and more precise options and adjustments Autopilot Connections Wiring Figure 14 1 shows a typical wiring diagram for a connection between your software GPS and autopilot To determine which wires are used for Transmit Receive and Ground please refer to your GPS and Autopilot User s Guides For more information on wiring please refer to Chapter 3 GPS Setup Ground Ground GPS Transmit Transmit PC Receive Receive Computer Port X Ground Autopilot Transmit Receive Figure 14 1 GPS Connection with Autopilot Settings Each autopilot requires that certain specific information be provided by the Nobeltec Navigation Software Most autopilots follow the same basic principles of heading and cross track error Autopilot tries to maintain a heading to a mark while maintaining a minimum Cross Track Error Nobeltec Navigation Software contains a number of specific settings that have been created because not all autopilots work the same way Consult your autopilot manual to verify what information the device needs To configure Visual Navigation Suite or Admiral to work with your autopilot 1 Click Tools Options Ports Configure Place a check mark in the box next to the COM Port for your autopilot 2 5 Chapt
320. on towards a Waypoint Position Cross Track Error Synchronized to PC Clock Range to Active Waypoint Count Down Timer Bearing to Active Waypoint Helmsman Display Displays GPS or Dead ETA TIG Combined Estimated Time of Arrival Reckoning Location and Time to Go Displays 3D depth under VMG WND Velocity Made Good towards Wind Cursor Set True Wind Angle Drift POLBSP Sailing Polar BSP Boat Speed POLBSP Sailing Polar Performance Percentage Heading LLTTG Sailing Lay Line Time to Go True Wind Speed LLDIST Sailing Lay Line Distance True Wind Direction UPVMG Sailing Best Upwind Velocity Made Good Angle Apparent Wind Speed LLVMGUPS Sailing Best Upwind Velocity Made Good Heading to Starboard Lay Line Apparent Wind Angle LLVMGUPP Sailing Best Upwind Velocity Made Good Heading to Port Lay Line Depth LLVMGDNS Sailing Downwind Velocity Made Good Heading to Starboard Lay Line Water Temperature LLVMGDNP Sailing Downwind Velocity Made Good Heading to Port Lay Line Depth Units Sailing Heel Range from Boat to Cursor Sailing Leeway Bearing from Boat to Cursor Depth Below Transducer DBK Depth Below Keel Table 16 1 Available Console Panels The Helmsman Display This display shows the boat heading and position relative to your intended course The small red line points toward course The blue highway shows you how close you are to the cross track error limits in the Boat Properties Alarms Tab Twilight and Night Display Modes
321. on any route segment and click ETA Calculator from the pop up menu 2 Using the ETA Calculator dialog box select Transit Time from the three available options and click Next 3 Input estimated vessel speed for each waypoint After setting your estimated speed for each point enter the waypoint number date and time that you would like to arrive at the waypoint and click Compute 5 The EDT needed to arrive at the waypoint at your given date and time will appear in the ETA Calculator window x Compute Transit Time E IA cy Enter the waypoint number and the time you wish to be at the waypoint in the fields below Enter 1 for the waypoint if C a CH a to rt the time is the starting time for the route Vessel Speed fi 0 0 Waypoint H fe Date Time Time at Waypoint 3 16 2003 12 59 37 PM a Trip Start 03 16 2003 10 17 4M Total Length of trip 4 hrs 18 mins Trip Ends 03 16 2003 2 35 PM Fuel Estimate 38 USGal Compute Transit Time lt Back Finish Cancel Help Chapter 11 Tides amp Currents 81 Calculating Speed This option enables you to compute the speed required to arrive at a destination at a given date and time This computation uses set and drift information to determine any benefit or hindrance from tides or currents To calculate Speed k Start the ETA Calculator by right clicking on any route segment and click ETA Calculator from the pop up menu Using the ETA Calculator dialo
322. on using your Sounder Depth Finder device and to incorporate that data into your 3D display When you use the Bathy Recorder to customize your sea floor charts those charts will constantly improve with repeat trips over the same areas enabling you to have a perfect picture of important sea floor terrain as well as your favorite fishing and diving spots The data provided by your Bathy Recorder can be more specifically oriented to your needs than any chart you can purchase And with Jeppesen Marine s exclusive high quality 3D rendering the Nobeltec Bathy Recorder will give you an unparalleled 360 awareness of your environment Bathy Recorder can give you specific contour lines that standard 3D charts available don t display as well as complete control of the contour line display Create your own custom contours to see the areas of sea floor topography that are important to you Charts and Data Bathy Recorder uses and creates three dimensional 3D bathymetric sea floor data in real time While you can use the Bathy Recorder feature to display only the data recorded by your Bathy Recorder Jeppesen Marine highly recommends purchasing Passport Deluxe Chart Permits for every region where you intend to use Bathy Recorder Passport Deluxe Charts supplement your bathymetric coverage and add continuity to the 3D image Passport 3D Bathymetric Charts North America only Passport 3D bathymetric charts contain high resolution sea flo
323. ontent data layout such as displaying numeric values or histograms colors update frequency and can even be set up to contain a background graphic jpg or bmp format NOTE You must have connected the appropriate hardware to display specific data types in the Navinfo subpanels For example if you wish to display water temperature you must have connected a temperature gauge to your computer and set up Nobeltec Navigation Software to receive data from that device To Customize the Navinfo Window 1 Open a Navinfo window Window Navinfo Window Chapter 4 Basic Screens 27 2 Right click on the Navinfo window and select Customize Layout from the pop up menu The Navinfo Wizard will open Choose a vertical or horizontal orientation 4 Select the type of layout you want to assign to the window from the available configurations When you select a layout the window closes and the Navinfo window automatically updates To Customize a Navinfo Subpanel 1 Right click on any NavInfo window subpanel and select Customize Subpanel from the pop up menu The Navinfo Customize Subpanel window opens Update the contents of the selected subpanel from this window 2 There are two main customizable components to a subpanel Display Settings and Data Types Display Settings include Background Start Color Background End Color Font Color Histogram Line Color Update Frequency in seconds and Background Image bmp or jpg format Data Types in
324. ools Options from the Main Menu or by using the Options ToolBar button The Options menu provides access to a number of important settings Ports Configure Tab The Ports Configure Tab of the Options menu is where you configure Input Ports and Autopilot Output Ports Input Ports Designates COM ports that will receive data from other devices Output Autopilot Ports Designates COM ports to which data will be sent From the COM Input Configuration window you can include or exclude specific data sentences or entire device sentence streams e Require Valid Checksums On All Sentences If this option is enabled Nobeltec Navigation Software will ignore any data that does not contain a valid checksum used to validate incoming data Equipment conforming to previous versions of NMEA 0183 specifications do not always use checksums in all data sentences e Require Checksums To Be Valid if Present If selected Nobeltec Navigation Software validates sentences that contain checksums but accepts sentences that do not contain checksums e Report Checksum Discrepancies If selected NNS alerts you if a checksum error is found ignore Invalid GPS Position Data If selected NNS ignores GPS data that is inconsistent with the NMEA 0183 standard NOTE AIS and GPS data streams should always be set up on separate ports Failure to do so may result in Nobeltec Navigation Software losing the GPS data signal thereby setting off alarms unrelated to
325. opilot Settings dialog View Data A red light indicates no data flow A yellow light indicates some data problem s such as a miswired device too much data being sent or bad unshielded or twisted wiring Green indicates mostly good data This device will listen to the data before showing green Port Priorities Port Priorities are used to resolve conflicts occurring when two or more devices send redundant information Different position indicating devices GPS LORAN etc may send slightly variant Lat Lon values Without prioritized inputs the boat icon repositions with each valid position string Data from the highest prioritized device is used first If the primary device stops sending position information for a user specified period of time the software automatically switches to the next prioritized device If no valid position is received it will switch to Dead Reckoning mode see Chapter 8 Properties amp Options Chapter 3 Hardware Setup 11 To Set the Priority 1 Select Tools Options and then the Port Priorities Tab 2 Click Add The Add Device dialog box Figure 3 5 will display CI j xi Port Device Data Type Time Out Seconds GP GPS 7 Position gt ie Cancel Figure 3 5 Add Device Dialog Box 3 Choose or input the COM port Device and Data Type and enter a time out value 4 Prioritize each position device in the same manner Multiple devices may connect to the same port if the
326. or When the InSight Sounder is used along with a GPS your Nobeltec Navigation Software is able to associate each sounder ping with a specific Lat Lon This feature allows you to pinpoint exactly where a specific sounder ping was acquired by rolling the mouse over the Sounder Display A ghost or duplicate image of the cursor will appear in any open Chart window pane indicating where the sounder ping was taken Enable this option from Tools Options Sounder Night and Twilight Mode Nobeltec Navigation Software is designed to be usable in low or dim light environments This means that you can easily switch the Nobeltec Navigation Software into Night or Twilight modes using your mouse or a keyboard To enter into one of these low light viewing modes click on View Screen Intensity and then Normal Twilight Colors or Night Colors To toggle through these selection using the keyboard press CTRL I Demo Mode Demo Mode allows you to test many of the features of the InSight Sounder and familiarize yourself with that device s operation Right click in the Sounder Display window and select Demo Mode to activate this feature In Demo Mode you view simulated sounder echoes while adjusting any of the Sounder controls Exit Demo Mode by selecting Live Mode or Record Playback Mode Record and Playback The ability to record the sounder data to a file for later playback provides a great opportunity for after trip analysis Examine the sa
327. or elevation data spaced at regular intervals These charts are part of the Passport Deluxe chart packages for North America Data points contain latitude longitude and elevation Nobeltec Navigation Software interprets this data and renders it into a 3D image combining charts with a 3D view of the ocean floor ChartGridding Since Passport 3D bathymetric charts are only available in North America you can use the ChartGridding feature in Nobeltec VNS or Admiral to create 3D sea floor topographic data from 2D vector charts in areas where Chapter 23 Bathy Recorder 173 high resolution sea floor charts are unavailable ChartGridding can also be used to supplement existing vector data even in places where the high resolution 3D data is available Unlocking Bathy Recorder Your Bathy Recorder product distributor will either provide you with an Unlock Code or a Voucher which can be redeemed online for an Unlock Code No matter how you receive it your Unlock Code is used to unlock the Bathy Recorder features already embedded in Nobeltec Navigation Software Upon installation of the Bathy Recorder Unlock Code Nobeltec Navigation Software will recognize the Bathy Recorder and is now ready for immediate use to record and display sea floor data To use your Unlock Code to unlock Bathy Recorder follow the instructions on Page 6 Installing New Chart Permits and Unlock Codes Upon Install When you launch Nobeltec Navigation S
328. ort returns a weak radar image The exception to the port side return is the windbreak forest which returns strong echoes because of its profile differences False Echoes False echoes may appear according to surrounding circumstances Examples of false echoes and causes of these echoes are described below False echoes caused by reflection A close target may appear in two different directions One is a real echo while the other is a false one produced by reflected waves from structures near the radar antenna such as a funnel a mast etc If a large structure like an iron bridge exists nearby it can also create false echoes False echoes caused by multiple reflection When your boat passes near a large boat radio waves are repeatedly reflected between the two causing several echoes at regular distances to appear in the same bearing These false echoes produced by multiple reflection are called multiple echoes In this case the real target is the closest Because multiple echoes soon disappear when your boat moves from the reflection target or the boat direction has changed even if these multiple echoes are produced the true image is easily detected Shadow and dead angle If the funnel mast post and other structure are located near a transceiver or if a tall obstacle is present a shadow is produced from the rear of these structures In extreme cases no targets will appear in the shadow for a good distance This range is c
329. ou the ability to add a mark onscreen for every significant ship within radio range on your radar display and overlaid electronic charts When you double click on these marks each ship s velocity vector speed and heading ship actual size ship name course and speed classification call sign registration number and other information will display Use this information to name any ship over VHF radiotelephone by name rather than by more imprecise means such as ship off my port bow dial that ship directly using GMDSS equipment or send to if you are equipped with a transponder or receive from the ship short safety related email messages N O l 5 Ka fae i S O D bs end Q l S N 132 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Types of AIS Broadcasts Nobeltec Navigation Software recognizes the following AIS information types Class A Class A AIS units broadcast the following dynamic information every 2 to 10 seconds while underway and every 3 minutes while at anchor at a power level of 12 5 watts The information broadcast includes Navigation status as defined by the COLREGS Not only are at anchor and under way using engine currently defined but not under command is also currently defined among others Rate of Turn Right or left 0 to 720 degrees per minute input from rate of turn indicator when present Speed Over Ground 1 10 Kt resolution from 0 to 102 Kts
330. ou ever need to permanently uninstall the software from your computer please contact Jeppesen Marine Customer Support in order to release the Site Key before completing the uninstall process To Get a Site Key 1 Launch Nobeltec Navigation from the icon on your desktop 2 Input your Serial Number when prompted 3 A window will appear containing an overview of Jeppesen Marine s Software License Agreement and a response prompt If you agree to the terms of the Software License Agreement click Agree When the Site Key dialog appears click the Get Site Key button There are three options available to get a Site Key a Ifthe computer you are using is directly connected to the Internet select From the Internet automated and click Next A Site Key will be automatically loaded and you can proceed with usage Remember to Register Your Product for free Technical Support or Visual Series Site Key xj How To Get Site Key Select how you want to get your site key to unlock the Visual Series E a C Use the Nobeltec Web Site C Contact Nobeltec by Phone ca Figure 2 1 Getting The Site Key b If there is another computer available and connected to the Internet select Use the Nobeltec Web Site and click Next Write No S S 2 ar S A S l N 4 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide down the Site Code that displays and proceed to Step 6 or c If you
331. ound SOG GPS Data etc in a distinct information panel in large font type This content allows you to quickly check To modify or create a new layout select a layout consisting of 1 4 data provided by hardware sources system feedback etc V gt l ce 118 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide NOTE You must have connected the appropriate hardware to display specific data types in Navinfo For example if you wish to display water temperature you must have connected a temperature gauge to your computer and set up Nobeltec Navigation Software to receive data from that device To display Navinfo in NavView you must set up a Navinfo layout using the View Manager or right click on the current window and select Show in this pane a Navinfo Panel 1 4 The Navinfo window is sub divided into content specific subpanels Each subpanel contains one type of information such as Course Over Ground Rate of Turn etc and can be customized as to data content data layout such as displaying numeric values or histograms colors and update frequency NavInfo Right Click Options When you are using NavView with a Navinfo window open you can right click on that window to open a context menu that contains the following options e Customize Layout Opens the Navinfo Wizard where you can configure your NavInfo panels for vertical or horizontal displays and numbers of subpanels for each display e Customize Subpanel Ope
332. oute Detail and Marks Tab Column Order Use this feature to change in what order columns appear onscreen in the Route Detail and Marks tabs 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu From the Routes tab click on the Route Detail Tab or Marks tab Click the Column Setup button in the lower right corner of the window From the Column Setup dialog box select a column name and then click on the Up or Down button to move it in the list When the Column Setup dialog box is closed the column header names will be displayed from left to right in the tab 4 When finished click OK Importing and Exporting Data You can import and export data from the PlanBook or from the Nobeltec Navigation Software main menu Both have the same effect and launch the same Import and Export dialog box You can export data in two formats Open Navigation Format ONF or Comma Separated Values CSV CSV is the best format to use when viewing data in a spreadsheet ONF is a format that can be easily re imported into Nobeltec Navigation Software ONF can be used when saving route history that you intend to use at a later date and stores with a txt extension Importing and Exporting Data Using the PlanBook To import navigation object data 1 Click the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu 2 From any of the four Tabs in the PlanBook click the Import button to Chapter 9 Pla
333. oute in the opposite direction from which it was created you must first reverse the order of the waypoints To reverse the order of a route 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints be sure to right click on the route not the waypoint 2 Choose Reverse from the pop up menu Waypoint numbers will reverse order Existing marks that have been used in another route and renamed keep their names when the route is reversed Only waypoints with their original automatically assigned numbers will be renumbered Route Wizard The Route Wizard automatically creates a route from a user selected origin to destination You can set parameters such as depth distance from land minimum and maximum route leg lengths etc The Route Wizard requires 3D bathymetric or detailed vector data in order to automatically create a route Before you start using the Route Wizard it is important to note two things e Start and end waypoint locations cannot be on land and must conform to the parameters that you set For example if you set the distance from land to 300 feet the starting and ending waypoints must be at least 300 feet from shore If you click Use Pre Existing Route Legs the Route Wizard will attempt N Il D S o Qa gt S a A gt Q Ce S S S xX i N 44 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide to create the route using parts or all of nearby routes To create a rout
334. ow Water Cross Track Error W Tender Alarm Figure 8 5 Boat Properties Alarm Tab Boundary Alarm s There are two types of Boundary Alarms Boat Crosses Boundary and Predictor Crosses Boundary To use the Predictor Crosses Boundary Alarm you must first activate the Boat Predictor Line see the Tools Options Targets Tab settings in this chapter To set a Boundary Alarm 1 Place a check mark in the Boat Crosses Boundary or Predictor Crosses Boundary check box Click the button to open the Boundary Alarm Settings dialog box Choose the type of alarm sound No Sound Sound Once or Sound Continuous and then click OK Shallow Water Alarm The Shallow Water Alarm is triggered when the value supplied by a depth sounder is less than the user specified minimum depth This feature does not work if there are no depth inputs connected to the computer To set a Shallow Water Alarm 1 Place a check mark in the Shallow Water check box 2 Click the j button to open the Shallow Water Alarm Settings dialog box 3 Input the water depth that will trigger the alarm Choose which value to base the alarm from Water Depth Depth Below Transducer or Depth Below Keel 5 Choose the type of alarm sound No Sound Sound Once or Sound Continuous 6 Seta Transducer Offset This setting calculates the vertical distance from the surface of the water to the transducer s installed location Establishing your offset in
335. ows tide and currents information for closest e Right Click Once you click this button your next mouse click within the stations program will open the applicable right click pop up menu for the type e Weather Shows weather conditions for your location based on your of information displayed onscreen Vector chart Radar and so on selection of weather provider see Chapter 13 Wind and Weather e GPS Trip Tab This tab displays information about current trip including time trip commenced duration speed distance and odometer distance e Targets Displays target information if available Status Messages These are warning messages and information about various issues concerning your charts GPS and networking It is Figure 18 3 Tool Buttons important to note that target threats such as ARPA MARPA and AIS targets when detected are sent to the Targets panel and not the Status Messages panel NavView InfoBar r The InfoBar is located at the bottom of the NavView screen and is designed GPS Trip Tab of the InfoBar to display navigation information Use the Back and Next buttons to toggle The GPS Trip tab of the NavView InfoBar is used to view information about through the different information displays the strength of satellite signals used by your GPS You can also check odometer readings from this tab Display the GPS Trip tab using the Back and Next buttons to toggle through InfoBar options Fields and buttons in this dialog
336. p file to the Tides and Currents section e Nearest Allows you to search for the nearest tide or current stations e Event Provides the ability to search for a Tide or Current station based on specific events such as specific heights or speeds time of slack or changes amount of swings etc e Export Customize an export of Tide or Current information to a file e RealTime Opens a customizable bar that displays real time Tide or Current values for selected stations e Change Changes the station being displayed changes the station displayed in the current window instead of opening a new window e TideDef Provides the ability to build custom Tide stations e CurrDef Provides the ability to build custom Current stations Multiple Windows in Tides and Currents Multiple tide and current windows can be open at the same time Stations can be opened in a new window by clicking on the Tide or Current buttons on the ToolBar and selecting a station i Q Ro a gt wn 2 D Ww x A Q a l 80 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Tides and Currents on the NavBar The Tides and Currents as they relate to your vessel or a particular location can be displayed on the NavBar see Figure 11 4 The NavBar is a tool that provides easy access to information such as tide and current predictions Figure 11 4 Tides amp Currents on the NavBar ETA Calculator The ETA Calcula
337. pear if you double click in a text box For users who do not have a keyboard at the helm e Default for Opening Photo Windows Chart Blend or Stand Alone co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa A SZ 2 S O ae SS J Aa a aL l co 54 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide e Popup Transparency Sets the transparency level of any popup menu or dialog box Choose from High Medium or Low e Text Highlighting Displays yellow region behind text onscreen e Rotate Range Bearing Leg Text Aligns text with the route leg e Object to Trace in T amp C NavBar Select Vessel or the active Mark e Distance to Search for T amp C Stations Choose from 3 10 25 or 100 km e Display Current Warning Dialog Indicates whether or not a warning message appears when currents over 3 Kts are encountered while performing calculations in the ETA calculator e Show Distance Across Instead of Scale Shows actual distance across the chart window e Reset Passport Layers on Startup Resets to defaults at each startup e NavView Snap Back Timer Admiral only Determines how long before NavView re centers on the boat e Enable Warning Indicator Flashing Indicates whether or not the Warning Indicators will flash when an important event happens e Scaling User Nav Objects Use this option to scale the user objects with the chart or to always draw them at full size e Show Mark Names Enables or disables display of Ma
338. pear in the Chart window pane when a text message is received Chapter 20 Target Tracking 133 Type of Ship Cargo Short Label Long Label ID e0 PASSENGER Posas U UU o mwe foes OOO Tanker Ship DG HS MP D o fomen ower peatsnp Table 20 1 Types of Ship Cargo Broadcast Short Label Long Label 1B foo Notinuse fois fiwe SSS 21 WIG DG A Wing In Ground Craft Carrying DG Dangerous Goods HS Harmful Substances or MP Marine Pollutants category A High Speed Craft DG HS MP D No O l S Ka A emh i S A O D S ven Q l S N 134 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide DSC Equipped Marine Radio Support DSC equipped marine radios provide vessel tracking for both DSC polling and distress calls When you poll another boater who is also equipped with DSC technology for their position request Nobeltec Navigation Software will display their returned information onscreen alerting you to their location and direction Your DSC radio must have a DSC NMEA out port and be configured to send NMEA data to the Nobeltec Navigation Software Once the DSC radio is installed and sending NMEA data to NNS position reports and distress calls can be plotted onscreen Every vessel is assigned an MMSI Number a unique nine digit identifier for tracking using DSC Numbers are assigned through the International Telecommunications Union You can plot MMSI numbers polle
339. pecify the location of the GPS on your vessel which makes positioning the boat icon on the chart more accurate Use the Tool Tips to give you more information about each setting i NOTE Keel Offset the distance from the bottom of the keel to the transducer is automatically calculated using your Transducer Offset Tools Options Sounder Transducer Offset and Draft settings Boat X General Log D R Track Alarms Stats Display Range Circle as thet mo ft T GPS Offset from the Port Bow i Specify GPS Position From Bow 10 0 ft Draft 15 0 TO Beam 35 0 TO Length 22 0 KEJ From Fort 14 0 ft Medium Figure 8 7 Boat Properties Stats Tab Min Wessel Size Display Tab The Display Tab is where you set the shape of the boat icon Nobeltec Traditional or Rounded as well as specifications for the vessel s heading line Heading line length can be set to be Short Medium or Long to edge of screen and you can also set how thick the heading line will appear co I S 8 a a Ro Ss Q wa WA SZ a S x kar 2a a S aL l ee 50 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Range Circle Tab Range Circles display your range to any potentially dangerous obstacles Use the Range Circle Tab to place range circles around your vessel Tools Options Menu The Nobeltec Navigation Software Options menu can be accessed by selecting T
340. play or hide a Mark name 1 Open Tools Options Misc 2 Select Yes or No from the Show Mark Names option default is Yes Hide Range Bearing Information 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints 2 From the pop up menu click the Hide Leg Range Bearing command You can also use the lt Shift R gt Hot Key to toggle Leg Range Bearings on and off Changing a Waypoint Icon Each waypoint in a route has its own properties such as the icon displayed All of the properties for an individual waypoint can be edited 1 Right click on a waypoint and select Properties from the menu 2 Click on the Icon Tab of the Properties dialog box Scroll through the list and select a new icon Changing the Color of a Route 1 Right click on any leg of the route and select Color from the menu 2 From the color palette choose the color you want and click OK or Apply to change the route s color L i S wa o A wa a gt A lt A WA S ia I Koe 40 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Locking Objects This feature secures any object you have placed and prevents accidental nudging or deletion Locking Objects With Multiple Points This step locks an entire object 1 With the object that you want to lock on the screen right click on the line between any two points 2 From the pop up menu select Locking Lock Object Type Locking Single Point Objects To lo
341. possible Use this Tab to choose which chart to quilt with the current chart onscreen from the selection of multiple charts The PlanBook The PlanBook is used to make precise estimates on arrival times fuel consumption and other key issues that contribute to planning long trips You can also use the PlanBook to organize data such as routes marks etc The PlanBook Figure 4 7 can be displayed next to a chart window See Chapter 8 PlanBook for more information on using the PlanBook Displaying the PlanBook From the main menu click on Tools PlanBook or the PlanBook ToolBar Features of the PlanBook include Import Export Used to access the Import Export dialog e Show All Hide All Used to show or hide all objects e Properties Displays the properties window for the selected object e Goto Highlight an object to open a new chart window centered on this location e Delete This will delete the selected object Routes After you have created a route on the charts use the Routes Tab of the PlanBook to set the speed of each route leg This information combined with Currents information is how arrival time at each waypoint is calculated The Routes Tab has two display modes Route List and Route Details accessible by clicking on the tabs in the center section of the Routes Tab Selected routes are highlighted in yellow on the Routes Tab and Marks are highlighted in yellow on the Route Detail Tab Start and End waypo
342. precise Lat Lon coordinates to input To create a new route using the PlanBook 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab 2 With the Routes Tab open click the New button 3 Input a name for the new route in the dialog box and click OK to open the Insert Waypoint window Insert Waypoint x Define New Waypoint Name Icon Latitude Longitude New Test Waypoint Circle C Select an Existing Waypoint El z l Insert Waypoint Cancel Figure 9 2 PlanBook Insert Waypoint Window 4 Input your Lat Lon coordinates or to use an existing waypoint click the radio button labeled Select an Existing Waypoint and select from the list of available waypoints 5 Once information for the new waypoint has been input click Insert Waypoint Repeat for each waypoint in your new route 6 When finished entering all waypoints click OK Adding a Waypoint to an Existing Route Use this feature to add a new waypoint to an existing route This is useful when adding segments to a route that already exists To add a new waypoint to an existing route 1 Click on PlanBook or select Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu to view the Routes Tab 2 Select the name of the route to edit 3 From the Route Detail Tab click the waypoint prior to or after the location of the new waypoint 4 Click Insert After or Insert Before The Insert Waypoint Window will be
343. purchased i e WF28 4 Follow the displayed instructions When prompted input the 20 digit Chart Permit number for every region you have purchased 5 After every region you purchased has been input click Done and then launch your Nobeltec Navigation Software Newly installed Passport Charts will be available as soon as the program opens AN TIP Chart Permits and product Serial Numbers are often confused due to a similarity in format Always verify which code you are using Passport Deluxe Charts and Supplemental Data Sets Passport Deluxe is Jeppesen Marine s comprehensive supplemental nautical data solution for North America It includes Passport World Charts photo charts raster charts and 3D bathymetric charts as well as an additional data pack containing Coast Pilot place name marks local info marks light and buoy data geographic location marks and world port index information Like World Charts each Passport Deluxe region is unlocked with a Chart Permit sold separately Passport Deluxe Chart Permits include World Charts i NOTE Not every Passport Deluxe region includes all of the above listed data types Refer to the Jeppesen Marine Nobeltec website at www nobeltec com or your Jeppesen Marine Nobeltec product distributor for complete details Installing Current Passport Deluxe Chart Permits Before you install Passport Deluxe charts and supplemental data please redeem the product voucher for one complimen
344. r The Status LED on the black box is off The Status LED on the black box is flashing green The Status LED on the black box is red The Status LED on the black box is steady green Use the accompanying CD to reinstall SeaLevel drivers Check the fuses and the circuit breakers Check power to the black box with a voltmeter Also verify that the data cable between the computer and the black box is properly wired and connected The Nobeltec InSight Sounder and the Nobeltec Navigation Software are not communicating properly Check the wiring of the data cable There is a problem with the InSight Sounder Please contact Technical Support at 800 598 4976 The Nobeltec InSight Sounder is communicating with your Nobeltec Navigation Software You should check the transducer connector to ensure it is wired properly and check the transducer impedance with an ohmmeter If these all appear to be in good order and the Sounder is still not detected please contact Technical Support at 800 598 4976 Table 22 4 GPS Port Setup Wizard Does not Detect Sounder These are the most common errors associated with the InSight Sounder If you are experiencing an issue that is not addressed here please contact Jeppesen Marine s Nobeltec Technical Support Team 23 Bathy Recorder The Nobeltec Bathy Recorder sold as a Plus Pack to Visual Navigation Suite VNS and Nobeltec Admiral enables you to record sea floor topographic informati
345. r Tools Options Weather Nobeltec and GRIB Weather Options GRIB Weather Data Getting GRIB Weather Data VNS and Admiral Getting OCENS WeatherNet Data Admiral GRIB Weather Options 85 85 85 86 86 86 86 86 87 87 87 87 87 88 89 89 89 89 GRIB Weather at Route OCENS WeatherNet Admiral only 89 XM WxWorx Weather Data Plus Pack Getting XM Weather Data XM WxWorx Weather Layers XM WxWorx Weather Legend XM Marine Statements and Warnings SkyMate Weather Data Select SkyMate During Installation Getting SkyMate Weather Data Nobeltec Weather Data Getting Nobeltec Weather Data Step 1 Obtain Weather Data Step 2 View Weather Data Nobeltec Weather Region Nobeltec Weather Date Nobeltec Weather Options Nobeltec Base and Valid Times 14 Autopilot Autopilot Connections Wiring Settings 90 90 90 91 91 91 91 91 91 91 92 92 92 92 92 92 95 95 95 95 Definitions Of Autopilot Setting Options Using the Autopilot On the Water How to Use the Autopilot Active Mark How to Use the Autopilot Active Route Arrival Circle and Crossing the Perpendicular Setting Arrival Distance for Existing Marks Changing the Default Arrival Distance 15 Upload Download Special Notice Regarding Data Backup How to Restore an Archived Backup Upload Download Basic Terms Wiring Your GPS For Upload Download Proprietary Protocols Uploading to a GPS Downloading from a GPS Setting the Computer Clock 16 Cus
346. r Apply e To move and dock panels on the Console drag and drop the panel into place e To remove a panel drag and drop the panel off of the Console then close the panel using the X in the corner This cannot be undone Units Tab Use the Units Tab to change the units of measurement for Speed Depth Length Liquid Volume Distance and Temperature displayed in the software Options are metric nautical and U S units of measure including Statute Miles for Distance The Distance Long Units Short Units setting is designed to aid with both long range and short range settings From Tools Options Misc select Yes from the Use Far Distancing option Measurements once set are displayed throughout Nobeltec Navigation Software according to your preference Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 53 Misc Tab The Misc Tab of the Options Menu is where you configure usage settings Options and brief description are listed below For most of these settings Yes means activate and No means disable Occasionally there may be an alternate option such as High Medium and Low e Confirm Deleting Objects Requests confirmation of each deletion e Ask for Name of Objects Enables the naming prompt e Automatically Select Next Chart Automatically opens the adjacent chart when an object moves beyond the edge of the current chart e Automatically Turn on DR if No GPS If the positioning devices fail vessel icon will continue to
347. r Control ToolBar Radar Tools ToolBar Radar Advanced ToolBar Admiral Only Initial Radar Setup Setting the Trigger Delay Adjusting the Radar Heading Line Rotation Compass Settings Adjusting the Compass Master Heading Correction Creating a Compass Deviation Table Setting IR2 Radar Presets 4kW Models and Above Only Auto Tune Auto Gain Auto Sea Clutter STC Curve Range IR2 Radars only Auto Range Radar Range ToolBars Gain Auto Gain 4kW and Higher Sea Clutter SEA Auto SEA 4kW and Higher Rain Interference Rejection IR Range and Bearing to Target Range Rings Variable Range Marker VRM Electronic Bearing Line EBL Guard Zones 137 137 137 137 137 137 138 138 138 138 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 Pulse Length 4kW and Higher Radar Orientation rotation 4kW and Higher Off Centering the Radar Shifting 4kW and Higher Recording the Radar Decluttering the Radar Resizing the Radar Image Using Radar in Admiral Advanced Features NavView s Multiple Monitor Support Full Screen Radar Console NavView ToolBars Target Tracking Point and Click Radar MARPA Acquiring MARPA Targets MARPA Symbology Setting a Target Alarm Target Tracking Terms and Acronyms Radar Configuration Options Tools Options Targets Tools Options Radar Understanding Radar How to Interpret the Radar Picture Normal Echoes False Echoes False echoes caused by reflection False echoes caused by multipl
348. r Controls A ea A A A YA a a a a a a a a E The Radar Controls ToolBar in NavView controls the radar in the same way as the ToolBar of the same name in PlanView E ea GeEwMWEOAAXR The Radar Tools ToolBar in NavView has a few extra radar tools that are used for Admiral features only In addition to the main NavView ToolBars Admiral has two additional ToolBar buttons Double Speed 4kW and Higher When connected to a 24 volt power source the IR2 can operate at twice its normal antenna rotation speed Double speed is useful for high speed vessels or when operating in tight navigation waterways By operating at double speed the radar is refreshed at twice normal speed Acquire Targets Mode This button puts your cursor into the acquire targets mode for manually identifying radar targets This is discussed in greater detail below Target Tracking The Admiral product has a built in comprehensive target tracking system Targets can be acquired one of three ways AIS Automatic Identification System is a system where vessels can broadcast position course speed rate of turn and other useful information It can be used to educate local traffic about the traffic conditions Vessels of a certain size are required to broadcast the AIS signals but anyone can listen If your vessel is equipped with an AIS receiver or transceiver Nobeltec Admiral picks up the incoming information and paints the targets on the chart
349. r Earth Figure 21 30 Ducting If air layers having a different temperature or different atmospheric pressures are produced alternately in the altitudes a distant target exceeding the visible range of the radar is detectable This phenomenon is caused when air layers having a different temperature contact each other The radio waves are not refracted but reflected on the boundary where the two layers differ As a result radio waves can be propagated farther that the curvature of the earth The passage where the radio waves travel is called a Duct The abnormal propagation of radio waves through this duct is called ducting Minimum Detectable Range The minimum distance at which the radar can detect a target is called the Minimum Detectable Range This minimum range varies depending on radar factors such as transmission pulse width RF leakage time and height of the transceiver Height of Transceiver Vertical beam of Antenna height radar wave Antenna height and vertical beam pattern affecting detection of short range target Figure 21 31 Height of Your Transceiver The height of your transceiver affects the short range target detection If the transceiver is mounted at a relatively high level from the sea surface the radar wave may skip closer targets causing the radar to fail in detection of these closer targets The radar s Vertical Beam Width is also involved as shown in the figure above A wider beam results i
350. r End Color If using gradient or alternating these are the colors from which the gradients or first alternating colors start or end in the velocity ranges or circles e Restore Defaults Click this button to reset all display settings to the original default settings that came with this Plus Pack Polar Values Tab Create and manage your polar diagrams using the Polar Values tab Fields available on the Polar Values tab include e Active Polar file name The active polar file name appears When you installed Nobeltec no polar was selected so the default Polar file name is No file selected The active polar filename is stored across sessions e Polar Name Type the name you want to associate with this polar e Load Polar File Click this button to browse to the folder where co I 8 a a Ro Ss wa WA SZ 2 S x kar 2a a 2 aL l co 66 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide the polar file you want to load is located In the folder named InstallLocation Polars you will see stock polar files for common boats The file type function searches for the Nobeltec polar extension spp but you can also select All Files which allows you to open polar files from many sailing programs When you select a file type designed for another sailing program Nobeltec attempts to read the file If the file cannot be read a message appears stating this Polar Display Sett
351. r current station for which you would like to view a graph 3 From the pop up menu select View In Tides amp Currents 4 The Tides amp Currents program will open see Figure 11 3 and you should see a graph that covers a 24 hour period The graph will contain several important pieces of information more details below BF Tikes WHITER HARBOUR AAAA Tide Cited Pro Tides Cab Klani AU T A DOOR ae i ri Search Yes ma poma Siram bi HLR AAT 3 DADON OFZET0R Viet Wa tao Gt Eat Phat Ceras ina PL bora iaia hA Tin T SOG MA nd ee tke Ok Oks th ee ea ea de a a E E TAM am ASA Figure 11 3 Tides amp Currents Graph The Tides amp Currents Graph The yellow background represents daylight hours sunrise to sunset Mean Lower Low Water MLLW and Mean Higher High Water MHHW or the Max Flood and Ebb values are displayed on the right side of the graph The crossing lines on the graph show the corresponding time height for tides or speed direction for currents combination You can click anywhere in the graph to see a new time height The graph will also show the Moon Phase and Moonset and Moonrise times as well as the daily high and low values Weekly View and Daily Table Two useful optional features on the graph are the Weekly View and the Daily Table The Weekly View appears on the top of the daily graph and shows an overall picture of what the station looks like for an entire week The Daily Tabl
352. r from the pop up menu 2 Using the ETA Calculator dialog box select Best Departure Time from the three available options and click Next 3 Input your estimated average vessel speed and the earliest and latest dates and times that you would like to depart Click Compute 4 The ETA Calculator will now compute your best and worst departure times and list them in the ETA Calculator window see Figure 11 5 5 Ifyou are finished with the ETA Calculator click Done If you want to perform other calculations click on the Back button x Compute Best Departure Time ETA Calculator best and worst departure times are computed for the range Cy Enter the earliest and latest starting times of the trip The entered Vessel Speed 10 0 kts Earliest Departure 3 1 2003 5 16 05 PM Latest Departure 3 2 2003 1 16 05 AM 10 4 KTS lt lt Xe 4 hrs 13 mins 6 00p 800p 10 00p 12 00 a Departure Times SOG 2 A w 3 hs 55 mins Best 03 02 2003 1 164M 3 hrs 55 mins Departure Times ee 03 01 2003 8 43PM 4 hrs 13 mins Fuel Estimate 35 USGal 38 USGal lt Back Finish Cancel Help Figure 11 5 ETA Calculator Best Departure Time Calculating Transit Time This tool calculates EDT when your intent is to arrive at a certain place at a certain time factoring in obstacles and tides or currents To calculate Transit Time 1 Start the ETA Calculator by right clicking
353. r preferences clock with your computer and type of station additional functions Click these buttons to Use these controls to scroll Daily high and low values Click here to create your own search for a station through days month and years for this station tide or current station Wer Optio I x 4195 12 gt 82 AADO 4ZaT0F an HARBOURYy 12 19 2006 Tides amp Currents Pro Tides Obhu Island HONOLULYY 11 6 2006 F P arch View Time Options incor Help i e Current Groups Prev Mi Prey D SetDate Next D Next i Contig hA Export R Time Chart Change TideDef CurDef Notes Oahu Island HONOLULU x Lat 21 18 24N Lon 157 52 00 W Harmonic station NOAA Station ID 2517 Moonset 7 59am Daily Highs amp Lowes Average Tides e p Moonrise 7 01 pm Higi 436an 27t Mean Range 1 30 ft gt Skxing Tide Low tham Ot MHH 2 00 ft Ful noon yesterday Hah 442 pm oet Mean Tide 0 80 ft Low O45 pm 02At Current Speed and Direction at Ebb and Flood Moon Phase Moonrise FFAN NN l and Moonset Hawaii slas Weekly View Sunrise 6 37 am Prediction Date Shown Here Tue Thu 11 9 3 5 3 0 25 2 0 2 00 ft MHHYY 15 FEET 1 0 05 0 0 00 ft MLL 05 1 Time WIN ta 12 24 am 0 9 ft For Help press EY Hours are Daylight hours are indicated by yellow Displays direction of Table displays tidal current shown here night is
354. r window pane and select Adjust Radar Presets from the pop up window or select Radar Adjust Radar Presets Set the Harbor Sea preset to 10 Set the STC Curve preset to 4 Click OK Manually adjust the gain until you get secondary echoes throughout the image make sure your radar color selection allows you discern between strong and weak echoes Re open the Adjust Radar Presets window 7 Adjust the Harbor Sea preset value up until most of the weak echoes are eliminated Click OK Adjust the radar range to 1 8nm and verify that strong echoes from nearby vessels or land are not eliminated If land or vessel echoes are small or have been eliminated follow the previous steps to decrease the Harbor Sea Clutter preset Chapter 21 Radar Usage 143 STC Curve The STC Curve function allows you to control all modes of the Sea Clutter profile of the radar By default the STC Curve profile is set to a value of 4 For most applications there should be no need to change this setting However you may want to adjust this value to get a better application of Sea Clutter if the radar is mounted higher or lower than is typical To adjust the STC Curve profile 1 Set the radar range to 12nm 2 Set Gain and Sea Clutter to manual settings 3 When the STC curve profile is set to a lower number sea clutter is applied in an area close to the vessel Setting the curve profile to a higher number causes STC to be applied to more of the image 4 Determ
355. radars transmit information between the transceiver and a display unit in analog form only Single Port Sealevel Device i NOTE There are several IR2 models This chapter discusses the most common usage of the IR2 with some footnotes for the 2kW Dome IR2 which varies from other IR2 models in behavior Heading Sensor NMEA 0183 Computer NMEA 0183 Figure 21 2 IR2 2D20 2kW Dome Setup N l q S S S D 136 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide LURIdgLips AA LHD PA LUMOn MA Has N A Logam WA Brisa uw re ioe l ajx De WKADOOGA AQX GASSER ODRA R S anana TERE eee oA S 5 B a T Le 4557597 N InSight Radar S Igoe ee Window Pane in gt PlanView N are gt Bikes weiter i Sema ampere ries FTE Taga Dseacn Eco Cursor Position Buren Tooltip Selected ObjectLast Clicked Location LAT 45 306 N 45 30508 a Gg wobec aj ueram EAR BAR RNG L714 rm 7 i a B Depths 14 ft HH LAG isi 3Me lt c lt Y gt gt man 0 T 10 Deptt 12 ft j 15920 3 20 00 Eca nm 4 InSight Radar Window e e I Pane in Admiral s NavView na N A sa N A EAN JA Figure 21 3 Radar Overlay in Nobeltec Navigation Software The InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB What is the IR2 BB The InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB is a specially designed hardware component that converts the analog output signal from many existing radars into a digital format usable by a personal co
356. ransparent overlay of available radar coverage from XM e Buoy Reports Buoy station icons can be right clicked to display real time location based information e Storm Cells Storm cells are an icon displayed with a forecasted predictor line e City Forecast Cities display as a three letter city abbreviation within a blue oval Right click on the oval and select City Forecast from the pop up menu to open the forecast dialog e Marine Zone Forecasts When this field is checked you can right click within a region and select Marine Zone Forecast from the pop up menu to open a forecast window Use the forecast window to choose which region forecast None High Seas or Coastal to display on the chart XM WxWorx Weather Legend Click the Legend button on the NavBar Weather tab to open a PDF containing a legend of how XM Weather Layers appear onscreen XM Marine Statements and Warnings Click the Marine Statements and Warnings button on the NavBar Weather tab to open a text file containing current warnings pertinent to your location SkyMate Weather Data In order to use SkyMate features you must own SkyMate satellite hardware and have selected SkyMate Support during your initial Nobeltec Navigation Software installation Learn more about SkyMate connectivity solutions at www skymate com SkyMate features allow you to navigate your boat while remaining connected to email weather and many other off shore satellite connectivity bene
357. ratinns x p Show All Hide All ceel Only display targets that are not anchored moored or aground Figure 8 20 AIS Filtering Tender Directory The Tender Directory manages all tenders wave runners jet skis etc that are transmitting data to Nobeltec Navigation Software via a Seetrac Tender Unit STU Use the Tender Directory to input the Tender ID Description Channel the Tender is broadcasting on and the duration for the Seetrac Base Unit to listen to that Channel Up to 99 Tenders may be tracked at a given time See Chapter 25 Tender Tracker for more details e Managed Mode Place a check mark in this check box to configure Channel and Duration settings NOTE Tender Tracker has two modes Autonomous and Managed Channel and Duration only function in Managed Mode e Tender ID Input the numeric value for the Tender you wish to track e Description Input a description of the Tender tracked on this channel The description you input will appear on your charts if you select to display Target Names e Channel Managed Mode only Select the channel this Tender is using to transmit data 1 17 Default is Channel 1 e Duration Managed Mode only Select a duration for this Tender s signal from the drop down menu 0 30 Default is 5 seconds GlassBridge Network Tab Admiral Only This Tab is used to configure your onboard network when using Admiral See Chapter 19 Networking for more in
358. ration to assign to the window pane When you select the layout the Navinfo Wizard closes and the panel automatically updates See Figure 18 12 Navinfo Wizard NaviInfoPanel 1 EHL JERS 2 Figure 18 12 Navinfo Wizard Select a Layout To Customize a Navinfo Subpanel iP Right click on a Navinfo window pane subpanel and select Customize subpanel from the pop up menu The Customize Subpanel window opens and you can update the contents of the selected subpanel from this window There are two main components to a subpanel that you can customize Display Settings and Data Types e Display Settings include Background Start Color Background End Color Font Color Histogram Line Color and Update Frequency in seconds e Data Types include all possible Navinfo data such as COG SOG wind angles depth etc e You can also choose to apply the new settings to all subpanels by placing a mark in the Apply to all subpanels check box If a data type has not been assigned to a NavInfo subpanel the panel appears with the selected background colors only Click OK when you have finished customizing the subpanel Chapter 18 NavView 119 Novinto Customize Subpanel x Despley Settings Option Setting Rahgoursd SetColor iii tesdground End Coty Port Color __3 Histogram Line Color a Update Frequency seconds Apply to af abonet Background Imoge it Data Types COG Course Ove G
359. re Defaults Manual Gain 10 a Te ee 0 50 Tune lai n Figure 21 10 Radar Presets There are several presets that affect the quality of the image This section only reviews those that affect the performance of the radar while using the auto functions The Radar Presets window is used for all preset controls actual values may vary from those in Figure 21 10 Pressing OK applies and saves any changes you have made Pressing Cancel eliminates any changes you have made and restores the settings prior to modification Restore Defaults sets the values to out of the box defaults Auto Tune Nobeltec radars are always in Auto Tune mode To optimize the image it is necessary to set the auto tune preset Once established you should not need to adjust the auto tune preset unless the image quality deteriorates Generally you should adjust the auto tune preset on average once a year to make sure you have the highest quality image Follow these steps 1 Select Adjust Radar Presets by right clicking on the radar image window or select Radar Radar Presets from the main menu 2 Adjust the auto tune control down until you see the image start to deteriorate Note the value of the setting 3 Adjust the auto tune control up past the point where the image looks good until it starts to deteriorate Take note of the setting value 4 Set the controls at a point between the two extreme settings where the quality of the image is at
360. re available for your radar model While higher resolution provides an improved radar image it generally consumes more memory Chapter 21 Radar Usage 155 Image Clipping Some radars return the radar image in a square shape This setting allows you to keep the radar image square or clip the corners to see a more standard circular radar image Always Open Radar Display Yes selects whether or not to open a radar display by default each time the program launches Full Screen NavView Radar Console Admiral only In NavView when the InSight radar is full screen the Radar Console appears This option determines where to place the console Left Right or None Colors The InSight radar allows you to change the colors of display elements to make objects more visible in different lighting situations or for viewing preference To adjust your color settings use the slider tabs to adjust the size of the color section Once the slider tabs are in place you can right click in any color section to open the Color Selection dialog box and set your desired color settings Understanding Radar The capability of a radar varies depending on where the radar is mounted the radar s performance weather conditions and the skill of the operator How to Interpret the Radar Picture To interpret the radar picture an operator should be familiar with the radar video presentation caused by the wanted and unwanted effects For instance radar images produ
361. re centers the radar image and performs r the same command in a chart window Figure 21 14 Radar Look Ahead Mode Radar image is off centered to the Look Ahead position Notice that the heading line extends up on the image and the North indicator extends to the lower right side N l q S S WS fae S Aa S S S ce l T N 148 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Recording the Radar Record Playback Control Nobeltec Navigation Software can record radar images from your voyage and play them back at a later time Clicking on this button launches a dialog that looks like a VCR control Radar Record Playback r F jja 10 a I Pay Rew aus Feci Stop Figure 21 15 Radar Record Playback Play This button launches a dialog where you can browse to pre recorded radar files Radar files are saved with a rad ras or rec extension Once located the radar display plays the recordings back at real time speeds i NOTE Not all radars support the Record Playback functions Rewind This rewinds the radar file that you are currently viewing Pause Pauses the radar file that you are currently viewing Record Begins recording radar data in real time When you click on this button you will be prompted to designate the file name and location to store the radar recording on your hard drive or server Stop Stops radar file playback Loop Replays the selected radar playback f
362. re s efficient search engine The Search tool intelligently finds matches to the text you provide such as tide and current stations not immediately seen on your charts Nobeltec s Place Name Search feature is particularly robust allowing you to search all vector charts quickly returning a list of all charts containing the data you requested The searchable text field allows you to use Hot Keys such as lt Ctrl C gt or lt Ctrl Insert gt to copy text lt Ctrl V gt or lt Shift Insert gt to paste text lt Ctrl Z gt or lt Alt Back gt to undo paste of text lt Ctrl X gt to cut text etc Select an item from the returned list and the corresponding chart will immediately open with the requested location highlighted GPS Trip Tab The GPS Trip Tab on the NavBar displays information about GPS data including odometer readings that provide specific numbers such as distance travelled to help you assess the progress of your trip Information fields and buttons on this tab include e GPS Signal Strength This diagram contains a relative sky map containing the approximate location of available satellites Next to the diagram up to sixteen GPS satellites can be displayed as white bars with the height of the bar representing the strength of signal If the bar is labelled W it is a WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System satellite The relative height of the bars is displayed in front of a graph indicating 0 25 50 75 or 100 signal str
363. reatly improve security and safety of these affiliate vessels and objects Unlocking Tender Tracker Once you purchase Nobeltec Tender Tracker Plus Pack your Jeppesen Marine product distributor will provide you with an Unlock Code This code will unlock the Tender Tracker Plus Pack features already embedded in Nobeltec Navigation Software To use your Unlock Code to unlock Tender Tracker follow the instructions on Page 6 Installing New Chart Permits and Unlock Codes Upon installation of the Tender Tracker Unlock Code all Tender Tracker functionality is available However you still need to direct Nobeltec Admiral to look for SBU output in order to recognize Tender Tracker data and display affiliate objects onscreen as secondary targets See Chapter 25 Tender Tracker Plus Pack for full details about and setup options for the Tender Tracker upgrade package features Chapter 21 Radar Usage 135 How Does the IR2 Work Installed Radar NOBELTEC D 21 Radar Usage Radar Functionality Nobeltec Navigation Software combined with radar input can greatly improve your navigation capabilities Interface Box There are two options that allow you to interface radar technology with Heading lt 2 gt ee Nobeltec Navigation Software Sensor C c F A Full Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 IR2 A radar specially designed aie ve 7 i C NMEA 0183 by Nobeltec to send digital imagery directly to a personal co
364. received by Nobeltec with a GPS position This means that you can find a return in the Sounder Navigation Software Furthermore the software must also be connected to Display drop a navigation mark called an Event Mark and see that mark an autopilot in order for autopilot commands to be sent onchart as well as in the Sounder Display window When you drop an Event Occasionally an echo shown in the Sounder Display will be interesting Mark the Event Mark icon is placed at the vessel s current location and a enough that you decide to return to that location By adding an Instant small white triangle is placed at the top of the Sounder Window to indicate Waypoint and selecting the returned target on the Sounder Display an the Event Mark s location relative to the boat icon immediate command can be sent to the autopilot directing the vessel back To add an Event Mark right click on the Chart Window and select New to that location Use the Instant Waypoint button on the main ToolBar or Event Mark or add the Event Mark ToolBar button to your program ToolBar select Instant Waypoint from the right click menu on the Sounder Display to create an Instant Waypoint S A l N N 168 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Me HASOOA A WXLOFSAM Bs ammen MRH BY yo 700 Ree Poti i Instant Waypoint p ToolBar Button_ Da a E my gt E a a i Figure 22 15 Instant Waypoint Ghost Curs
365. rent Wind and True Theoretical Wind data can be viewed for Speed AWS and TWS and Angle AWA and TWA You can also view True Theoretical Direction TWD Adjust AW and TW settings from Tools Options Weather e Speed AWS TWS Units as selected from Tools Options Units Angle AWA TWA Wind Angle can be displayed as either 0 180 Port or 0 180 Starboard or as 0 359 When using the Port or Starboard configuration data is accompanied by a Red arrow for Port and a Green arrow for Starboard This is the default setting Direction TWD Wind Direction will display as Magnetic or True depending on display settings you have established e Velocity Made Good Towards Wind VMG WND VMG is essentially your boat s velocity calculated against the direction of the wind Using this calculation allows you to account for wind factors in your velocity display speed and ETA calculations WARNING Wind data provided by Nobeltec Navigation Software is based on bearing and velocity This data is referred to as Velocity Made Good VMG data and cannot be thoroughly verified Conditions At Cursor With weather features selected and turned on under the Weather Option section move your cursor over the chart The Condition At Cursor box will display the values for the prediction types that you have selected to view Chapter 13 Wind amp Weather 87 For XM WxWorx and GRIB weather conditions at cursor will display up to four layers of
366. res of Nobeltec Visual Navigation Suite and Admiral 9 Use this table to determine if a feature is available in the product you are using Both products include real time tracking autopilot interface GPS upload download quilting for seamless charts Geo Draw charting engine unlimited routes marks waypoints and 3D Navigator Additional common features include AIS and DSC support Video Camera support Garmin USB GPS support boundaries amp alarms free US planning charts course up north up chart rotation and much more Product features are subject to change Hot Keys Unless otherwise noted a Hot Key will only function on the corresponding window pane or object when that window pane or object has focus Program Paste Text Only Application pt Opens PDF of User s Guide this lt F1 gt document Places a MOB mark beneath Boat Lat lt F4 gt Lon Opens vector chart if one is not currently open lt Ctrl Shift F4 gt a all open windows PlanView lt Shift F6 gt Cycle to previous view lt F9 gt Toggle between PlanView and NavView PlanBook Se Opens PDF of User s Guide this lt F1 gt document Program l Scroll chart in arrow direction lt Ctrl 1 gt lt Ctri gt lt Ctri lt gt lt Ctri gt lt Shift 1 gt lt Shift gt lt Shift lt gt lt Shift gt lt Shift Page Up gt lt Shift Page Down gt lt Shift End gt lt Shift Home gt Select next object
367. rk Name on chart e Disallow Mark Text Dragging Yes locks mark annotations No unlocks e Always Lock New Marks Yes to lock No to disable Always Start Program in NavView Admiral only Yes for NavView No to disable e Recommended Route Line Width Options are Normal or Thick e Show Overzoom Warning Lines Yes to show lines No to hide e NavView Auto Hide Time Admiral only Gives you the option to automatically hide NavView menu button and the InfoBar after a set period of time Other Features of the Misc Tab You can set the default waypoint arrival radius initial default 0 5 NM for all waypoints using the Misc Tab To adjust this value click on the Set Default Waypoint Arrival Distance button A dialog box will appear requesting the new arrival radius This performs the same function as the Waypoint Arrival Alarm see Alarm Tab You can choose default Mark Event Mark and Route Mark icons from their respective drop down lists set default fonts for all objects and set the chart scroll speed using the Set Chart Scroll Speed button Colors Tab The Colors Tab allows the user to set default colors for inactive routes the active route tracks boundaries range bearing lines and the recommended route To change the default colors 1 Click on the Colors Tab in the Tools Options menu 2 Next to the desired choice i e routes tracks etc click the drop down arrow next to the menu item to display the default c
368. rk Test Utility Troubleshooting Chart Sharing Clearing Network Charts 20 Target Tracking Targets Onscreen Prior to Setting Up Target Tracking Setting Up Target Tracking Configuring Nobeltec Software to Receive AIS Data Changing Target Appearance Using the DSC Directory Using the Tender Directory Targets NavBar and Targets InfoBar Locating a Target Onscreen Information Listed on the NavBar and InfoBar AIS Target Filtering Changing Alarm Settings How Targets Appear in NNS Naming Conventions for Targets What Is AIS Types of AIS Broadcasts Class A Class B AIS Base Station Received Text Messages Type of Ship Cargo DSC Equipped Marine Radio Support Tender Tracking Unlocking Tender Tracker 21 Radar Usage Radar Functionality The InSight Radar 2 IR2 What are the Benefits of Using an IR2 How Does the IR2 Work Important Notice Regarding 2kW Dome Models The InSight Radar 2 Black Box IR2 BB 126 126 126 126 126 127 127 127 128 128 129 129 129 129 129 129 130 130 131 131 131 132 132 132 132 132 133 134 134 134 135 135 135 135 135 135 137 What is the IR2 BB How Does the IR2 BB Work The InSight Radar Window Pane Opening the Radar Window Pane Transmit Standby Radar Right Click and Radar Menu PlanView Ghost Cursor Radar Chart Overlay ARPA amp MARPA ARPA Radar Connection Admiral Only Nobeltec Radar Overlay and MARPA How It Works Radar ToolBars The Rada
369. rning message will display and the demo will not start e Display Bathy Data When selected this feature uses Bathy Recorder data to contribute to the overall Nobeltec bathymetric features shown on chart including Shaded Relief Custom Contours 3D and Route Wizard This data is also used to build the 3D representation in the 3D display window See also the Tools Options 3D Bathy Bathy Recorder Display Bathy Recorder Data option Tools Options 3D Bathy Bathy Recorder settings can be controlled using the Tools Options 3D Bathy tab See Chapter 8 Properties amp Options for Tools Options 3D Bathy tab settings Custom Contours When the Bathy Recorder product is installed custom contours become available See Chapter 8 Properties amp Options for Tools Options Custom Contours tab settings 24 Sailing Plus Pack The Nobeltec Sailing Plus Pack is an upgrade package available for Jeppesen Marine s Nobeltec Visual Navigation Suite VNS and Nobeltec Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Polars and resulting performance data help you make the best decisions on how to sail your boat The Polars provided in this Plus Pack are delivered through a partnership with US Sailing and are designed to provide you with that organization s high quality official polar data The standard Polars you receive with Sailing Plus Pack serve as excellent starting points You can also request specific Polars based on your unique rig and hull
370. rs To Configure Wind Indicators and Lay Lines Lay Line Calculation Set and Drift Effect on Lay Lines Additional Features Ockam and B amp G Instrument Support Listening for Ockam or B amp G Protocols Adding a Polar Diagram to NavView To Add a Polar Diagram to a NavView 25 Tender Tracker Admiral What is Tender Tracker Unlocking Tender Tracker Setting Up Tender Tracker Configuring the Tender Directory Changing Target Appearance Locating a Tender Onscreen Tender Tracker Alarms Seetrac Alert Tender Out of Range Alarm Glossary Index Product Features Hot Keys My Nobeltec Program amp Chart Information 180 180 180 181 182 182 182 182 183 183 185 185 185 185 186 186 186 187 187 187 188 198 203 204 206 1 Introduction Nobeltec Navigation Software This User s Guide covers information about Jeppesen Marine s two industry leading software packages Nobeltec Admiral and Nobeltec Visual Navigation Suite VNS Visual Navigation Suite VNS is a feature rich program that includes GPS and autopilot support a full version of our award winning Tides amp Currents software limited target tracking and much more Nobeltec Admiral is our most complete package Admiral has all of the power and benefits of VNS but with advanced features such as Multiple Monitor support comprehensive target tracking GlassBridge Network support Sailing features and the exclusive NavView User Interf
371. rt the Device type that is connected to that Port the Data Type output by that device and a Time Out value for that device 3 Click OK to add this device to your Port Priorities window Add all connected hardware devices in this manner Multiple devices may be connected to the same COM Port if they transmit different data sentences 5 When you have completed adding all devices use the arrow keys on the Port Priorities tab to establish a hierarchy for the data from each device Radar Tab To edit your radar settings the radar or dual radars for Admiral users you wish to interface with must be installed powered on and connected to the network or PC You also must have already run the Radar Setup Wizard to detect and name accessible radar units Once your radar s are connected set up and named the Tools Options menu Radar Tab will provide you with per Radar settings options Use the Radar Selection field in the upper left hand corner to highlight the name of the Radar you wish to configure then use the option settings configure each Radar Radar settings include e Auto Range Links With Synchronizes all zoom in chart views to the same resolution Select Chart with Overlay or All Charts e Keep Range Setting Yes keeps current setting No resumes defaults per session e Suppress Echoes Around Boat radius Select range to dampen radar Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 57 echoes around your boat or No to disabl
372. s binary messages Dynamic broadcasts include the following SOG 1 10 Kt resolution from 0 to 102 Kts LAT LON 1 10 000 minute COG Relative to true north to 1 10th degree True Heading 0 to 359 degrees derived from gyro input Time Stamp The universal time to nearest second that this information was generated Static broadcasts include the following MMSI Number Vessel specific unique identifier links the data broadcast to the described vessel Transmitted with every sentence Radio call sign International call sign assigned to vessel often used on voice radio Name Name of ship 20 characters are provided Type of Ship Cargo See Table 20 1 Dimensions of Ship To nearest meter Source Reference point on ship from which position is calculated AIS Base Station Shore based station provides text messages time synchronization meteorological or hydrological information navigation information or position of other vessels Normally reports every 10 seconds On shore Base Stations can be rendered in the Chart window pane Right click on any Base Station to display the Base Station Name MMSI Number and Lat Lon Base Stations can be filtered from onchart display using AIS Target Filtering Received Text Messages Text based Safety Messages broadcast from an AIS Transmitter will be displayed in the Status Messages tab of the NavBar when your system is configured to receive AIS transmissions A Warning Indicator will ap
373. s on and off As described Ker above in the Range section these rings are at preset distances from the vessel based on the radar range The distance between rings is shown in nautical miles and is found in the upper left hand corner of the radar display directly next to the Range setting N l q S S Ka D S z Aa S S S c l T N 146 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Radar Range Ring Range of Interval of 1 4 34 nm nm To measure the range of a radar echo from the vessel count the number of rings between the center of the display where the vessel is and the target Check the range ring interval and guesstimate the distance of the target to the nearest ring Variable Range Marker VRM A range ring or series of rings that surround the boat VRM are normally used to measure distances to targets and center around the transmitted GPS position Adjust VRM by grabbing one with the mouse cursor and dragging it to the desired radius VRM range is displayed in the lower left hand corner of the InSight Radar window pane Figure 21 12 Variable Range Marker Variable Range Gain and Marker Sea Clutter distance Indicators from vessel Electronic Bearing Line EBL A bearing line or pair of lines that originate from the center of Ke the boat and remain constant as the boat moves Use the EBL to measure the bearing from the boat s position to a target EBL are based on transmitted
374. s the analog output from most existing industry standard radars into a digital stream that can be used by NNS The benefit of this option is that it does not require a complete retrofit of your radar system Connecting this device to your computer is accomplished through a standard USB port N O l S Ka A emh i S A O 128 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Setting Up Target Tracking Configuring Nobeltec Software to Receive AIS Data To set up Nobeltec Navigation Software to track targets 1 Open Tools Options Ports Configure 1 Open Tools Options Targets see Figure 20 2 2 Inthe Input Ports column place a check mark next to the COM Port to 2 Click the down arrow next to Display ARPA Targets Admiral only in the e OUL tte CEvICe CORE IEG upper portion of the dialog box and select Yes Click Configure This Input Port 3 Ifyou have a DSC radio connected click the down arrow next to Display 4 Set the Port Speed baud rate to match the baud rate of your AIS DSC Targets and select Yes device This setting is device specific but 38400 is standard Click Enhanced AIS Filtering 5 Click OK to close the COM Port Input Configuration window 5 From the AIS Filtering window place a check mark in the Display AIS Click Apply Targets check box 7 Click View Data to open the Incoming Data Display window and verify 6 Click OK that your computer is receiving AIS data you must be in a location
375. se to continue navigating along your pre planned route Commence Navigation Start your computer and your Nobeltec Navigation Software program and then power on the GPS Set up the chart windows as desired You might consider using two chart windows tiled vertically or horizontally with one zoomed in on the chart and the other zoomed out to show a broader view of your surroundings in relation to your vessel Activate the route by right clicking on a route leg and selecting Activate from the pop up menu The first waypoint in the route should now be blinking which indicates that it is your active target At this point you could also turn on vessel tracking to record a path of your trip This will leave a nice track line on the screen and give you a good representation of how well you are staying on course Arrival At Your First Destination When you arrive at the first destination Bimini turn off the tracking and disable the route Since you plan to spend the night you can either shut down Nobeltec or let it run during the night One advantage to letting it run during the night is that if you are anchored offshore you can create a boundary circle to alarm you if the vessel begins to drift Complete Your Voyage After spending the night in Bimini continue on with your voyage and repeat the steps indicated in the sections entitled Commence Navigation and Arrival at Your First Destination Inevitably in a real world environment you will
376. sed to determine the safety zone area around your vessel default is 0 5 NM If a target enters into the area specified by this setting it is considered a threat Time to Closest Point of Approach TCPA Sets a threshold amount of time until the Closest Point of Approach DSC Directory The DSC directory Figure 8 19 is where you can input the MMSI Number and a description or name of vessels polled with your DSC radio The description you input will appear on your charts instead of the MMSI Number These settings can be saved for future use co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa WA SZ 2 S x kar 2a a 2 aL l co Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide DSC Directory x Lime the SC Dineshory ba assign mamas ho khe MMS numbers of other vessel There names ell appear on the chart in place of the IMGT mamiari Se eu en eum g i i Figure 8 19 DSC Directory AIS Target Filtering AIS targets can be filtered for type distance moorage state etc The Targets NavBar NavView Target ToolBar and Tools Options Targets all contain a link to open the AIS Filtering window e Display AIS Targets Controls whether any AIS targets are displayed in the Chart window pane or Targets NavBar When unchecked all subsequent options in this window are disabled Hide Targets Beyond This option allows you to select a maximum distance range for detected AIS targets to display Targets whose
377. seminating information concerning aids and hazards to navigation and other marine information of interest to mariners travelling in the waters of the United States US territories and US holdings These notices are essential to all navigators for the purpose of keeping charts light lists coast pilots and other nautical publications up to date The USCG publishes LNM weekly Log A record of the ship s movements and a place for manual text entries Longitude The designation for angles measuring how far West or how far East a position is Value range is from 180 E to 180 W Values of longitude are represented with the Greek letter phi LORAN LOng Range Aid to Navigation LORAN is a terrestrial based navigation system using the time interval between radio signals to determine the position of the receiver LORAN was popular with marine navigation prior to the existence of GPS The current version of LORAN in use is LORAN C LORAN fails under different conditions than GPS arguably making it a complementary radio navigation system Low Water The minimum height reached by a falling tide Lower High Water LHW The lowest of the high waters of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and the Sun Lower Low Water LLW The lowest of the low waters or single low water of any specified tidal day due to the declinational effects of the Moon and Sun Magnetic Variation The degree to which the magnetic
378. shing triangle with bold solid cross indicates that no information for the target has been received and information is not available Triangle oriented per last known value Cross has fixed orientation Chapter 20 Target Tracking 131 How Targets Appear in NNS There are several types of targets Their behavior dictates how they appear onscreen It is important to recognize Target symbols and their meaning AN we If symbols appear in red they pose a danger to your vessel based on CPA or TCPA as configured in Tools Options Targets Naming Conventions for Targets When Nobeltec Navigation Software display targets information sometimes names are not yet associated with the target AIS for example transmits a target s positional information far more frequently than it sends name cargo and destination type info Long names can become an onscreen display problem When target names are too long Nobeltec Navigation Software can abbreviate the AIS targets name to A1 or A2 for example What Is AIS The Automatic Identification System AIS is an initiative mandated by the International Maritime Organization IMO designed to reduce collisions at sea Self propelled vessels that measure 65 feet or greater in length other than passenger and fishing vessels in commercial service and on an international voyage are required to have an AIS transmitter onboard AIS received data interfaced with Nobeltec Navigation Software gives y
379. shown in gray Ebb and Flood information in 15 Minute Intervals Figure 4 8 Tides and Currents Window Tides and Currents Tides amp Currents Figure 4 8 is an integrated product linked directly into Nobeltec Navigation Software and used for all aspects of tide and current planning Within the software information displays directly on top of your chart Tides amp Currents comes standard with North American tidal data or you can purchase simplified global tidal data from Nobeltec Tide Bars Right click on a Tide Bar to open Tides amp Currents Figure 4 9 Tides amp Currents on a Chart Tides amp Currents contains nearly every conceivable tidal and current projection feature in an easy to use format including e Event Searching minimum and maximum values in a range Red dashed line shows current station is attached to the route Figure 4 10 A Current Station Attached to a Route e Custom Stations Define and create your own custom stations based on Stations that are nearby e Calendars Print customized weekly and monthly calendars Chapter 4 Basic Screens 23 Use the Tides and Currents ToolBar to set date and time for all projections You can also sync Tide and Current display to the computer s internal clock To open Tides and Currents 1 Turn on current arrows by clicking on the Current Arrow ToolBar icon or right clicking on the chart and selecting Tides and Currents Current Arrows from
380. sts the columns name Between each of the column headers is a small vertical line which divides the columns Place the mouse pointer over any of these lines and watch the pointer change into a vertical line bracketed by two small arrows see Figure 9 7 When the cursor looks like this you can drag the column divider to a new position widening or narrowing the column Vessel SOG 0 0 Apply to All Legs Apply Currents Apply Set LDrift Set Fuel Rates Route List 167 Routes Route Detail for AFOOTOL Africa Wrest Coast 11 Wa To adjust the column width your cursor should appear like this fe Square 17 07 780 N 026 06 686 Figure 9 7 Adjusting the Width of Column Headers Changing the Route Detail and Marks Tab Visible Columns Use this feature to change which columns are displayed onscreen in the Route Detail and Marks tabs 1 Click on the PlanBook button on the ToolBar or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu From the Routes tab Route Detail tab or click on the Marks tab 2 Click the Column Setup button in the lower right corner of the window A new dialog box will appear that is divided in two The list to the left are the columns currently being displayed The list to the right are columns that are not displayed 3 Select the column s you want to add or remove Click the gt gt button to remove a column or the lt lt button to add a column 4 When finished click OK Changing R
381. t TCP IP such as by the GlassBridge Network see Chapter 19 The two types of data that can be shared are Processed and Raw Data Raw Data comes into the computer from any NMEA device GPS position is an example of Raw NMEA Data Processed Data is produced by the Admiral program In a situation where you have more than one GPS connected to one of the computers on the network typically port priorities are used to prefer one GPS over another This official type of information about the vessel is referred to as Processed NMEA Data or the Nobeltec Packet By default Admiral will share Processed Data on the GlassBridge Network By setting up Admiral in this way you do not have to set a priority on each of the other computers on the network Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Custom Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Nobeltec Admiral can share raw NMEA Serial Communications data between computers over a TCP IP network Prioritized processed data permits one computer to serve the LAN TCP IP Communications Processed NMEA Sharing Repeater Ports Send processed data from one main computer to official positional info to all other other computers on the Local Area Network LAN vie computers Listen For Processed NMEA v Repeater ports are only R recommended for use in forwarding Raw
382. t Grge Sadd or Gadent to haces a palette affect weres Strongest C See Cid C Gadet Option Setting Bottom Line Shales Water Indeabo ME Sea Fier m Ca Ly Figure 22 4 Sounder Colors To preview changes as you are making them click Apply a NOTE At any time you can reset a theme to its default color values by clicking Reset Theme to Defaults Additional Color Options e Bottom Line represents the calculated depth of the sea floor e Shallow Water Indicator is represented by a solid line across the Display at the level where the Shallow Water Depth Alarm is set The Use Sea Floor Color option can be set to Yes or No If it is set to Yes the Sea Floor color is used when drawing any returns beneath the bottom line When set to No the regular sounder return colors are used e Text Color is applied to any text in the Sounder Display e Background Color is applied to the background of the Sounder Display e Highlight Color is used to outline Text allowing the text to stand out against other colors in the display histogram e Temperature Color is used to paint the temperature graph Key Sounder Features Changing Frequencies The InSight Sounder can operate at either 50 kHz or 200 kHz frequency or at both frequencies concurrently using a split screen Figure 22 5 In a zoomed view the right side frequency is used You can change the frequency with the Frequency button on the Sounder ToolBar
383. t Port Opens the COM Port Input Configuration dialog box e Configure All Output Autopilot Ports Autopilot Settings dialog box e GPS Port Setup Wizard Runs the GPS Port Setup Wizard from within the program e View Data Opens the Incoming Data Display window showing that NNS is receiving data in real time Opens the Configure Output Data Output NNS can output specific data sentences to a pre selected list of hardware devices Click Configure All Output Autopilot Ports to open the Configure Output Autopilot Settings dialog box Sentences capable of output include Waypoint Arrival Data Autopilot Data Bearing Heading etc as well as some custom sentences such as B amp G Polar Speed if you have Sailing Plus Pack installed Port Priorities Tab Port Priorities are used to resolve conflicts occurring when two or more devices send redundant information Different position indicating devices GPS LORAN etc may send slightly variant Lat Lon values Without prioritized inputs the boat icon repositions with each valid position string Data from the highest prioritized device is used first If the primary device stops sending position information for a user specified period of time the software automatically switches to the next prioritized device If no valid position is received it will switch to Dead Reckoning mode To Add a Device to Port Priorities 1 Click Add 2 From the Add Device window select a COM Po
384. t Window This prints the area covered inside of the chart window without allowing you to select any options In other words whatever features or layers appear on your chart that is what will be printed To print a chart using the Print Wizard Open the chart that you would like to print 2 Pan and zoom to the desired location 3 Click File Print from the Main Menu or the lt Ctrl P gt Hot Key 4 In the Print Wizard choose the type of print you would like to make from the four choices described above then click Next 5 If you selected any option other than Chart Window you will see the Print Options dialog box as shown in Figure 10 1 Select all the options that you would like to appear on your print out and click Next 6 Depending on your PC s system configuration your printer s dialog box may appear If it does select the printer you would like to use and click OK Chapter 10 Printing 75 Print Wizard Small Scale to Large Scale One Chart Per Page Select Report Options Other Overlays T Tides amp Currents f Tide Bars Only Curent Arrows Only f Both Streets amp Roads I Chart Outlines Passport Region Outlines T 30 Outlines Print Wizard I Land Features M Contours NOAA T Other Features M Navigation Lights W Light Names Tl Light Sectors Grids and Collars Grids Lat Lon Grid Collar Grid f Transparent Collar Grid Figure 10 1 Print Wizard Print Options Dialog Box NOTE W
385. t continues to be stored in Kts NOTE All units of measure are adjustable from Tools Options Units e Goal Percentage of target speed Use this field to temporarily adjust target speed based on current conditions e RealTime Data Real Time Data options include e Auto Record Real Time Data When you place a check mark in this check box NNS begins to collect data while underway and then manually build a polar from that data Real time data points are logged during auto record of TWS TWD BSP information As you receive data for true wind speed true wind direction and boat speed the values are saved in a file that contains only the interpolated wind speed the angle and the interpolated boat speed Wind speed is rounded up or down to the nearest integer value e g 1 5000 to 2 499 become 2 and the boat speed is proportionally lowered or raised Real time data points will only appear on the polar if you select an individual wind speed in the Wind Speeds to Display field If you clear this check box no real time data is collected and only saved data points are used e Interval This field controls the interval at which current values are recorded and the interval for displaying wind speeds Selections include 1 second 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes The default setting is 1 minute e Clear Real Time Data Click this button to clear all data When you click this button a message appe
386. t on incorporate alternate routes to the same destination the route You may configure the software to automatically activate the next waypoint on a route and direct your autopilot to turn your boat without having this message appear To split a Route 1 Right click on the segment of the route you would like to split Attention Choosing the automatic waypoint selection feature 2 Choose Route Split The route will split into two routes will enable your autopilot to turn your boat and head it toward the next waypoint without any prompting or direction from you THIS COULD BE VERY UNSAFE IF YOU ARE NOT PAYING CONSTANT VIGILANT ATTENTION TO YOUR SURROUNDINGS Choose this option ONLY if you are certain it is safe to travel between the waypoints in your presently selected route A Q Ce BS S S X i N 42 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Joining Two Routes Use this feature to join two routes into one essentially the opposite of Splitting a Route You can join a route to either the start or the end of another route To join two Routes together 1 Right click on any segment of the route between two waypoints 2 Select Join from the pop up menu then choose the To Start of Another Route or To End of Another Route as appropriate 3 The cursor will change into an angled arrow Click on the route you wish to append to This will join the first and last waypoints of each route and all numbered wayp
387. t your range colors and height marker placement DOO a oe w S Use the Gradual or Filled check boxes to make the color behavior gradient to completely fill the contour with a single color or both INV A Figure 8 17 Custom Contours e Depths can be dragged back and forth to your specifications affecting the coloring e Click your mouse in the color strip to add a depth height marker or drag the marker off screen to remove it e Use your right mouse click to select a customized color from the provided Swatches e Click Rename to change the name of your theme to one of your own choosing e Click Reset to Defaults to return all height and color values in the current theme to out of the box settings This does not change the Theme name back to the default name if you have renamed it Color swatches allow you to quickly select a Start and End color for contour and the standard behavior of the color slider You may select to fill the color or not and to make the color behavior gradient or not Targets Tab If you have compatible ARPA MARPA Radar s Admiral only or AIS device s e connected to your PC via an NMEA connection any target detected by these devices can be displayed on your Passport vector charts with their pertinent information Additionally if a DSC radio is connected to your PC you can track other vessels similarly equipped Admiral users who own SeeTrac z Tender Tracking hardware can also purch
388. tary Chart Permit that is included with Passport Deluxe Once entered this Chart Permit gives you access to all the charts and data available for the complimentary region 1 Purchase Chart Permit number s for all chart region s that you wish to use from Jeppesen Marine or any authorized Nobeltec product retailer With all programs closed insert the World Folio DVD into the DVD drive The installer should automatically launch the Setup Wizard Click Redeem Voucher to open the Voucher Redemption webpage Once you redeem the voucher write down your complimentary Chart Permit number in the My Nobeltec Program and Chart Information table inside the back cover of this Guide Ae a NOTE You may also wish to purchase other chart regions from Jeppesen Marine at this time Write down the Chart Permit number for each region 6 Return to the Setup Wizard When prompted input the 20 digit Chart Permit number for every region you have purchased 7 When all Chart Permit numbers are entered click Done and launch your Nobeltec Navigation Software Newly installed charts are available as soon as the program opens Installing Supplemental Passport Deluxe Data Each Passport Deluxe region also comes with supplemental navigation data such as photo raster and bathymetric charts There may also be additional data DVDs included with your Passport Deluxe packaging To successfully load additional supplemental Passport Deluxe data 1 Install your
389. ted boat speed Wind speed is rounded up or down to the nearest integer value e g 1 5000 to 2 499 become 2 and the boat speed is proportionally lowered or raised Real time data points will only appear on the polar if you select an individual wind speed in the Wind Speeds to Display field If you clear this check box no real time data is collected e Interval This field controls the interval at which current values are recorded Selections include 1 second 10 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes The default setting is 1 minute Clear Real Time Data Click this button to clear all real time data When you click this button a message appears asking if you want to continue Click OK to clear all data or click Cancel to return to the Polar Display Settings window without clearing the data Options Options settings include Polar Line The selected color is applied Data points connect with a curved line that follows the expected interpolated boat speed at all angles Polar Data Points The selected color is applied Current Situation Dot This indicator is drawn if the polar diagram shows a polar line for the same wind speed AWS as the boat s current speed Real Time Data This is the color of the real time data dots that are drawn periodically on the polar based on the Display Real Time Data settings Show Boat This determines whether the boat and the current situation line and dot
390. ter 21 Radar Usage 145 Y RAIN Use the Rain Up and Rain Down keys to reduce the effect of weather or other meteorological phenomenon on your radar image Be careful not to increase the rain value too much as it can filter out real targets with the weather Rain Clutter control is still effective when the Gain is lowered If you are using the 2kW Dome model the Rain Up and Rain Down turn Rain Clutter on Rain Up and Rain Down off Interference Rejection IR Radar Interference Rejection IR A setting that reduces the interference caused by radar signals from other radar units operating in the same frequency band as your radar There are four IR options Off 1 weak 2 middle and 3 strong The higher you set IR the less interference you will receive In order to not miss weak targets make sure to turn interference rejection off when no interference exists Range and Bearing to Target The range and bearing to a target can be measured inside the Nobeltec application a number of ways including using the range and bearing to the cursor as displayed in the Info tab of the NavBar at the bottom of the screen or by using the appropriate console panes as shown here BBC BBC 193 T REC 344 4 yd Range of Boat to Cursor RBC Bearing of Boat to Cursor BBC You can also measure range and bearing to a target using the three radar tools below Range Rings This button toggles the radar range ring
391. ter manually All NMEA data can be shared across the network Since each computer has its own Dongle NMEA producing devices can be connected to any computer o s Autopilot JO A B Switch AIS Antenna NOBELTEC Heading Sensor is p Fd F T j7 E FE Admiral w Dongle Admiral w Dongle Admiral w Dongle Figure 19 2 GlassBridge Configuration Example 2 This network configuration also allows for the sharing of Nav Objects In order to share Nav Objects one of the PCs is identified as the Server Data can be obtained by selecting File Navigation Objects Import Nav Objects from the Main Menu Setting Up the GlassBridge Network This section covers how to setup each of the two previously described examples It might be helpful to review Figure 19 1 Example 1 and Figure 19 2 Example 2 Setting Up Example 1 As described earlier Example 1 includes two computers that are semi redundant Follow the steps below to setup and configure a system like the one shown in Example 1 1 Install Admiral on both computers using the serial number on the Dongle 2 Install all of the charts on both computers In addition install any Passport vector charts that you might have purchased as well as any of the Passport Deluxe data such as raster charts photo charts etc as you see fit For more information on installing charts please refer to Chapter 2 Installation for more information 3 Connect
392. tes and seconds the selected Trip has lasted e Avg Speed Average speed of your boat during the selected Trip e Min Speed If the vessel is moving slower than 0 2 knots Kts distance travelled is not calculated Chart Management Modifying Passport Vector Charts Customize the appearance of Passport charts by turning on and off data layers Click on the corresponding Passport ToolBar button to change the displayed data Figure 4 5 Passport Options ToolBar Sa 9 fe I S N AA le a Figure 4 5 Passport Options ToolBar Displaying Different Chart Types The chart window pane contains any type of chart data installed including raster vector photo topographic and 3D To display different chart data types click on the ToolBar button corresponding to the data you wish to see The Chart Table Use the Chart Table to open charts and change view settings of various chart objects install and uninstall charts and to select charts shown in the quilted chart image To open the Chart Table click on the File Chart Table menu click the Chart Table button on the default ToolBar or the lt Ctrl O gt Hot Key Opening Charts You can open and locate charts by clicking the Open Tab or by zooming in on an area of interest To locate an object use the Objects Tab Search feature Chart Objects Use the Objects Tab to control the display of various objects in the chart windows including user created objects pl
393. th of the arrow is proportional to wind speed e Display True Wind Indicator Options include No Small Medium and Large Large is twice the size of Medium and twice as far away This indicator is updated every second The size of the vector is proportional to wind speed The indicator is a filled circle with the label T and an e The Text Color is used for any text that is represented in the Sounder Display co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa A SZ 2 S O OS SS J Aa a 2 a L co 64 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide arrow pointing from the direction of the wind to the boat The length of the arrow is proportional to wind speed e Display Recent True Wind Angles When you select this option Yes from the drop down menu segments between two concentric circles surround the boat to represent wind direction over the past 10 minutes If the wind has been primarily from one direction over the past 10 minutes the color of that segment is a darker shade Segments that have not had the wind as frequently are a lighter color Recent wind segments have some transparency to minimize clutter e Display Lay Lines These are the lay lines that toggle on and off from the active mark e Display Lay Lines from Boat This toggles the lay lines from the boat on and off i NOTE Keep in mind these additional notes about lay lines e Lay lines adjust each second e Lay lines appear whenever there is an ac
394. the amount of wind speeds that can be stored in the polar file e Polar Values Grid Use this grid to add update or delete polar values If all polar values are deleted the corresponding wind speed will also be deleted To add individual values tab to the end of the row and a new row will appear To delete an entry select the row and press the lt Delete gt Hot Key or select the row and click the Delete Selected Row button Video Tab V Nobeltec Navigation Software offers support for onboard DirectX compatible video cameras attached to your PC via USB port s Users can choose from all available connected cameras using a drop down menu Video feeds can be interfaced with Nobeltec Navigation Software using a Video Multiplexer Card PCI Card or a USB converter device however best reception is provided when cameras are hooked directly to the computer With streaming video feed you can have up to four views of your immediate surroundings Ideally onboard cameras are designed for low light and marine conditions See your video camera User Guide to connect the video camera to your onboard PC Nobeltec Navigation Software will recognize the video input device s automatically There are two ways to open the video window in PlanView 1 Choose View Video Video Display or 2 Choose Video Display Tool from Tools ToolBars to leave the Video Display ToolBar button always available for use NOTE Video streams can be shown in one
395. the pop up menu 2 Right click on the tide or current station for which you would like to view a graph 3 From the pop up menu select View In Tides amp Currents 4 The Tides amp Currents program will open and you should see a graph that covers a 24 hour period ETA Calculator You can attach tide and current stations to a route and then use the ETA Calculator to help you make better ETA ETD and speed calculations Access the calculator by right clicking on a route and clicking ETA Calculator See Chapter 17 On The Water for more information Select Type of ETA Calculation marrh gE a re ee golem ar You can choose hom Dest Departure Time Tianit Time and Speed zj Te 2 Use thet to compute he optimal tne to leave based on an Dabei ond late version of depestan bene Ky Trak Tine Use thes to compute the nanet irmi band on a pamiculy ime a a Wayport f P Speed Une thas to compute the speed ovel ratar Hat muit be mantained based on a shating and ending time for the mo WM each Stators SO Sat Fust Ure F Dono show the aitai creating a route Figure 4 11 The ETA Calculator oN l S a A a z WA A S D S vA O A Q I gt 24 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Click the 3D button to open When the 3D window is 3D Visible Range Marker shows a 3D window This command selected many of the main the size of the 3D window on automatic
396. the upload download function you will most likely need to change the input output I O settings on your GPS before the unit will upload or download information Refer to your GPS manual for instructions on changing the protocol and for the settings your GPS unit will require Don t forget to return the settings to their prior setting s when you return to the normal navigation mode ne toa GPS Select File Upload Download to GPS to open the GPS Transfer Wizard 2 Click Change to open a list of GPS brand and model names Select the brand model that is connected to your computer Necessary the first time you use the GPS Transfer Wizard or if you have multiple GPS units attached to the PC Click Next 3 Review connection information Most units connect at 4800 baud Check that the correct COM port is selected Click Next 4 Choose one of the two function options that start with the word Send because you are sending information to the GPS After making your selection click Next 5 Choose the object s that you want to send to the GPS To send multiple objects hold down the lt Ctrl gt key while you click the selected objects To select all objects click the first object hold down the lt Shift gt key while scrolling down then click on the last object in the list All objects should now be highlighted When you have finished selecting objects to transfer click Next 6 You may need to modify names of items sent to the GPS Most
397. ther model is delivered to the Jeppesen Marine servers at about 18 00 GMT which is the Base Time each day After Jeppesen Marine receives the data an automatic prompt sends this data to subscribers To determine the time range that the weather predictions are valid for you will need to determine the Valid Time To calculate the Valid Time for your Lat Lon position 1 Determine the number of hours you are from GMT 2 Using the Base Time of 18 00 hours add or subtract the local difference to get the Valid Time For example the west coast of the United States is 08 00 hours from GMT Using the steps listed above you would use the Base Time of 18 00 hours and subtract 8 00 hours local difference This would provide you with the Valid Time which would be 10 00 This means that the weather file you have received is valid from 10 00 until 9 59 the next day NOBELTEC WEATHER LIMITED LIABILITY WARNING Jeppesen Marine and its suppliers accept no responsibility for damages that are caused by Nobeltec products or services and make NO warranty or representation either express or implied including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose with respect to this product service Furthermore Jeppesen Marine and its suppliers do not warrant the product or service will meet the customer s requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free This product or service is provided AS IS and the cust
398. this field allows Nobeltec Navigation Software to determine actual bottom depth to trigger the shallow water alarm 7 Click OK AN attention Depth sounders may occasionally transmit false readings showing a false spike in depth Such spikes are easy for a human operator to discern and disregard However without a filtering program your computer is unable to analyze these anomalies Cross Track Error XTE Cross Track Error is the distance that the boat has deviated from the designated route In certain areas deviation from the route could put a vessel in danger XTE readout is displayed on the Console in the Helmsman Display the NavBar Active Mark Tab or in the InfoBar In Figure 8 6 the blue area is the safe zone and the center line is the route line or heading If the vessel icon moves outside of the user specified blue area the Cross Track Error Alarm will notify you that the vessel has gone too far off course To set a Cross Track Error Alarm 1 Place a check mark in the Cross Track Error check box 2 Click the button to open the Cross Track Error Alarm Settings dialog box Figure 8 6 Helmsman Display 3 Input a value for the amount of deviation from the planned course of travel at which you d like the alarm to begin alerting you 4 Choose the type of alarm sound No Sound Sound Once or Sound Continuous and then click OK Tender Alarms Admiral Only Tender Alarm If a Tender exits an established Guard
399. time Click the Origin drop down list and select the vessel or any of the previous 10 locations you have used as an origin Or click the Select New Origin button to the right of the list 5 Modify the Vessel SOG Speed Over Ground to reflect the speed of the vessel Arrival date and time will be displayed in the Route Summary text field Layovers During along trip you can establish a Layover for time spent anchored Layovers are then calculated into your ETA s To set a Layover 1 Click on the PlanBook button or Tools PlanBook from the Main Menu From the Routes Tab select the Route Detail Tab for a selected Route Select the leg of the route that will contain the layover In the Type column click the down arrow and select Layover To change a waypoint back to normal click the down arrow and select Normal 4 The Layover Time field for that leg will change from N A to 0 00 00 Change the layover time by right clicking on that field and selecting Edit Layover Time Type in the length of your layover time based on total hours 36 45 00 for example would be a 36 hour 45 minute layover and click Enter New Route Along the bottom of the PlanBook is a row of buttons that allow you to perform various functions The first button is labeled New Route which allows you to manually input Lat Lon coordinates to create a route NOTE It is easiest to use the Route tool Use the New Route button only when you have a list of
400. tion and weather e Wave Sea and wave height GRIB Weather Data GRIB weather data is a highly compact format for data transfer This format allows for a large amount of weather data to be transferred to your computer quickly without slowing system resources Getting GRIB Weather Data VNS and Admiral GRIB Weather Data can be downloaded from multiple sources some at no charge You will need Internet access or another data access source such as e mail or cell phone to receive GRIB grb or bz2 format files 1 Save the GRIB file to a location on your hard drive 2 Open the NavBar Weather tab 3 Click Browse to open a browser window and browse to the location you saved your GRIB grb or bz2 file s _ Click on the GRIB file you wish to display 5 Click Open Weather data from that file will be immediately available to display on your charts Getting OCENS WeatherNet Data Admiral Nobeltec Admiral ships with OCENS WeatherNet ready for immediate install OCENS is a provider of highly compressed OCENS optimized downloadable weather data in GRIB format Nobeltec partners with OCENS to provide you this high resolution global weather data displayed directly on top of your Nobeltec Navigation Software charts To receive GRIB grb or bz2 format files from OCENS you must set up a subscription service account with them 1 Follow instructions included in the WeatherNet program to register and subscribe t
401. tive mark Options x Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network DataSharing Sounder Saling Video Option Setting Display Apparent wind Indicator Medium Size Display True Wind Indicator Small Size Display Recent True Wind Angles Yes Display Lay Lines Medium Size Display Lay Lines From Boat Small Size Display Average Lay Lines Seen Yes Apparent Wind Indicator Color True Wind Indicator Color vl Polar Display Settings Figure 8 24 Tools Options Sailing Tab Cancel Apply e Display Average Lay Lines Seen Use lay lines to verify trends in the wind that become apparent when you track them in the Chart window As the wind shifts and your boat adjusts heading and course the lay lines adjust accordingly If you select this option Nobeltec Navigation Software tracks the average lay line seen for the active mark for the past 10 minutes and displays this lay line one for port tack and one for starboard tack with less emphasis than the regular lay line e Display Time To Go TTG and Distance on Lay Lines In Admiral only this allows you to toggle on and off values that show the TTG and distance in boat lengths to the lay line These values appear beginning at the point of intersection of the boat and mark lay lines Time To Go Calculations The default is Calculate
402. to the Earth Formulas for calculating tides can be found in tide and current tables provided by NOAA and the British Admiralty The explanation of how tides work was first proposed by Isaac Newton in 1687 in his Philosophiae Naturalis Principia Mathematica Time to Closest Point of Approach TCPA This is the time remaining until the closest point of approach of a target ToolBar A collection of shortcut buttons grouped in a logical manner Nobeltec Navigation Software ToolBars are independently movable and dockable Track An onscreen and or logged record of a ship s previous movements Time To Go TTG The amount of time estimated until the ship reaches an active mark assuming no intervening change in course or speed Displayed in hours and minutes True Theoretical Wind Direction TWD See Apparent Wind Direction AWD True Theoretical Wind Speed TWS See Apparent Wind Speed AWS TTG See Time To Go United States Army Corps of Engineers USACE The USACE is responsible for investigating developing and maintaining national water and related environmental resources USACE is also a provider of inland waterway charts United States Coast Guard USCG A part of the Department of Transportation the Coast Guard enforces federal laws related to smuggling ship safety port security spillage pollution and other marine environmental protection issues The Coast Guard also maintains ships and other vessels aircraft and co
403. to the Compass Deviation Table 7 Click Deviation Entry to create a Compass Deviation Table Compass Heading Corrections x Master Heading Correction Enter master correction before entering deviation values Master Correction 40 Cancel Deviation Table Apply All table entries are based on uncorrected magnetic heading values l Use Deviation Table Deviation Entr Bearing Deviation al 0 5 Clear all entries 10 15 20 ore Figure 21 8 Compass Heading Corrections Chapter 21 Radar Usage 141 Creating a Compass Deviation Table Magnetic compasses can provide inaccurate information due to magnetic interference Additionally the level of heading inaccuracy can vary at each compass heading To resolve this NNS contains a Compass Deviation Table that allows you to enter compass correction values at 5 increments Once you have resolved Compass Master Rotations test the radar alignment at various headings to discover any onboard deviations The easiest way to test alignment is navigate in a clear open area toward each heading for 5 10 minutes correcting deviation using the Compass Deviation Table as you go For example 1 Steer to magnetic North using NNS a radar and a heading sensor 2 Open a Chart window pane with radar overlay and observe how the Radar overlay lines up with the chart If the radar does not line up correctly use the Deviation Adjustment Tool to rotate the rad
404. to work in Figure 4 13 Center On Boat Mode Chapter 4 Basic Screens 25 Right click in the 3D window to change your 3D Navigator Mode Figure 4 14 Explore Mode 3D Navigator Controls on the ToolBar To access 3D Navigator controls on the ToolBar click the 3D button This will bring up the 3D Navigator tools on the ToolBar Figure 4 15 er Figure 4 15 3D Navigator ToolBar Wind and Weather Weather data wind and sea state can be displayed directly on top of your charts to aid navigation decisions Weather is provided in GRIB or Nobeltec format You can also select to display SkyMate weather during your installation of Nobeltec Navigation Software provided that you have SkyMate satellite hardware installed Additionally XM WxWorx Weather is available as a Plus Pack to NNS purchasable from a Nobeltec product dealer See Chapter 13 Weather amp Wind for a full description of all Wind and Weather features Select a Weather Provider from Tools Options Weather Tab Changing Weather Providers requires you to restart Nobeltec Navigation Software NOTE Weather data will not display over 3D charts A I cy a A o z wa Wa S V S A O A S n a l 26 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide PLAYBACK Center on Boat Instant Waypoint Objects a View a r aa A Vessel 4 j te gt m a Charts be ah pridge a V N m
405. tomizing Nobeltec The Difference Between a Tool and a ToolBar Customizing the ToolBar Changing ToolBar Button Size Moving Tools and ToolBars ToolBar Buttons The Console Available Console Panels Panel Properties Floating and Docked The Helmsman Display Twilight and Night Display Modes Help Tips Star Navigator Managing Windows Window List Copy Window Tile Vertically Horizontally Cascade 95 96 96 96 96 96 96 97 97 97 97 97 97 97 98 98 99 99 99 99 99 100 105 105 105 105 106 106 106 107 107 107 107 107 107 Save and Load User Interface Commands 17 On the Water Sea Trials Turning On the System Avoiding a Wayward Mouse GPS Test Autopilot Test Heading Sensor Test Putting It All Together Check the Weather Create a Route Calculate Your ETA Input into the PlanBook Printouts Upload the Route Commence Navigation Arrival At Your First Destination Complete Your Voyage 18 NavView Admiral Only Menu Buttons Quick Tips Menu Button Auto Hide Tool Buttons NavView InfoBar GPS Trip Tab of the InfoBar GPS Strength Window On Chart Warning Indicators View Manager Navinfo NavInfo Right Click Options To Customize the Navinfo Window To Customize a Navinfo Subpanel Strip Charts Tracking Data For Strip Charts Saving Strip Chart Data PlanBook Switching Configurations Making Changes in NavView The Tools Options Dialog 107 109 109 109 109 109 109 110 110
406. tor uses tide and current predictions to calculate best departure times transit times required speed and fuel consumption In order for the ETA Calculator to work tide and current stations must be attached to the various route legs in a created route By default Nobeltec Navigation Software will automatically attach the nearest tide and the nearest current station to each route leg Because this is done automatically using the nearest stations there may be other nearby stations that will have a stronger effect on your voyage and on the calculations In this instance you may want to manually attach a station to a route leg 1 Turn on the current arrows and tide bars 2 Move the cursor over the station that you want to attach to the route leg Drag and drop the station onto the nearest route leg 3 A dotted line see Figure 11 5 should appear between the tide or current station and the route leg red dotted line for currents or blue dotted line for tides 4 Repeat as necessary for other legs of the route Once all tide and current stations have been attached the ETA Calculator is ready for use Calculating Best Departure Time ETA Calculation uses the tide and current information connected to your route to provide you the best and worst departure times as well as estimated fuel consumption To calculate the Best Departure Time 1 Start the ETA Calculator by right clicking on any route segment and click ETA Calculato
407. ts Configure Tab Data Output Port Priorities Tab To Add a Device to Port Priorities Radar Tab Weather Tab Console Tab Units Tab Misc Tab Other Features of the Misc Tab Colors Tab Audio Tab 3D Bathy Tab Depth Tab Changing Depth Fonts 3D Depth Settings Contours Tab Custom Contour Options Water Contour Options Custom Contours Tab Bathy Recorder Only Targets Tab Target Tracking GlassBridge Network Tab Admiral Only Data Sharing Tab Sounder Tab Sailing Tab Plus Pack Polar Display Settings Polar Values Tab Video Tab Video Pause 9 PlanBook Opening the PlanBook The Routes Tab Selecting a Route to Edit Setting the Boat Speed for the Entire Route Setting the Boat Speed for an Individual Leg Estimating Arrival Time Layovers New Route Adding a Waypoint to an Existing Route Editing Waypoints Deleting Routes and Waypoints Changing the Waypoint Order Fuel Consumption The Marks Tab Editing and Deleting Marks Calculating Range and Bearing to Marks Display Route Marks Waypoints The Tracks Tab Deleting Tracks Creating a Route from a Track The Boundaries Tab Changing Column Appearance Changing the Route Detail and Marks Tab Visible Columns Changing Route Detail and Marks Tab Column Order Importing and Exporting Data Importing and Exporting Data Using the PlanBook 10 Printing Print Wizard Printing Tides and Currents Information 11 Tides amp Currents Displaying Tide Bars Interpreting Tide Bars Displ
408. ts 18 The Objects Tab 33 Install 20 The Install Tab 33 Uninstall 20 The Uninstall Tab 33 Chart Quilting 20 The Quilting Tab 33 Removing Charts From Quilting While On An Open Chart 34 aac PlanBook Removing All Skewed Charts From Quilting 34 Routes 20 Closing Charts 34 Marks 20 i Tracks 20 6 Basic Skills 35 Boundaries 20 Navigating Charts 35 Tides and Currents 23 Multiple Chart Windows 35 ETA Calculator 23 Zooming Overzooming 35 3D Navigator 25 saina anni 35 3D Navigator Modes 25 oo Tied 3D Navigator Controls on the ToolBar 25 puto Modes Wind and Weather 5 Se aoe and Marking A NavInfo Window 27 North Up 36 To Customize the Navinfo Window 27 Bookmark 36 To Customize a Navinfo Subpanel 27 Objects 36 NavView Admiral Only 27 User Created Objects 36 Primary Screen Elements 27 Connected Objects 36 NavView Menu 27 Manipulating Objects on the Chart 36 NavView ToolBar 28 Marks 36 NavView InfoBar 28 Event Mark 36 To Use NavView 28 Annotations 37 To Return to PlanView 28 Man Overboard 37 View Manager 28 Instant Waypoint 37 Right Click Mouse Menus 29 Range Bearing Lines 37 Route 37 5 Charts and Data 31 Tracks 38 Track Line Coloring Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only 38 Types aian Track Point Management Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only 38 Chart Scales 31 Track Line Legend Admiral Sailing Plus Pack Only 38 Chart Type Controls 31 Boundaries 39 Saving Objects 39 ae cha cepa Units Changing the Appearance of Objects 39 Show Hide Mark Names 39 T
409. ttered with track lines co I S 8 a a Ro Ss wa WA SZ a S x at ted heme a gt aL l ee 48 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Alarm Tab Nobeltec Navigation Software allows you to set a number of Alarms which can be used to alert the Captain of upcoming waypoints or hazards Alarms are triggered when user specified events occur or when selected values are reached Alarm modes can be enabled by checking the appropriate boxes on the Alarms Tab Alarms can be configured to sound continuously singly or as no sound Click the dotted button to the right of a selection to modify alarm parameters Waypoint Arrival Alarm The Waypoint Arrival Alarm interfaces with active waypoints By default the software provides an audible alarm when your vessel is within a certain distance of your active waypoint Turn off the alarm by removing the check mark in front of the Waypoint Arrival option Edit the arrival radius and sound settings by clicking on the j button Changes to the Waypoint Arrival distance after routes or marks have been created do not affect those objects To change Waypoint Arrival distance for existing waypoints change their Arrival Circle Radius see Waypoint Arrival in Chapter 7 Advanced Routes Boat X General Log DR Track Alarms Stats Display Range Circle W W aupoint Arrival i Boat Crosses Boundary Predictor Crosses Boundary l Shall
410. tuation where the cone may not be consistently pointing downward Bathy Recorder Indicator Whenever Bathy data is being recorded a small indicator will appear in the upper right corner of the 3D window indicating that the Capture Bathy Recorder Data option has been selected and that valid GPS and depth information is available cei Da ARPA OACS R H Figure 23 6 Enable Capture Data w Right Corner Indicator A marune Currently Nobeltec Navigation Software tolerates a short loss in GPS and depth information During this time however Bathy Recorder continues to record the last known good sample This can result in erroneous depths being recorded during outages Timeout occurs within 90 seconds NNS will automatically disable recording if your boat remains stationary or hasn t moved more than 100 meters after 30 minutes of recording Recording automatically resumes when the rate and distance of travel increases Chapter 23 Bathy Recorder 175 Locating Deleting and Saving Bathy Files Bathy Recorder files are stored on your hard drive and are named by date and your serial number for example 2006_256 9_13 4 4 1 bth These files are stored by default in Program Files Nobeltec Visual Series Bathy Recorder Data Files can be deleted or shared Daily batches of Bathy data files can be deleted at any time using the Tools Bathy Recorder Delete Bathy Recorder Data This function only del
411. u can open the Polar Display window under Sailing Polar Display See Figure 24 1 Polar Display Nobeliec Polar Wierd speeds to deplay 4 amp 10 12 l and20 O eree Actual Wind Senne Lock Edt Figure 24 1 Polar Display To Open an Existing Polar 1 Open Sailing Polar Display 2 Click Settings in the Polar Display window 3 Click the Polar Values tab 4 Click Load Polar File The Open dialog box will automatically filter for No A I wa 9 o S OQ 178 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Nobeltec Polar spp files 5 Select the polar file and click Open to load it 6 Click OK the Polar Display window opens This window contains the following fields e Name The name of the active polar appears in the title bar of the polar display window If no polar is selected a message appears on the polar diagram stating this e The wind speeds to display Select the polar lines to appear on the diagram The Kts per hour options include e All All Even Numbers All Odd Numbers 4 6 8 10 12 16 and 20 this is the default e 5 10 15and20 Each number that is stored in the polar e Show Actual Wind Speed Place a mark in this check box to display the actual wind speed instead of a wind speed selected from the Wind speeds to display drop down list The actual wind speed updates based on the Auto Record Real Time Data Interval setting in Polar Display Settings e Lock
412. u may want to reduce the overall size of the current arrows To reduce or enlarge the size of the current arrow icons 1 Click on the Current Arrow tool on your ToolBar or right click on the chart and select Tides and Currents Current Arrows from the pop up menu 2 Right click on any current arrow and select Adjust Arrow Scale from the pop up menu 3 Use the slider bar to either make the arrows larger or smaller 4 When finished click OK NOTE This option is only available for current arrows not tide bars Tide and Current Time ToolBar When you turn on the tide and current overlay function in your software the icons are displayed based on the system time of your PC However if you are planning a trip you might want to know what the tides and currents will be doing in the future To perform this task use the Tide and Current Time ToolBar This ToolBar is not on the program ToolBar by default To add it 1 From the Main Menu click on Tools ToolBars 2 Place a check mark next to Tide and Current Time ToolBar 3 Click OK 4 The Tide and Current Time ToolBar will be floating on top of your Nobeltec program You can then drag and drop the Tide and Current Time ToolBar anywhere on your ToolBar to dock it Using the Tide and Current Time ToolBar Now that you have added the Tide and Current Time ToolBar to your program you can adjust the prediction time to any point up to the year 2100 Figure 11 2 shows the v
413. u may wish to include or exclude sentences specific to the device connected to each COM port See Tables 3 1 3 12 for sentences recognized by Nobeltec Navigation Software Use the Protocol drop down menu to select format NMEA Ockam or B amp G 5 If your device operates at a Port Speed or baud rate greater than 4800 set the correct Port Speed in the Comx Input Configuration window 6 Click the OK or Apply button to save your changes NOTE See Chapter 2 Installation for information on automatic GPS Port Setup Wizard usage Options x Depth Contours Targets GlassBridge Network Data Sharing Sounder Sailing Video Ports Configure Port Priorities Radar Weather Console Units Misc Colors Audio 3D Bathy Input Ports Output Autopilot Require Valid Checksums on all Sentences COM1 38400 al v jCOM1 a Require Checksums to be Valid if Present ate iam i faite Report Checksum Discrepancies Ignore Invalid GPS Position Data COM4 4800 COM4 COMS 4800 gcoms5 C Use GPS Time CJCOM6 4800 _ COM6 LICOM 4800 LICOM 7 V Detect GPS MOB Detect MOB Hardware COMS 4800 j COM8 a mcoms isson mcoms gi Log All Input T Log All Output Configure ll GPS Port Setup Output Autopilot Potts Wizard Mele Cancel Apply Help From this screen you can include or exclude specific data sentences or entire device COM2 Input Configuration x
414. uld like to see additional data but intend to move the custom zoom around AK GROGM Gs BREL aan gt 9 Figure 22 10 Custom Zoom No No l wa Q S A l N N 166 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Bottom Lock The Bottom Lock split view presents an interesting view of the sounder returns The sea floor is flattened in this view allowing easy comprehension of how far a fish or other return is above the sea floor ME UEDA A YXLOROCEM Fs Cal VBR Pn ae TADA MEATH ME F F r i i n Penit Height Off Of Sea Floor _ t Actual Sea Floor a By E za y aN T A A 2 Flattened Sea Floor j i TMM Figure 22 11 Bottom Lock Sea Floor Discrimination The Sea Floor Discrimination split view is very similar to the Bottom Lock split view in that the InSight Sounder automatically tracks the bottom However in this mode much more of the sea floor is drawn and the sea floor is centered in the middle of the split view Since some of the sound waves penetrate the sea floor before being returned this Split View allows more of the returns beneath the sea floor to be seen Weak returns often represent a soft sea floor made up of sand silt or seaweed Stronger returns can mean a hard sea floor made of rock or other hard material Dual Frequency The Dual Frequency split view simply allows both 50 kHz and 200 kHz sounder pings to be displayed at the same
415. ument the settings for future reference Definitions Of Autopilot Setting Options Update Interval The default setting is one second Few autopilots require more than a one second interval A l i S ons ha gt 3 xX 1 SS Ta 96 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide e Bearing Output The default value is Magnetic e Precision A precision level of 1 means xx x a precision level of 2 means xx xx etc NMEA protocol does specify precision e Leading Zeros This feature adds a zero to the front of heading Sentence Selection It is important to minimize selected options The COM port can handle around 600 characters per second and can easily be overrun with too much data e Talker ID Some older autopilots do not recognize the EC setting specified by NMEA 0183 In this case you will need to select an identification acceptable to your autopilot e Send Bearing From Boat to Waypoint in Place of Origin to Destination Verify in your autopilot manual WARNING This option should only be used with autopilots that do not correctly compute XTE and must always be pointed directly towards the waypoint Using the Autopilot On the Water To test your autopilot before using it on a trip find a safe place that is not in use and is approximately one square mile in size How to Use the Autopilot Active Mark 1 Create a Mark on the chart 2 Right click on the Mark and select Activate
416. uration is necessary in order for this data to be propagated on the network NOTE InSight Radar users will need to run the Radar Wizard on each computer that needs to view radar e Sounder Sharing If you have purchased and installed Nobeltec InSight Sounder you can share Sounder data to any computer connected to the GlassBridge Network All systems attached to the GlassBridge Network will see all data sent on the network by the InSight Sounder Therefore any Sounder window open on any PC will mirror the Sounder window s on all other PCs on Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 61 the network In Live and Demo mode all pings are shared across the network In Playback mode pings are not shared InSight Sounder users not connected to Sounder via an RS 422 cable will need to run the GPS Port Setup Wizard on each computer that needs to view Sounder data Refer to the InSight Sounder User s Guide for further instructions on using the GPS Port Setup Wizard i NOTE The following Sounder settings are NOT shared across the network Sounder COM port configuration UDP port configuration colors and all options set using the Tools Options Sounder Tab EXCEPTION Tools Options Sounder Tab Transducer Offset Temperature Calibration Speed Calibration and 50 and 200 kHz Gain Calibration settings can be shared across the network i NOTE If you have Admiral installed on Windows XP and Windows Vista when you close the version o
417. utter on off lt Shift C gt Toggle Current Arrows New Event Mark at boat Nobeltec User s Guide My Nobeltec Program amp Chart Information Region Chart Permit Unlock Code World Folio Registered Owner Program Serial Number Product Version NOBELTEC Call Jeppesen Marine at 800 946 2877 to order by Jeppesene 8 e Nopeltec Navidatior InSight Radar 2 Black Box The IR2 Black Box IR2 BB is a black box technology for tapping into the data signal of pre existing radar By interfacing existing radar with the IR2 BB radar images can be viewed right on top of electronic charts and work seamlessly with Nobeltec Admiral and VNS Brings Older Radars Back to Life the IR2 BB provides boaters with an existing radar the opportunity to update to the latest radar display technology Radar Made Safe Easy and Effective Important navigation information available from a single source anti collision information from your radar and navigation information from Nobeltec Navigation Software The IR2 BB must be installed by a qualified marine electronics installer installing this product may void your radar s warranty Contact your Nobeltec dealer or Jeppesen Marine for more details Nobeltec Product Part InSight Radar 2 Black Box RHBXX00002 InSight Sounder Whether using for safety or fishing the InSight Sounder delivers superior performance and features for the integrated PC na
418. ved file to better understand interesting sea floor and bottom composition or analyze where fish were located in relation to thermoclines and structure If GPS position data was available when the file was recorded you can even drop marks on places of interest during playback review to facilitate future trip planning Play Fast Forward Stop Sounder Recort Playback ee ee Record Rewind Auto Loop You can enable the Record Playback controls by selecting Record Playback Mode from the right click menu or from the Sounder Menu Much like DVD VCR controls pressing the red record button will begin the recording after asking you to identify a file to save the data to At any time you can playback a file using the same control Configuring the InSight Sounder The Nobeltec InSight Sounder allows you to configure and personalize a number of settings to create a display that is customized to your needs While all colors and options have been given default values that are appropriate for most installations you may find that your particular requirements aren t suited to the default settings You can access configuration options by right clicking in the Sounder Display and selecting Options or from the Main Menu by clicking on Tools Options Sounder NOTE Measurement units are adjusted from Tools Options Units tab Configuration Options Open Sounder Display at Startup Indicates whether or not a Sounder Display should be cr
419. ver Ground SOG Course Over Ground COG and other available instrument data The logfile is a Tab delimited text file suitable for importing into a word document spreadsheet or database To enable automatic logging place a check mark in the Automatic Logging box and enter the period of minutes between log entries To begin logging data you must also create a new logfile To create a new logfile 1 Browse to the folder you wish to store your Logfile 2 Input the new Logfile name 3 Click Open to return to the Log Tab of the Boat Properties Menu A WARNING Logfiles can be extremely large You should periodically create a new uniquely named logfile and save your old logfile to a storage device or disc Large logfiles can cause system and program slowness Manual Logging To create a manual log entry 1 Click New Log Entry 2 Inthe box provided enter the log entry and click OK M TIP You can also make manual log entries by selecting Edit New Log Entry from the Main Menu Viewing Logfiles The View Log button opens the logfile that is listed in the directory next to the Browse button To review a different logfile Browse to that logfile folder and click Open then View Log again to review the logfile AN te You can also open the current logfile by selecting View View Ship s Log from the Main Menu Dead Reckoning Tab Dead Reckoning D R is a fallback method of navigation where known values are used in place of
420. vigation system It provides exceptional target and bottom detail and a wealth of standard and advanced features such as dual frequencies temperature display and range gain and shift settings The InSight Sounder integrates with both Visual Navigation Suite and Nobeltec Admiral 7 1 and higher to create a complete sounder chart plotter solution When used with either of these programs you can view your chart and sounding information in SplitScreen mode or in a single dedicated window The InSight Sounder also offers unlimited custom color schemes night and twilight vision support and a shallow water alarm Nobeltec Product Part InSight Sounder RHSXX00003 lt Additional product information inside front cover RSUXX00026 December 2007 Jeppesen Marine Inc All rights reserved A J l j 2 ES f NI OCENS WeatherNet is a trademark of Ocean and Coastal Environmental Sensing Inc and is used by permission Trademarks are property of their respective owners Marine
421. visible i Y LOs 56 24M Figure 5 3 Sector Lights e Sector Lights Off Turns off all Sector Lights e Sector Lights Visible From Cursor Only shows Sector Lights that are visible from the cursor s position on the chart e Sector Lights Visible From Vessel Only shows Sector Lights that are visible from the vessel s position on the chart e Sectors Lights All Visible Turns on all Sector Lights e Shade Sector Lights Fills Sector Light quadrants with color e Display ECDIS Symbols Displays ECDIS chart markings and symbols e Display NOAA Symbols Displays NOAA chart markings and symbols Figure 5 4 Shaded Sector Lights Land Features On off features such as bridges names towers city outlines buildings etc The lt L gt Hot Key toggles Land Features on and off Contours Isobaths and their coloring Click on the down arrow to reveal more options The lt C gt Hot Key toggles Contours on and off Other Levels Navigation and other chart information such as channel names The lt O gt Hot Key toggles Other Levels on and off ts Streets and Roads Data layer of Passport Charts that overlays street and road information Detailed city information is available for each region unlocked and Interstate and State highways are available for the entire United States Display Passport Data Layers Marinas Ports and Services Local Information Geographic locations World Port Index Click the dow
422. water surface See also Speed Over Ground SOG Starboard Starboard designates the right side of the boat as seen standing on the deck facing toward the bow Starboard side is indicated with a green light Stern The rear of a ship Streets amp Roads disc Contains on land road mapping data for North America only Subroute A route which serves as an alternative to a section of another route Target In nautical terminology a target is generally an obstacle or object in or near the water to avoid for the purpose of safe navigation Target Threat Nobeltec Navigation Software is capable of detecting targets that are too close to your ship When you establish a boundary around your ship a target that encroaches that boundary is considered a Target Threat TCPA See Time to Closest Point of Approach A A S lt Qo Q gt lt S a wa S 196 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Thumbnail QuickView A small preview image of an entire chart also called a QuickView displayed in the Chart Table dialog to aid you in choosing the correct chart Raster only Tidal Currents Tidal currents a horizontal motion are a result of the rise and fall of the water level due to tides a vertical motion The effects of tidal currents on the movement of water in and out of bays and harbors can be substantial See Neap Tides Tide The change in ocean levels due to gravitational influences external
423. wer in red while leaving everything deeper in black Onscreen danger areas will be an obvious cluster of red depth soundings To change depth colors and ranges 1 Right click on the color region you wish to change 2 In the color selection pop up menu select the color then click OK 3 Repeat as desired for each range 4 To change the range values click and drag the divider left or right to adjust the setting Click and drag a divider off the color bar to remove it entirely Place the divider back on the color bar by clicking anywhere between two dividers limit of five total dividers for six total depth ranges 5 Click Apply to save all changes or OK to save and close this window Changing Depth Fonts You can adjust the font and font size for all of the depth soundings on Passport vector charts To change the font settings 1 Click Depth Font 2 Choose a font style bold italic etc and size from the displayed list 3 Click OK 3D Depth Settings The 3D color palette is re calculated only when depth changes more than 10 or 10 feet whichever is greater Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 57 A Color Legend can be displayed in the upper right hand corner of the 3D chart window pane Choose to display or hide the Color Legend using the right click pop up menu in the Chart window pane Contours Tab Use this tab to create custom contour lines on land and or water based on data from 3D sea floor topographic
424. with the Alarms feature to alert you if your boat enters a circle Boundary Circles can also be used as anchor alarms Once you have created a Boundary Circle click and drag the circle until the Boundary is the correct radius Closed Boundary a polygonal shaped enclosed boundary Line Boundary an irregularly shaped open boundary line To create a Closed or Line Boundary 1 From an open chart click the Boundary tool or select Edit New Boundary Type of Boundary from the main menu 2 Click on the chart to place the first boundary point and then move and click the cursor on the next boundary point position A line will be drawn between each point and range bearing text displayed 3 Repeat until the boundary is completed Double or right click on the last boundary point location Chapter 6 Basic Skills 39 5 Enter a boundary name or accept the default name which is the date and time the boundary was created The naming prompt feature can be disabled from the Misc Tab of the Tools Options dialog Saving Objects It is important to save all Objects you have created in order to keep them in your Route To save all Nav Objects click File Save All Changing the Appearance of Objects You can control how routes look on the screen For example you can hide range and bearing information name individual waypoints and much more The following are the most common route appearance changes Show Hide Mark Names To dis
425. y it is better to go slow and then speed up as you gain more confidence Observe how the vessel travels from one waypoint to the next Change the waypoint arrival notification as desired You can choose to automatically activate the next waypoint or to receive a prompt in the Misc Tab of the Tools Options menu As you travel along the route observe the steering behavior from one waypoint to the next Does the autopilot under or over compensate Adjust the autopilot gain if necessary Heading Sensor Test If you plan to use an Autopilot or a Nobeltec InSight Radar you should test the Heading Sensor Head out on the water and try to find an area where your path will not be affected by the wind Once you have located a suitable area initialize your heading sensor This usually involves turning the vessel 720 360 twice over a 2 minute time period To determine how to initialize your heading sensor refer the User s Guide that came with the sensor After the heading sensor has been initialized create a route in Nobeltec that runs through your test area Keep track of the heading from one end of the route to the other and note whether the heading is true or magnetic Follow the route and compare the heading of the vessel to the heading sensor Rotate the heading sensor so that there is little or no discrepancy between the route heading and the sensor heading Turn the vessel around and head the opposite direction The heading should be with
426. y have different NMEA Talker ID s AN vr If your Talker ID is not displayed type the ID into the Device field 5 Click the up or down arrows to place device entries in order with the highest priority device at the top of the list NMEA and Other Device Support Jeppesen Marine products support devices that conform to the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA 0183 standard Jeppesen Marine also supports some device specific sentences such as B amp G and Ockam The following tables contain all data sentences supported by Nobeltec Navigation Software Table 3 2 Heading Information Wu l S a gt wa i S a wy WA g S E l A 12 Nobeltec Navigation Software User s Guide Radar Information Target Lat Lon Tracked Target Message Table 3 3 Radar Information Table 3 4 Target Tracking Information Table 3 5 Water Depth Information Wind and Water Speed and Direction Information Surface Wind Direction and Velocity Relative Wind Speed and Angle True Theoretical Soeed and Angle Table 3 6 Wind and Water Speed and Direction Information Table 3 7 Positioning and Tracking Information eet Bearing amp Distance to Pointof imer Table 3 8 Supported Device Output Chapter 3 Hardware Setup 13 Gobat Postoning stem Global Positioning System u itegrtedinseument O Table 3 9 Autopilot Talker Identifications o pa o YO m feos o m
427. y of radar blobs Clicking on the radar overlay button toggles radar overlay on and off KE 19802 ANX OROEMOONA A Pi DaN Ba r M Ndete Le 45373337N no 172 41007 wW Figure 21 5 Radar Chart Overlay When radar overlay is on important radar information is displayed in the corners of the Chart window pane WARNING Radar Overlay on your electronic charts requires a high speed and well adjusted compass Slight deviation errors are significantly magnified with radar overlay Make sure that you have setup your radar and digital compass correctly HA TIP You can also turn Radar Overlay on by right clicking on the chart and choosing Radar Overlay from the pop up menu or by selecting Radar Radar Overlay from the main menu A REMEMBER The Auto Range feature keeps chart scale and radar range synchronized making it easier to understand the radar in context with the chart To adjust radar range zoom in or out using any of the chart zoom tools ARPA amp MARPA ARPA targets are those acquired automatically by the radar MARPA targets are those you manually tell the radar to track Both target types are displayed in the same way on the Chart window pane ARPA MARPA data from your radar can be delivered to Nobeltec Navigation Software through an NMEA data string TTM or TLL For users that have a Nobeltec InSight Radar IR2 or the Nobeltec InSight Radar 2 Black Box MARPA Targets can be acquired by right clicking on the object i
428. y topic Tabs where you may edit information To open the Properties Menu for an object right click on that object and select Properties or click on the object and use the lt Alt Enter gt Hot Key Mark Properties Menu General Tab The General Tab contains general editable information about an object You may also make an object visible or invisible from this Tab which is useful when you have saved a large number of routes in a small area of chart space Description Tab Use this Tab to write a free form description of an object The New Attachment button allows you to attach a file to the object such as a text file log Word document etc To attach a document click New Attachment Browse to locate and Open the file then click OK Icon Tab The Icon Tab helps you change the visible appearance of a given Mark making it more easily identifiable on the chart Using the Icon Tab you can choose from a list of item specific icons such as a dive symbol a fish icon etc Mark x General Description leon Range Circle Weather W Display leon P Shrimp Small 4nchar T Snag o Square Figure 8 1 Mark Properties Icon Tab Chapter 8 Properties amp Options 45 Range Circle Tab Range Circles provide an easy visual reference to distances around a mark Click on the Range Circle Tab and put a mark in the check box labeled Display Range Circle s to enable range circles around the Mark or use t
429. yboard to zoom in The Up Arrow on the keyboard rotates the images up from the horizon while the Down Arrow has the opposite effect This changes the Pitch of the 3D Window gt a Left and Right Arrows on the keyboard rotate the image around the vertical axis Figure 12 2 3D Controls in Center on Boat Mode Chapter 12 3D Navigator 85 Explore Mode Explore mode allows you to view the entire 3D terrain regardless of actual position Select Explore Mode by clicking on the Mode button on the 3D ToolBar or Explore Mode from the right click menu Zooming and Panning In Explore Mode You can Zoom In and Out using the buttons on the program ToolBar or the lt gt and lt gt keys You can adjust the camera angle using the lt A gt and lt Z gt keys on your keyboard In Explore Mode however you cannot change the pitch vertical angle of the 3D window for panning therefore it is best to set pitch before switching modes To set the pitch use your Up and Down Arrows while in Center On Boat Mode Once the 3D window is angled to your liking use the Mode button on the 3D ToolBar to enter Explore Mode Once you are in Explore Mode the Right and Left Arrow keys allow you to rotate the 3D chart and the Up and Down Arrow keys move you forward and backward over the terrain Explore Mode allows you to move anywhere inside of the 3D window similar to being in an airplane and fly ing over the terrain The Up Arrow o

User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents